2018 Jeep Grand Cherokee User's Guide

2018 GRAND CHEROKEE USER GUIDEIncludes SRT®

©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.

To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).

www.jeep.com /en /owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.

Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation /Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting:

www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. residents);

www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Jeep.com (U.S.)

Jeep.ca (Canada)

18W

K-9

26-A

A

GR

AN

D C

HE

RO

KE

E

First E

ditio

n U

ser Guid

e

2844814_18a_Grand_Cherokee_UG_ENG_051017.indd 1 5/10/17 2:36 PM

ImportantGet warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.

Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving.

If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

Driving and AlcoholDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

WARNING!Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.

For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.

Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.


Congratulations on selecting your new FCAUS LLC vehicle. Be assured that it representsprecision workmanship, distinctive styling,and high quality.

ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to theroad. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands onthe steering wheel. You have full responsibilityand assume all risks related to the use of thefeatures and applications in this vehicle. Onlyuse the features and applications when it issafe to do so. Failure to do so may result in anaccident involving serious injury or death.

This guide illustrates and describes the op-eration of features and equipment that areeither standard or optional on this vehicle.This guide may also include a description offeatures and equipment that are no longeravailable or were not ordered on this vehicle.

Please disregard any features and equipmentdescribed in this guide that are not availableon this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves theright to make changes in design and specifi-cations and/or make additions to or improve-ments to its products without imposing anyobligation upon itself to install them on prod-ucts previously manufactured.

This User Guide has been prepared to helpyou quickly become acquainted with theimportant features of your vehicle. It containsmost things you will need to operate andmaintain the vehicle, including emergencyinformation.

For complete owner information, refer toyour Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)

for further information. For your convenience,the information contained on this site mayalso be printed and saved for future refer-ence.

FCA US LLC is committed to protecting ourenvironment and natural resources. By con-verting from paper to electronic delivery forthe majority of the user information for yourvehicle, together we greatly reduce the de-mand for tree-based products and lessen thestress on our environment.

When it comes to service, remember that yourauthorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehiclebest, has factory-trained technicians andgenuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about yoursatisfaction.

WELCOM

EFROM

FCAU

SLLC

1

https://www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html


http://owners.mopar.ca/

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALEssential Information

Each time direction instructions (left/right orforwards/backwards) about the vehicle aregiven, these must be intended as regardingan occupant in the driver's seat. Specialcases not complying with this rule will beproperly specified in the text.

The figures in this User Guide are provided byway of example only: this might imply thatsome details of the image do not correspondto the actual arrangement of your vehicle.

In addition, the User Guide has been con-ceived considering vehicles with steeringwheel on the left side; it is therefore possiblethat on vehicles with steering wheel on theright side, the position or construction ofsome controls is not exactly mirror-like withrespect to the figure.

To identify the chapter with the informationneeded you can consult the index at the endof this User Guide.

Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi-cated graphic tabs, at the side of each oddpage. A few pages further there is a key forgetting to know the chapter order and therelevant symbols in the tabs. There is anywaya textual indication of the current chapter atthe side of each even page.

Symbols

Some vehicle components have colored la-bels whose symbols indicate precautions tobe observed when using this component.

ROLLOVER WARNINGUtility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles. Thisvehicle has a higher ground clearance and ahigher center of gravity than many passengervehicles. It is capable of performing better ina wide variety of off-road applications. Drivenin an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go outof control. Because of the higher center ofgravity, if this vehicle is out of control it mayroll over while some other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneu-vers, or other unsafe driving actions that cancause loss of vehicle control. Failure to oper-ate this vehicle safely may result in a colli-sion, rollover of the vehicle, and severe orfatal injury. Drive carefully.

Failure to use the driver and passenger seatbelts provided is a major cause of severe orfatal injury. In fact, the U.S. governmentnotes that the universal use of existing seatbelts could cut the highway death toll by10,000 or more each year and could reducedisabling injuries by two million annually. Ina rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi-cantly more likely to die than a person wear-ing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

Rollover Warning Label

HOW

TOU

SETH

ISM

ANU

AL

2

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSWhile reading this User Guide you will find aseries of WARNINGS to be followed to pre-vent incorrect use of components whichcould cause accidents or injuries.

There are also CAUTIONS that must be fol-lowed to prevent against procedures thatcould result in damage to your vehicle.

HOW

TOU

SETH

ISM

ANU

AL

3

4

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MULTIMEDIA

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

6


INSTRUMENT PANEL. . . . . . . . . . .8

INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9


7

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Panel

1 — Air Vents 5 — Ignition2 — Paddle Shifter 6 — Steering Wheel3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Headlight Switch4 — Glove/Storage Compartment

GRAP

HIC

ALTA

BLE

OFCO

NTE

NTS

8

INTERIOR

Interior Features

1 — Door Handle 5 — Radio 9 — Gear Selector 13 — Headlight Switch2 — Air Vents 6 — Glove/Storage Compartment 10 — Ignition Switch 14 — Power Window/Door Lock

Switches3 — Paddle Shifter 7 — Seats 11 — Electronic Speed Controls4 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Climate Controls 12 — Instrument Cluster Display

Controls

9

10


VEHICLE USER GUIDE —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . .17Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . .17Vehicle On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . .19Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . .20To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . .20To Exit Remote Start Mode WithoutDriving The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .20To Exit Remote Start Mode And DriveThe Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . . . . .21General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . .22Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Irregular Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .23To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .23

DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . .24Locking The Doors With One Or MoreDoors Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Auto Relocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Child-Protection Door Lock System —Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

SEATS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Heated/Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . . . . .29

HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . .31Front Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Front Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Rear Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . .35Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . .35Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . .35Heated Steering Wheel. . . . . . . . . . . .36

MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . .37

EXTERIOR LIGHTS. . . . . . . . . . . .38Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . .39High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Automatic Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . .40Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . .41


11

WIPER/WASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Front Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Rain Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Rear Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

CLIMATE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . .43Automatic Climate Controls Overview . . .43Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . .50Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Power Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . .54Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Auto-Up Feature With Anti-PinchProtection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . .55Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . .56Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Anti-Pinch Safety Device . . . . . . . . . .57

COMMANDVIEW SUNROOFWITH POWER SHADE . . . . . . . . .57Opening Power Shade . . . . . . . . . . . .58

HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . .60

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOROPENER (HOMELINK) . . . . . . . . .62

Before You Begin ProgrammingHomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Erasing All The HomeLink Channels. . . .62Identifying Whether You Have A RollingCode Or Non-Rolling Code Device . . . . .63Programming HomeLink To A GarageDoor Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Programming HomeLink To AMiscellaneous Device . . . . . . . . . . . .64Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkButton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . .65Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Power Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

12

VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IFEQUIPPEDAccess your Owner’s Information – rightthrough your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touch-screen radio — If Equipped

To access the Vehicle User Guide on yourUconnect Touchscreen: Push the UconnectApps button, then push the Vehicle User Guideicon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect reg-istration is required.

NOTE:Vehicle User Guide features are not availablewhile the vehicle is moving. If you try toaccess while the vehicle is in motion, thesystem will display: Feature not availablewhile the vehicle is in motion.

Pre-Installed Features

• Your User Guide— Updated inreal-time

• Available whenand where youneed it

• Touchscreenconvenience

• Customizableinterface

• Maintenanceschedules andinformation

• Multilingual

• Comprehensiveicon & symbolglossary

13

NOTE:Uconnect screen images are for illustrationpurposes only and may not reflect exact soft-ware for your vehicle.

Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide,you will be able to explore your warrantyinformation and radio manual when andwhere you need them. Your Uconnect radiowill display the Vehicle User Guide on yourtouchscreen radio to assist in better under-

standing your vehicle. There’s no app todownload, no phone to connect and no exter-nal device needed for playback. Plus, it’supdated throughout the year, in real-time, soit never goes out of date.

Vehicle User Guide Home Screen

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

14

Features/Benefits

• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touch-screen radio

• Enhanced search and browsing capability

• Robust NAV application — If Equipped

• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor-ites category

• Icon and symbol glossary

• Warranty information

• Crucial driver information and assistance:

• OperatingInstructions

• MaintenanceSchedules

• WarrantyInformation

• EmergencyProcedures

• Fluid LevelStandards

• 911 Contact andMore

Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon toadd it to your Favorites, for easy access in thefuture.

KEYSKey Fob

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.The ignition system consists of a key fob withRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system. The Re-mote Keyless Entry system consists of a key foband Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.

NOTE:The key fob may not be found if it is locatednext to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-tronic device; these devices may block thekey fob’s wireless signal.

The key fob allows you to lock or unlock thedoors and liftgate from distances up to ap-proximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheldkey fob. The key fob does not need to bepointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE:In the ON/RUN position, the lock button isdisabled. Only the unlock button is enabled.

Enhanced Search And BrowsingCapability

Icon And Symbol Glossary

15

NOTE:In case the ignition switch does not changewith the push of a button, the key fob mayhave a low or dead battery. In this situation,a back up method can be used to operate the

ignition switch. Put the nose side of the keyfob (side opposite of the Emergency Key)against the ENGINE START/STOP button andpush to operate the ignition switch.

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the unlock button on thekey fob once to unlock the driver's door ortwice within five seconds to unlock all doorsand the liftgate.

All doors can be programmed to unlock onthe first push of the unlock button. Refer to“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in theOwner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further information.

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the lock button on the keyfob to lock all doors and liftgate.

If one or more doors are open, or the liftgateis open, the doors will lock. The doors willunlock again automatically if the key is leftinside the passenger compartment, other-wise the doors will stay locked.

Programming Additional Key Fobs

Programming the key fob may be performedby your authorized dealer.

Request For Additional Key Fobs

NOTE:Only key fobs that are programmed to thevehicle electronics can be used to startand operate the vehicle. Once a key fob isprogrammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-grammed to any other vehicle.

WARNING!

• Always remove the key fobs from thevehicle and lock all doors when leavingthe vehicle unattended.

• Always remember to place the ignition inthe OFF mode.

Duplication of key fobs may be performed atan authorized dealer. This procedure consistsof programming a blank key fob to the vehicleelectronics. A blank key fob is one that hasnever been programmed.

Key Fob

1 — Unlock2 — Liftgate3 — Lock4 — Remote Start5 — Panic

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

16




NOTE:When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with youto an authorized dealer.

NOTE:Black keys (6.4L) must be replaced withblack keys and Red Keys (6.2L) must bereplaced with Red Keys.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies toall radio frequency (RF) devices equipped inthis vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

NOTE:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to oper-ate the equipment.

IGNITION SWITCHKeyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition

This feature allows the driver to operate theignition switch with the push of a button aslong as the key fob is in the passenger com-partment.

The Keyless Push Button Ignition has fouroperating modes which are labeled and willilluminate when in position. The three posi-tions are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.

NOTE:If the ignition switch does not change withthe push of a button, the key fob may have alow or dead battery. In this situation, a backup method can be used to operate the igni-tion switch. Put the nose side (side oppositeof the emergency key) of the key fob againstthe ENGINE START/STOP button and push tooperate the ignition switch.

The push button ignition can be placed in thefollowing modes:

OFF

• The engine is stopped.

• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central lock-ing, alarm, etc.) are still available.

ACC

• Engine is not started.

• Some electrical devices are available.

START/STOP Ignition Button

17

RUN

• Driving position.

• All the electrical devices are available.

START

• The engine will start.

WARNING!

• When exiting the vehicle, always removethe key fob from the vehicle and lockyour vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-attended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could be seri-ously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parkingbrake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible tochildren, and do not leave the ignitionof a vehicle equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. Achild could operate power windows,other controls, or move the vehicle.

WARNING!• Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interiorheat build-up may cause serious injuryor death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation forthieves. Always remove key fob from thevehicle and lock all doors when leaving thevehicle unattended.

NOTE:Refer to "Starting The Engine," in "StartingAnd Operating" on your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

Vehicle On Message

When opening the driver's door when theignition is in RUN (engine not running), achime will sound to remind you to place the

ignition in the OFF position. In addition tothe chime, the message will display “IgnitionOr Accessory On” in the cluster.

NOTE:The power window switches and power sun-roof (if equipped) will remain active up to tenminutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFFposition. Opening either front door will can-cel this feature. The time for this feature isprogrammable.

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always come toa complete stop, then shift the auto-matic transmission into PARK, apply theparking brake, place the engine in theOFF position, remove the key fob fromthe vehicle and lock your vehicle. Ifequipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, al-ways make sure the keyless ignition is in“OFF” position, remove the key fob fromthe vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

18



WARNING!• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

attended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could be seri-ously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parkingbrake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible tochildren, and do not leave the ignitionof a vehicle equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. Achild could operate power windows,other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interiorheat build-up may cause serious injuryor death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation forthieves. Always remove key fob from thevehicle and lock all doors when leaving thevehicle unattended.

REMOTE STARTINGSYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

• Push the remote start button on the key fobtwice within five seconds. Pushing the re-mote start button a third time shuts theengine off.

• With remote start, the engine will only runfor 15 minutes (time out) unless the igni-tion is placed in the ON/RUN position.

• The vehicle must be manually started witha push of the ignition START/STOP buttonafter two consecutive time outs.

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closedgarage or confined area. Exhaust gascontains Carbon Monoxide (CO) whichis odorless and colorless. Carbon Mon-oxide is poisonous and can cause seri-ous injury or death when inhaled.

• Keep key fobs away from children. Op-eration of the Remote Start System,windows, door locks or other controlscould cause serious injury or death.

How To Use Remote Start• Push Remote Start button on the key fob

twice within five seconds. Pushing the Re-mote Start button a third time shuts theengine off.

• With remote start, the engine will only runfor 15 minutes (time out) unless the igni-tion is placed in the ON/RUN position.

• The vehicle must be manually started witha push of the ignition START/STOP buttonafter two consecutive time outs.

All of the following conditions must be metbefore the engine will remote start:

• Gear Selector in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Liftgate closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal notpushed)

• Battery at an acceptable charge level

• PANIC button not pushed

19

• System not disabled from previous remotestart event

• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing

• Ignition in STOP/OFF position

• Fuel level meets minimum requirement

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closedgarage or confined area. Exhaust gascontains Carbon Monoxide (CO) whichis odorless and colorless. Carbon Mon-oxide is poisonous and can cause seri-ous injury or death when inhaled.

• Keep key fobs away from children. Op-eration of the Remote Start System,windows, door locks or other controlscould cause serious injury or death.

Remote Start Abort MessageThe following messages will display in theinstrument cluster display if the vehicle fails toremote start or exits remote start prematurely:

• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open

• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open

• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted Timer Expired

• Remote Start Aborted Liftgate Open

• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle ToReset

The instrument cluster display messagestays active until the ignition is turned to theON/RUN position.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Push and release the Remote Start button onthe key fob twice within five seconds. Thevehicle doors will lock, the turn signals willflash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.Then the engine will start, and the vehiclewill remain in the Remote Start mode for a15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• If an engine fault is present or fuel level islow, the vehicle will start and then shutdown in 10 seconds.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain onduring Remote Start mode.

• For security, power window operation isdisabled when the vehicle is in the RemoteStart mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutivetimes (two 15-minute cycles) with the keyfob. However, the ignition must be placedin the ON/RUN position before you canrepeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

To Exit Remote Start Mode WithoutDriving The Vehicle

Push and release the Remote Start buttonone time or allow the remote start cycle tocomplete the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the sys-tem will disable the one time push of theRemote Start button for two seconds afterreceiving a valid Remote Start request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And DriveThe Vehicle

Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push andrelease the unlock button on the key fob tounlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle usingKeyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

20

door handles, and disarm the vehicle securityalarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end ofthe 15-minute cycle, push and release theSTART/STOP button.

NOTE:For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message“Remote Start Active — Push Start Button”will display in the instrument cluster displayuntil you push the ignition START button.

Comfort Systems — If Equipped

When Remote Start is activated, Auto-Comfort will work anytime the temperatureconditions are correct. When the feature isenabled, regardless of Remote Start or regu-lar keyless start, the driver heated seat fea-tures will automatically turn on in coldweather. In warm weather, the driver ventedseat feature will automatically turn on whenthe Remote Start is activated. These featureswill stay on through the duration of RemoteStart or until the ignition is placed in theON/RUN position.

NOTE:The Auto Comfort System can be activatedand deactivated through the Uconnect sys-tem. For more information on Comfort Sys-tem operation, refer to “Uconnect Settings”in “Multimedia” on your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

General Information






SENTRY KEYThe Sentry Key Immobilizer system preventsunauthorized vehicle operation by disablingthe engine. The system does not need to bearmed or activated. Operation is automatic,regardless of whether the vehicle is locked orunlocked.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is notcompatible with some aftermarket remotestarting systems. Use of these systemsmay result in vehicle starting problemsand loss of security protection.

All of the key fobs provided with your newvehicle have been programmed to the vehicleelectronics.

21



Customer Key ProgrammingProgramming key fobs may be performed atyour authorized dealer.

Replacement Keys

NOTE:Only key fobs that are programmed to thevehicle electronics can be used to startand operate the vehicle. Once a key fob isprogrammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-grammed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Always remove the key fobs from thevehicle and lock all doors when leavingthe vehicle unattended.

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember toplace the ignition in the OFF position.

NOTE:Duplication of key fobs may be performed atan authorized dealer. This procedure consistsof programming a blank key fob to the vehicleelectronics. A blank key fob is one that hasnever been programmed.

When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with youto an authorized dealer.

Irregular Operation

The system uses a key fob, an Ignition NodeModule, Keyless Push Button Ignition and aRF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicleoperation. Therefore, only key fobs that areprogrammed to the vehicle can be used tostart and operate the vehicle. The system willnot allow the engine to crank if an invalid keyfob is used to start and operate the vehicle.The system will shut the engine off in twoseconds if an invalid key fob is used to startthe engine.

NOTE:A key fob that has not been programmed isalso considered an invalid key.

During normal operation, after placing thekeyless ignition in the ON/RUN mode, theVehicle Security Light will turn on for threeseconds for a bulb check. If the light remainson after the bulb check, it indicates thatthere is a problem with the electronics. Inaddition, if the light begins to flash after the

bulb check, it indicates that someone usedan invalid key fob to try to start the engine.Either of these conditions will result in theengine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on duringnormal vehicle operation (vehicle running forlonger than 10 seconds), it indicates thatthere is a fault in the electronics. Should thisoccur, have the vehicle serviced as soon aspossible by an authorized dealer.

General Information





GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

22


VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM— IF EQUIPPEDThe vehicle security alarm monitors the ve-hicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the KeylessEnter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized op-eration. While the vehicle security alarm isarmed, interior switches for door locks andliftgate release are disabled. If somethingtriggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarmwill provide the following audible and visiblesignals:

• The horn will pulse

• The turn signals will flash

• The vehicle security light in the instrumentcluster will flash

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the vehicle securityalarm:

1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placedin the “OFF” mode.

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignitionsystem is OFF.

2. Perform one of the following methods tolock the vehicle:

• Push the lock button on the interiorpower door lock switch with the driverand/or passenger door open.

• Push the lock button on the exteriorPassive Entry Door Handle with a validkey fob available in the same exteriorzone, refer to "Doors" in "Getting ToKnow Your Vehicle" in the Owner’sManual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents)or www.owners.mopar.ca (CanadianResidents) for further information.

• Push the lock button on the exteriorPassive Entry Door Handle with a validkey fob available in the same exteriorzone.

• Push the lock button on the key fob.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

To Disarm The System

The vehicle security alarm can be disarmedusing any of the following methods:

• Push the unlock button on the key fob.

• Grasp the passive entry door handle tounlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "GettingTo Know Your Vehicle" in the Owner’sManual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi-dents) for further information.

• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode todisarm the system.

23







NOTE:

• The driver's door key cylinder and the lift-gate button on the key fob cannot arm ordisarm the vehicle security alarm.

• The vehicle security alarm remains armedduring power liftgate entry. Pushing theliftgate button will not disarm the vehiclesecurity alarm. If someone enters the ve-hicle through the liftgate and opens anydoor, the alarm will sound.

• When the vehicle security alarm is armed,the interior power door lock switches willnot unlock the doors.

The vehicle security alarm is designed toprotect your vehicle. However, you can createconditions where the system will give you afalse alarm. If one of the previously describedarming sequences has occurred, the vehiclesecurity alarm will arm regardless of whetheryou are in the vehicle or not. If you remain inthe vehicle and open a door, the alarm willsound. If this occurs, disarm the vehiclesecurity alarm.

If the vehicle security alarm is armed and thebattery becomes disconnected, the vehiclesecurity alarm will remain armed when thebattery is reconnected; the exterior lights willflash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,disarm the vehicle security alarm.

DOORSKeyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry

The Passive Entry system is an enhancementto the vehicle’s key fob and a feature ofKeyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. Thisfeature allows you to lock and unlock thevehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without havingto push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Uconnect Settings” in“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further informa-tion.

• The key fob may not be able to be detectedby the vehicle passive entry system if it islocated next to a mobile phone, laptop, orother electronic device; these devices mayblock the key fob’s wireless signal andprevent the passive entry system fromlocking/unlocking the vehicle.

• Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminatedapproach (Low Beams, License PlateLamp, Position Lamps) for whichever timeduration is set between 0, 30 (default),60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlockalso initiates two flashes of the turn signallamps.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it hasbeen raining/snowing on the Passive Entrydoor handle, the unlock sensitivity can beaffected, resulting in a slower responsetime.

• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entryand no door is opened within 60 seconds,the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped willarm the security alarm.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

24



To Unlock From The Driver Side

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab thefront driver door handle to unlock the driver'sdoor automatically.

NOTE:If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-grammed all doors will unlock when yougrab hold of the front driver’s door handle.

To select between “Unlock Driver Door1st Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1stPress,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

To Unlock From The Passenger Side

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grabthe front passenger door handle to unlock allfour doors and the liftgate automatically.

NOTE:All doors will unlock when the front passen-ger door handle is grabbed regardless ofthe driver’s door unlock preference setting(“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “UnlockAll Doors 1st Press”).

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive EntryKey Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)

To minimize the possibility of unintentionallylocking a Passive Entry key fob inside yourvehicle, the Passive Entry system is equippedwith an automatic door unlock feature whichwill function if the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles withpassive entry. There are five situations thattrigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passiveentry vehicle:

• A lock request is made by a valid PassiveEntry key fob while a door is open.

• A lock request is made by the Passive Entrydoor handle while a door is open.

• A lock request is made by the door panelswitch while the door is open.

• When the vehicle security alarm is in pre-arm or armed status and the liftgate transi-tions from open to closed.

• When the liftgate transitions from openedto closed and remote start is active.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

25



When any of these situations occur, after allopen doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe searchwill be executed. If it finds a Passive Entrykey fob inside the car, the car will unlock andalert the customer.

NOTE:The vehicle will only unlock the doors when avalid Passive Entry key fob is detected insidethe vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock thedoors when any of the following conditionsare true:

• The doors are manually locked using thedoor lock knobs.

• Three attempts are made to lock the doorsusing the door panel switch and then closethe doors.

• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob out-side the vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of aPassive Entry door handle.

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobwithin 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passengerfront door handles, pushing the passive entrylock button will lock the vehicle.

NOTE:DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushingthe door handle lock button. This could un-lock the door(s).

NOTE:

• After pushing the door handle button, youmust wait two seconds before you can lockor unlock the doors, using either PassiveEntry door handle. This is done to allow youto check if the vehicle is locked by pullingthe door handle without the vehicle react-ing and unlocking.

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

26

• If Passive Entry is disabled using UconnectSystem, the key protection described in"Preventing Inadvertent Locking of PassiveEntry Key Fob in Vehicle" remains active/functional.

• The Passive Entry system will not operate ifthe key fob battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by usingthe lock button located on the vehicle’s inte-rior door panel.

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate passive entry unlock feature isbuilt into the electronic liftgate release. Witha valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronicliftgate release to open with one fluid motion.

To Lock The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entrylock button located on the outside liftgatedoor handle.

NOTE:The liftgate passive entry lock button will lockall doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlockfeature is built into the electronic liftgaterelease.

Locking The Doors With One Or MoreDoors Open

If the door lock switch is pushed while theignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver'sdoor is open, the doors will not lock.

Auto Relocking

The auto door lock feature default conditionis enabled. When enabled, the door locks willlock automatically when the vehicle's speedexceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto doorlock feature can be enabled or disabled byyour authorized dealer. The auto door lockfeature is enabled/disabled in the UconnectSettings.

Electronic Liftgate Release/LiftgatePassive Entry Location

1 — Electronic Liftgate Release2 — Lock Button Location

27

Child-Protection Door Lock System —Rear Doors

To provide a safer environment for small chil-dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doorsare equipped with a Child-Protection DoorLock system.

To use the system, open each rear door, use aflat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) androtate the dial to the lock or unlock position.When the system on a door is engaged, thatdoor can only be opened by using the outsidedoor handle even if the inside door lock is inthe unlocked position.

SEATSMemory Seat

This feature allows the driver to store up totwo different memory profiles for easy recallthrough a memory switch. Each memory pro-file contains desired position settings for thedriver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt andtelescopic steering column (if equipped) and

a set of desired radio station presets. Yourremote keyless entry key fob can also beprogrammed to recall the same positionswhen the unlock button is pushed.

NOTE:Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,one key fob can be linked to memory position1 and the other key fob can be linked tomemory position 2.

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

Memory Seat ButtonsGETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

28

The memory seat switch is located on thedriver’s door trim panel. The switch consistsof three buttons:

• The set (S) button, which is used to activatethe memory save function.

• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used torecall either of two pre-programmed memoryprofiles.

Programming The Memory Feature

NOTE:To create a new memory profile, perform thefollowing:

1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine).

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to de-sired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror,power tilt and telescopic steering column[if equipped], and radio station presets).

3. Push and release the set (S) button on thememory switch.

4. Within five seconds, push and releaseeither of the memory buttons (1) or (2).The instrument cluster display will showwhich memory position has been set.

NOTE:

• Memory profiles can be set without thevehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be inPARK to recall a memory profile.

• To set a memory profile to your key fob, referto “Linking And Unlinking The RemoteKeyless Entry Key Fob To Memory” on yourOwner's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents)or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi-dents) for further details.

Heated/Ventilated Seats

Front Heated Seats

The front heated seats control buttons arelocated within the climate or controls screenof the touchscreen.

You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heatsettings. The indicator arrows in touchscreenbuttons indicate the level of heat in use. Twoindicator arrows will illuminate for HI, one forLO and none for OFF.

• Press the heated seat button once toturn the HI setting ON.

• Press the heated seat button a secondtime to turn the LO setting ON.

• Press the heated seat button a thirdtime to turn the heating elements OFF.

If the HI-level setting is selected, the systemwill automatically switch to LO-level afterapproximately 60 minutes of continuous op-eration. At that time, the display will changefrom HI to LO, indicating the change. TheLO-level setting will turn OFF automaticallyafter approximately 45 minutes.

NOTE:

• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will befelt within two to five minutes.

• The engine must be running for the heatedseats to operate.

29




Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remotestart, the heated seats can be programmed tocome on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed throughthe Uconnect system. Refer to your Own-er's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further details.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain tothe skin because of advanced age,chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cordinjury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-tion or other physical condition mustexercise care when using the seatheater. It may cause burns even at lowtemperatures, especially if used for longperiods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat orseatback that insulates against heat,such as a blanket or cushion. This maycause the seat heater to overheat. Sit-

WARNING!ting in a seat that has been overheatedcould cause serious burns due to theincreased surface temperature of theseat.

Rear Heated Seats

On some models, the two outboard seats areequipped with heated seats. The heated seatswitches for these seats are located on the rearof the center console. There are two heatedseat switches that allow the rear passen-gers to operate the seats independently.

You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heatsettings. The indicator lights in each switchindicate the level of heat in use. Two indica-tor lights will illuminate for HI, one for LOand none for OFF.

• Push the heated seat button once toselect HI-level heating.

• Push the heated seat button a secondtime to select LO-level heating.

• Push the heated seat button a thirdtime to turn the heating elements OFF.

NOTE:

• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will befelt within two to five minutes.

• The engine must be running for the heatedseats to operate.

If the HI-level setting is selected, the systemwill automatically switch to LO-level after ap-proximately 60 minutes of continuous opera-tion. At that time, the number of illuminatedLEDs changes from two to one, indicating thechange. The LO-level setting will turn OFFautomatically after approximately 45 minutes.

Front Ventilated Seats

If your vehicle is equipped with ventilatedseats, the seat cushion and seat back willhave fans that draw the air from the passen-ger compartment and move air through fineperforations in the seat cover to help keep thedriver and front passenger cooler in higherambient temperatures. The fans operate attwo speeds, HI and LO.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

30




The front ventilated seats control buttons arelocated within the Uconnect system. You cangain access to the control buttons throughthe climate screen or the controls screen.

• Press the ventilated seat button once tochoose HI.

• Press the ventilated seat button a sec-ond time to choose LO.

• Press the ventilated seat button a thirdtime to turn the ventilated seat OFF.

NOTE:The engine must be running for the ventilatedseats to operate.


On models that are equipped with remotestart, the ventilated seats can be pro-grammed to come on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed throughthe Uconnect system. Refer to your Own-er's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further details.

HEAD RESTRAINTSHead restraints are designed to reduce therisk of injury by restricting head movement inthe event of a rear impact. Head restraintsshould be adjusted so that the top of the headrestraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver,should not operate a vehicle or sit in avehicle’s seat until the head restraintsare placed in their proper positions inorder to minimize the risk of neck injuryin the event of a crash.

• Head restraints should never be ad-justed while the vehicle is in motion.Driving a vehicle with the head restraintsimproperly adjusted or removed couldcause serious injury or death in the eventof a collision.

Front Adjustment

Active Head Restraints are passive, deploy-able components, and vehicles with thisequipment cannot be readily identified byany markings, only through visual inspectionof the head restraint. The Active Head Re-straints (AHR) will be split in two halves, withthe front half being soft foam and trim, theback half being decorative plastic.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, thefront half of the head restraint extends for-ward to minimize the gap between the backof the occupant’s head and the AHR. Thissystem is designed to help prevent or reducethe extent of injuries to the driver and frontpassenger in certain types of rear impacts.Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

31






To raise the head restraint, pull upward onthe head restraint. To lower the head re-straint, push the adjustment button, locatedat the base of the head restraint, and pushdownward on the head restraint.

For comfort, the Active Head Restraints canbe tilted forward and rearward. To tilt thehead restraint closer to the back of your head,

pull forward on the bottom of the head re-straint. Push rearward on the bottom of thehead restraint to move the head restraintaway from your head.

NOTE:

• The head restraints should only be removedby qualified technicians, for service pur-poses only. If either of the head restraintsrequire removal, see your authorized dealer.

• In the event of deployment of an Active HeadRestraint, refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-tems” in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual at

Adjustment ButtonActive Head Restraint (Normal Position)

Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

32

www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver,should not operate a vehicle or sit in avehicle’s seat until the head restraintsare placed in their proper positions inorder to minimize the risk of neck injuryin the event of a collision.

• Do not place items over the top of theActive Head Restraint, such as coats,seat covers or portable DVD players.These items may interfere with the op-eration of the Active Head Restraint inthe event of a collision and could resultin serious injury or death.

• Active Head Restraints may be deployedif they are struck by an object such as ahand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci-dental deployment of the Active HeadRestraint ensure that all cargo is se-cured, as loose cargo could contact theActive Head Restraint during sudden

WARNING!stops. Failure to follow this warningcould cause personal injury if the ActiveHead Restraint is deployed.

Front Removal

WARNING!

ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-stalled in the vehicle to properly protectthe occupants.

NOTE:

• The head restraints should only be removedby qualified technicians, for service pur-poses only. If either of the head restraintsrequire removal, see your authorized dealer.

• In the event of deployment of an Active HeadRestraint, refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-tems” in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

WARNING!



• Active Head Restraints may be deployedif they are struck by an object such as ahand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci-dental deployment of the Active HeadRestraint ensure that all cargo is se-cured, as loose cargo could contact theActive Head Restraint during suddenstops. Failure to follow this warningcould cause personal injury if the ActiveHead Restraint is deployed.

33





Rear Adjustment

The head restraints on the outboard seats arenot adjustable. They automatically fold for-ward when the rear seat is folded to a loadfloor position but do not return to their nor-mal position when the rear seat is raised.After returning either seat to its upright posi-tion, raise the head restraint until it locks inplace. The outboard head restraints are notremovable.

The center head restraint can be adjustedwhen occupied, or removed for Child SeatTethering. To remove the head restraint, raiseit as far as it can go by pulling upward. Then,push the release button at the base of thepost while pulling the head restraint upward.To reinstall the head restraint, put the headrestraint posts into the holes and push down-ward. Then, adjust the head restraint to theappropriate height.

WARNING!

• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-stalled in the vehicle to properly pro-tect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior tooperating the vehicle or occupying aseat.

• Sitting in a seat with the head restraintin its lowered position could result inserious injury or death in a collision.Always make sure the outboard headrestraints are in their upright positionswhen the seat is to be occupied.

NOTE:For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether,refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in“Safety” in your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

Folded Rear Head RestraintCenter Head Restraint Release Button

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

34



STEERING WHEELManual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column

This feature allows you to tilt the steeringcolumn upward or downward. It also allows youto lengthen or shorten the steering column.The tilt/telescoping lever is located belowthe steering wheel at the end of the steeringcolumn.

To unlock the steering column, push the leverdownward (toward the floor). To tilt the steer-ing column, move the steering wheel upwardor downward as desired. To lengthen orshorten the steering column, pull the steeringwheel outward or push it inward as desired.To lock the steering column in position, pushthe lever upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column whiledriving. Adjusting the steering columnwhile driving or driving with the steeringcolumn unlocked, could cause the driverto lose control of the vehicle. Failure tofollow this warning may result in seriousinjury or death.

Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column

This feature allows you to tilt the steeringcolumn upward or downward. It also allowsyou to lengthen or shorten the steering col-umn. The power tilt/telescoping steering col-umn lever is located below the multifunctionlever on the steering column.

To tilt the steering column, move the lever upor down as desired. To lengthen or shorten thesteering column, pull the lever toward you orpush the lever away from you as desired.

WARNING!Do not adjust the steering column whiledriving. Adjusting the steering columnwhile driving or driving with the steeringcolumn unlocked, could cause the driver

Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering ColumnHandle

Power Tilt/Telescoping Control

35

WARNING!to lose control of the vehicle. Failure tofollow this warning may result in seriousinjury or death.

Heated Steering WheelThe steering wheel contains a heating elementthat helps warm your hands in cold weather.The heated steering wheel has only one tem-perature setting. Once the heated steeringwheel has been turned on, it will operate for anaverage of 80 minutes or more before auto-matically shutting off. This time may vary de-pending on the temperature of the environ-ment. The heated steering wheel can shut offearly or may not turn on when the steeringwheel is already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button islocated within the Uconnect system. You cangain access to the control button through theclimate screen or the controls screen.

• Press the heated steering wheel buttononce to turn the heating element on.

• Press the heated steering wheel button asecond time to turn the heating element off.

NOTE:The engine must be running for the heatedsteering wheel to operate.


On models that are equipped with remotestart, the heated steering wheel can be pro-grammed to come on during a remote startthrough the Uconnect system. Refer to“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in theOwner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canada Residents)for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain tothe skin because of advanced age,chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-tion, or other physical conditions mustexercise care when using the steeringwheel heater. It may cause burns evenat low temperatures, especially if usedfor long periods.

WARNING!• Do not place anything on the steering

wheel that insulates against heat, suchas a blanket or steering wheel covers ofany type and material. This may causethe steering wheel heater to overheat.

MIRRORSFolding Mirrors

All outside mirrors are hinged and may bemoved either forward or rearward to resist dam-age. The hinges have three detent positions:

• Full forward position

• Full rearward position

• Normal position

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

36



http://owners.mopar.ca

Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped

If equipped with power folding mirrors, theycan be electrically folded rearward and un-folded into the drive position.

The switch for the power folding mirrors islocated between the power mirror switches L(left) and R (right). Push the switch once andthe mirrors will fold in, push the switch asecond time and the mirrors will return to thenormal driving position.

If the mirror is manually folded after electri-cally cycled, a potential extra button push isrequired to get the mirrors back to the homeposition. If the mirror does not electricallyfold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivotarea which can cause excessive drag.

Automatic Power Folding Mirrors

When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature isenabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in whenexiting the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, alldoors are closed, and the doors are locked).

• If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded,they will unfold when the ignition is turnedON.

• If the exterior mirrors were manually folded,they will not automatically unfold.

For more information on power foldingmirrors, refer to the Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents).

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to meltfrost or ice. This feature can be ac-tivated whenever you turn on the

rear window defroster. Refer to “Climate Con-trols” in this chapter for further information.

Power Folding Mirror Switch

37



EXTERIOR LIGHTSHeadlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the leftside of the instrument panel, next to thesteering wheel. The headlight switch controlsthe operation of the headlights, parkinglights, instrument panel lights, cargo lightsand fog lights (if equipped).

Headlights

To turn on the headlights, rotate the head-light switch clockwise. When the headlightswitch is on, the parking lights, taillights,license plate light and instrument panellights are also turned on. To turn off theheadlights, rotate the headlight switch backto the O (Off) position.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head-light and fog light (if equipped) lenses thatare lighter and less susceptible to stonebreakage than glass lights. Plastic is not asscratch resistant as glass and thereforedifferent lens cleaning procedures must befollowed.

• To minimize the possibility of scratchingthe lenses and reducing light output, avoidwiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt,wash with a mild soap solution followed byrinsing.

Headlight Switch

1 — Auto2 — Rotate Headlight Switch3 — Push Fog Lights4 — Rotate Dimmer

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

38

CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive cleaning components,solvents, steel wool or other abrasive ma-terials to clean the lenses.

Daytime Running Lights

Non-SRT Vehicles

The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity)come on whenever the engine is running, andthe transmission is not in the PARK position.The lights will remain on until the ignition isswitched to the OFF or ACC position or theparking brake is engaged.

NOTE:

• If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lampon the same side of the vehicle will turn offfor the duration of the turn signal activa-tion. Once the turn signal is no longeractive, the DRL lamp will illuminate.

• The DRL function may be disabled throughthe Uconnect system. Refer to “UconnectSettings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s

Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further information.

SRT Vehicles

The Daytime Running Lights (bright inten-sity) come on whenever the engine is running,and the transmission is not in the PARKposition. The lights will remain on until theignition is switched to the OFF or ACC posi-tion or the parking brake is engaged.

The headlight switch must be used for normalnighttime driving.

High Beams

Push the multifunction lever toward the in-strument panel to switch the headlights tohigh beams. Pulling the multifunction backtoward the steering wheel will turn the lowbeams back on, or shut the high beams off.

Flash-To-PassYou can signal another vehicle with yourheadlights by partially pulling the multifunc-tion lever toward the steering wheel. This will

cause the high beam headlights to turn onuntil the lever is released.

Automatic Lighting

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Controlsystem provides increased forward lighting atnight by automating high beam controlthrough the use of a digital camera mountedon the inside rearview mirror. This cameradetects vehicle specific light and automati-cally switches from high beams to low beamsuntil the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE:

• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Con-trol can be turned on or off by selecting“ON” under “Auto High Beam” within yourUconnect settings, as well as turningthe headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further informa-tion.

39






• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlightsand taillights of vehicles in the field of viewwill cause headlights to remain on longer(closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, andother obstructions on the windshield orcamera lens will cause the system to func-tion improperly.

• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-BeamSensitivity Control (default) and enter Re-duced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (notrecommended), toggle highbeam lever6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds ofignition ON. System will return to defaultsetting upon ignition off.

If the windshield or Automatic High BeamHeadlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mir-ror must be re-aimed to ensure proper perfor-mance. See your local authorized dealer.

Parking Lights And Panel Lights

To turn on the parking lights and instrumentpanel lights, rotate the headlight switchclockwise. To turn off the parking lights,rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off)position.

Headlight Delay

To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equippedwith a headlight delay that will leave theheadlights on for approximately up to 90 sec-onds. This delay is initiated when the ignitionis turned OFF while the headlight switch ison, and then the headlight switch is cycledoff. Headlight delay can be cancelled byeither turning the headlight switch on thenoff, or by turning the ignition ON.

NOTE:This feature can be programmed throughthe Uconnect system. Refer to “UconnectSettings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’sManual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further information.

Fog Lights

The fog lights are turned on by rotating theheadlight switch to the parking light or head-light position and pushing in the headlightrotary control.

The fog lights will operate only when theparking lights are on or when the vehicleheadlights are on low beam. An indicatorlight located in the instrument cluster displaywill illuminate when the fog lights are on. Thefog lights will turn off when the switch ispushed a second time, when the headlightswitch is rotated to the off position, or thehigh beam is selected.

Fog Light Operation

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

40




Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down andthe arrows on each side of the instrumentcluster display flash to show proper operationof the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE:If either light remains on and does not flash,or there is a very fast flash rate, check for adefective outside light bulb. If an indicatorfails to light when the lever is moved, it wouldsuggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without mov-ing beyond the detent, and the turn signal(right or left) will flash three times thenautomatically turn off.

INTERIOR LIGHTSCourtesy and dome lights are turned on whenthe front doors are opened or when thedimmer control (rotating wheel on the right

side of the headlight switch) is rotated to itsfarthest upward position. If your vehicle isequipped with remote keyless entry and theunlock button is pushed on the key fob, thecourtesy and dome lights will turn on. When adoor is open and the interior lights are on,rotating the dimmer control all the way down,to the last (off) detent, will cause all theinterior lights to go out. This is also known asthe “Party” mode because it allows the doorsto stay open for extended periods of timewithout discharging the vehicle’s battery.

WIPER/WASHERThe multifunction lever is located on the leftside of the steering column.

Front Wipers

The windshield wiper/washer controls are lo-cated on the multifunction lever on the leftside of the steering column. The front wipersare operated by rotating a switch, located onthe end of the lever. For information on therear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Wiper” inthis section.

Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever to one of the firstfour detent positions for intermittent set-tings, the fifth detent for low wiper operationand the sixth detent for high wiper operation.

CAUTION!

Always remove any buildup of snow thatprevents the windshield wiper blades fromreturning to the park position. If the wind-shield wiper switch is turned off, and theblades cannot return to the park position,damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Multifunction Lever

41

Rain Sensor

This feature senses moisture on the wind-shield and automatically activates the wipersfor the driver. The feature is especially usefulfor road splash or overspray from the wind-shield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotatethe end of the multifunction lever to one offour settings to activate this feature.

Automatic Wiping

The sensitivity of the system can be adjustedwith the multifunction lever. Wiper delay po-sition one is the least sensitive, and wiperdelay position four is the most sensitive.Setting three should be used for normal rainconditions. Settings one and two can be usedif the driver desires less wiper sensitivity.Setting four can be used if the driver desiresmore sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in theOFF position when not using the system.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operatewhen the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not functionproperly when ice, or dried salt water ispresent on the windshield.

• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax orsilicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-mance.

• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned onand off using the Uconnect System, refer to“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” inthe Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi-dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (CanadianResidents) for further information.

The Rain Sensing system has protection fea-tures for the wiper blades and arms, and willnot operate under the following conditions:

• Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-tion is first turned ON, the Rain Sensingsystem will not operate until the wiperswitch is moved, vehicle speed is greaterthan 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — Whenthe ignition is ON, and the automatic trans-mission is in the NEUTRAL position, theRain Sensing system will not operate untilthe wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed isgreater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gearselector is moved out of the NEUTRALposition.

Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehiclesequipped with Remote Starting system, RainSensing wipers are not operational when thevehicle is in the remote start mode. Once theoperator is in the vehicle and has placed theignition switch in the RUN position, rainsensing wiper operation can resume, if it hasbeen selected, and no other inhibit condi-tions (mentioned previously) exist.

Rear Wiper

The rear wiper/washer controls are located onthe multifunction lever on the left side of thesteering column. The rear wiper/washer isoperated by rotating a switch, located at themiddle of the lever.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

42




Wiper Operation

Rotate the center portion of the lever upwardto the first detent for intermittent operationand to the second detent for continuous rearwiper operation.

Rotating the center portion upward oncemore will activate the washer pump whichwill continue to operate as long as the switchis held. Upon release of the switch, the wip-ers will resume the continuous rear wiperoperation. When this rotary control is in theOFF position, rotating it downward will acti-vate the rear washer pump which will con-tinue to operate as long as the switch is held.

Once the switch is released it will return tothe OFF position and the wipers will cycleseveral times before returning to the parkedposition.

NOTE:As a protective measure, the pump will stop ifthe switch is held for more than 20 seconds.Once the switch is released the pump willresume normal operation.

If the rear wiper is operating when the igni-tion is turned OFF, the wiper will automati-cally return to the “park” position.

CLIMATE CONTROLSAutomatic Climate Controls Overview

The Climate Control System allows you toregulate the temperature, air flow, and direc-tion of air circulating throughout the vehicle.The controls are located on the instrumentpanel below the radio.

43

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

44

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

45

Automatic Climate Controls On The Faceplate

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

46

Control Descriptions

Icon Description

MAX A/C ButtonPress and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this functionagain will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

A/C ButtonPress and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.

Recirculation ButtonPress and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system betweenrecirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors,dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. The A/C can be dese-lected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make theinside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. The A/C can be dese-lected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.

AUTO ButtonAutomatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this func-tion will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” formore information.

Front Defrost ButtonThe Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature ison. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower levelmay increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting anddefogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.

47

Icon Description

Rear Defrost ButtonThe Rear Defrost Control button turns on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter ten minutes.

Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down ButtonsProvides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touch-screen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperaturesettings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the bluearrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.

SYNC ButtonPress the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated whenthis feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature set-ting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

Faceplate Knob

Touchscreen Buttons

Blower ControlBlower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speedsavailable. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touch-screen.• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.

The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower

setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

48

Icon DescriptionPanel Mode Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flowof air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulateairflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow fromthese outlets.

Bi-Level ModeBi-Level ModeAir comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost andside window demister outlets.

NOTE:Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air fromthe floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Floor ModeAir comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix ModeMix ModeAir is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy con-ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moistureon the windshield.

Climate Control OFF ButtonThis button turns the Climate Control System off.

49

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can causedamage to the heating elements:• Use care when washing the inside of

the rear window. Do not use abrasivewindow cleaners on the interior surfaceof the window. Use a soft cloth and amild washing solution, wiping parallelto the heating elements. Labels canbe peeled off after soaking with warmwater.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instru-ments, or abrasive window cleaners onthe interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance fromthe window.

Climate Control Functions

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows theoperator to manually activate or deactivatethe air conditioning system. When the airconditioning system is turned on, cool dehu-midified air will flow through the outlets into

the cabin. For improved fuel economy, pressthe A/C button to turn off the air conditioningand manually adjust the blower and airflowmode settings. Also, make sure to select onlyPanel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.

NOTE:

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield orside glass, select Defrost mode, and in-crease blower speed if needed.

• If your air conditioning performance seemslower than expected, check the front of theA/C condenser (located in front of the ra-diator), for an accumulation of dirt or in-sects. Clean with a gentle water spray fromthe front of the radiator and through thecondenser.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cool-ing performance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/Cand the prior settings. The button illuminateswhen MAX A/C is on.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode posi-tion can be adjusted to desired user settings.Pressing other settings will cause the MAXA/C operation to switch to the selected set-ting and MAX A/C to exit.

Recirculation

When outside air contains smoke, odors, orhigh humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,you may wish to recirculate interior air bypressing the Recirculation control button.The Recirculation indicator will illuminatewhen this button is selected. Press the but-ton a second time to turn off the Recircula-tion mode and allow outside air into thevehicle.

NOTE:In cold weather, use of Recirculation modemay lead to excessive window fogging. TheRecirculation feature may be unavailable(button on the touchscreen greyed out) ifconditions exist that could create fogging onthe inside of the windshield.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

50

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —If Equipped

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate,or the AUTO button on the touchscreen onthe Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)Panel.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you wouldlike the system to maintain by adjustingthe driver and passenger temperaturecontrol buttons. Once the desired tem-perature is displayed, the system willachieve and automatically maintain thatcomfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfortlevel, it is not necessary to change thesettings. You will experience the greatestefficiency by simply allowing the systemto function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperaturesettings for cold or hot vehicles. The systemautomatically adjusts the temperature,mode, and blower speed to provide comfortas quickly as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in U.S.or Metric units by selecting the US/Metriccustomer-programmable feature. Refer tothe “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”in your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi-dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (CanadianResidents) for further information.

To provide you with maximum comfort in theAutomatic mode during cold start-ups, theblower fan will remain on low until the enginewarms up. The blower will increase in speedand transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override

This system offers a full complement ofmanual override features. The AUTO symbol inthe front ATC display will be turned off whenthe system is being used in the manual mode.

Operating Tips

NOTE:Refer to the chart at the end of this sectionfor suggested control settings for variousweather conditions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protectedwith a high-quality antifreeze coolant to pro-vide proper corrosion protection and to pro-tect against engine overheating. OAT coolant(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.

Winter Operation

To ensure the best possible heater and de-froster performance, make sure the enginecooling system is functioning properly andthe proper amount, type, and concentrationof coolant is used. Use of the Air Recircula-tion mode during Winter months is not rec-ommended, because it may cause windowfogging.

51




Vacation/Storage

Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out ofservice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,run the air conditioning system at idle forabout five minutes, in fresh air with theblower setting on high. This will ensure ad-equate system lubrication to minimize thepossibility of compressor damage when thesystem is started again.

Window Fogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside inmild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clearthe windows, select Defrost or Mix mode andincrease the front blower speed. Do not usethe Recirculation mode without A/C for longperiods, as fogging may occur.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly infront of the windshield, is free of obstruc-tions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in theair intake may reduce airflow, and if theyenter the plenum, they could plug the waterdrains. In winter months, make sure the airintake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

Cabin Air Filter

The climate control system filters out dustand pollen from the air. Contact an autho-rized dealer to service your cabin air filter,and to have it replaced when needed.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

52

Operating Tips Chart

53

WINDOWSPower Window Controls

The window controls on the driver's doorcontrol all the door windows.

There are single window controls on eachpassenger door trim panel, which operate thepassenger door windows. The window con-trols will operate only when the ignition is inthe ACC or ON/RUN position.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a ve-hicle, and do not let children play withpower windows. Do not leave the key fob inor near the vehicle, or in a location acces-sible to children, and do not leave theignition of a vehicle equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.Occupants, particularly unattended chil-dren, can become entrapped by the win-dows while operating the power windowswitches. Such entrapment may result inserious injury or death.

Auto-Down Feature

The driver door power window switch and thepassenger door power window switches havean Auto-Down feature. Push the window

switch down, for a short period of time, andrelease and the window will go down auto-matically.

To open the window part way, push the win-dow switch down briefly and release it whenyou want the window to stop.

To stop the window from going all the waydown during the Auto-Down operation, pullup on the switch briefly.

Auto-Up Feature With Anti-PinchProtection

NOTE:

• If the window runs into any obstacle duringauto-closure, it will reverse direction andthen go back down. Remove the obstacleand use the window switch again to closethe window.

• Any impact due to rough road conditionsmay trigger the auto-reverse function unex-pectedly during auto-closure. If this hap-pens, pull the switch lightly and hold toclose the window manually.

Power Window Switches

1 — Front Power Window Switches2 — Rear Power Window Switches

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

54

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when thewindow is almost closed. To avoid personalinjury be sure to clear your arms, hands,fingers and all objects from the windowpath before closing.

Reset Auto-Up

Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, thewindow probably needs to be reset. To resetAuto-Up:

1. Pull the window switch up to close thewindow completely and continue to holdthe switch up for an additional two sec-onds after the window is closed.

2. Push the window switch down firmly toopen the window completely and continueto hold the switch down for an additionaltwo seconds after the window is fullyopen.

Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver'sdoor trim panel allows you to disable thewindow controls on the rear passenger doors.To disable the window controls, push andrelease the window lockout button (the indi-cator light on the button with turn on). Toenable the window controls, push and releasethe window lockout button again (the indica-tor light on the button will turn back off).

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as theperception of pressure on the ears or ahelicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve-hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with thewindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) incertain open or partially open positions. Thisis a normal occurrence and can be mini-mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rearwindows open, open the front and rear win-dows together to minimize the buffeting.If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,adjust the sunroof opening to minimize thebuffeting or open any window.

Power Window Lockout Button

55

POWER SUNROOFThe power sunroof switch is located on theoverhead console.

Opening

Express Open

Push the switch rearward and release itwithin one-half second. The sunroof will fullyopen and stop automatically.

Manual Open

Push and hold the switch rearward to openthe sunroof. Any release of the switch willstop the movement, and the sunroof willremain in a partially open position until theswitch is pushed again.

Venting Sunroof

Push and release the button and the sunroofwill open to the vent position.

This is called “Express Vent” and will occurregardless of sunroof position. During Ex-press Vent operation, any movement of theswitch will stop the sunroof.

Closing

Express Closing

Push the switch forward and release it withinone-half second. The sunroof will fully closeautomatically from any position.

Manual Closing

Push and hold the switch forward to close thesunroof. Any release of the switch will stopthe movement, and the sunroof will remain ina partially closed position until the switch ispushed again.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as ahelicopter-type percussion sound. If buffet-ing occurs with the rear windows open, adjustthe front and rear windows together.

If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust anywindow. This will minimize buffeting.

Power Sunroof Switch

1 — Opening Sunroof2 — Venting Sunroof3 — Closing Sunroof

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

56

Anti-Pinch Safety Device

This feature will detect an obstruction in theopening of the sunroof during Express Closeoperation. If an obstruction in the path of thesunroof is detected, the sunroof will auto-matically retract. Remove the obstruction ifthis occurs. Next, push the switch forwardand release to Express Close.

NOTE:If three consecutive sunroof close attemptsresult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourthclose attempt will be a Manual Close move-ment with Pinch Protect disabled.

WARNING!

• Do not let children play with the sunroof.Never leave children unattended in a ve-hicle, or with access to an unlocked ve-hicle. Do not leave the key fob in or nearthe vehicle, and do not leave the ignition

WARNING!of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occu-pants, particularly unattended children,can become entrapped by the power sun-roof while operating the power sunroofswitch. Such entrapment may result inserious injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk ofbeing thrown from a vehicle with anopen sunroof. You could also be severelyinjured or killed. Always fasten your seatbelt properly and make sure all passen-gers are properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operatethe sunroof. Never allow your fingers,other body parts, or any object to projectthrough the sunroof opening. Injury mayresult.

COMMANDVIEW SUNROOFWITH POWER SHADEThe CommandView sunroof with power shadeswitch is located on the overhead console.

Commandview Sunroof Switches

1 — Opening Sunroof2 — Venting Sunroof3 — Closing Sunroof4 — Opening Shade5 — Closing Shade

57

Opening Power Shade

Express Open

Push the shade switch rearward and release itwithin one-half second and the shade willautomatically open to the halfway positionand stop automatically.

Push the switch a second time from thehalfway position and the shade will automati-cally open to the full open position and stopautomatically.

Manual Open

To open the shade, push and hold the switchrearward. The shade will open and stop auto-matically at the half-open position.

Push and hold the shade switch rearwardagain and the shade will open automaticallyto the full-open position.

NOTE:Any release of the switch will stop the move-ment and the shade will remain in a partiallyopened condition until the switch is pushedand held rearward again.

HOODOpening

1. Pull the hood release lever located belowthe steering wheel at the base of theinstrument panel.

2. Reach into the opening beneath the centerof the hood and move the safety latch leverwhile lifting the hood at the same time.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched beforedriving your vehicle. If the hood is not fullylatched, it could open when the vehicle isin motion and block your vision. Failure tofollow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.

Closing1. Before closing the hood, check to make

sure all filler caps are correctly installed.

2. Lower the hood halfway and push down toclose the hood and securely latch it intoplace.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched beforedriving your vehicle. If the hood is not fullylatched, it could open when the vehicle isin motion and block your vision. Failure tofollow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.

Hood Release LeverGETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

58

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slamthe hood to close it. Use a firm downwardpush at the front center of the hood toensure that both latches engage.

LIFTGATEOpening

The liftgate can be opened from inside thevehicle using the power liftgate button on theoverhead console, using the key fob outsideof the vehicle or the electronic liftgate re-lease.

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate may be released in several ways:

• Key fob

• Outside handle

• Button on overhead console

The liftgate passive entry unlock feature isbuilt into the electronic liftgate release. Witha valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronicliftgate release to open with one fluid motion.Push the button on the key fob twice withinfive seconds to release the liftgate.

NOTE:If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-grammed in the instrument cluster display,all doors will unlock when you push the elec-tronic release on the liftgate. If "UnlockDriver Door 1st Press" is programmed inUconnect, only the liftgate will unlockwhen you push the electronic release on theliftgate. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

NOTE:Use the power door lock switch on either frontdoor trim panel or the key fob to lock andunlock the liftgate. The manual door locks onthe doors and the driver's door lock cylinderwill not lock and unlock the liftgate.

Passive Entry/Lock Button Location

1 — ElectronicLiftgate Release

2 — Lock ButtonLocation

59



WARNING!

Driving with the liftgate open can allowpoisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.You and your passengers could be injuredby these fumes. Keep the liftgate closedwhen you are operating the vehicle.

Closing

Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiatelowering the liftgate. Release the handlewhen the liftgate takes over the closing effort.

To Lock The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the KeylessEnter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button lo-cated to the right of the outside handle re-lease will lock the vehicle.

The power liftgate may be closed by pushingthe button, located in the upper left trim inthe liftgate opening. Pushing button will onlyclose the liftgate. This button cannot be usedto open the liftgate.

NOTE:The liftgate unlock feature is built into theelectronic liftgate release.

Power Liftgate — If Equipped

The power liftgate may be opened by pushingthe electronic liftgate release (refer to “Key-less Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” locatedin “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in yourOwner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or

www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further information) or by pushing theliftgate button on the key fob. Push the lift-gate button on the key fob twice within fiveseconds to open the power liftgate. Once theliftgate is open, pushing the button twicewithin five seconds a second time will closethe liftgate.

The power liftgate may also be opened orclosed by pushing the liftgate button locatedon the front overhead console. If the liftgateis fully open, the liftgate can be closed bypushing the liftgate button located on the leftrear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. Ifthe liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgatebutton located on the left rear trim panel willreverse the liftgate.

When the liftgate button on the key fob ispushed two times, the turn signals will flashto signal that the liftgate is opening or closing(if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in theUconnect settings), and the liftgate chimewill be audible. Refer to "Uconnect Settings"in "Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at

Rear Power Liftgate Switch

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

60




www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

NOTE:

• In the event of a power malfunction to theliftgate, an emergency liftgate latch releasecan be used to open the liftgate. The emer-gency liftgate latch release can be ac-cessed through a snap-in cover located onthe liftgate trim panel.

• If liftgate is left open for an extended periodof time, the liftgate may need to be closedmanually to reset power liftgate functionality.

WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury orcargo damage may occur. Ensure the lift-gate travel path is clear. Make sure theliftgate is closed and latched before driv-ing away.

NOTE:

• The power liftgate buttons will not operateif the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speedis above 0 MPH (0 km/h).

• The power liftgate will not operate in tem-peratures below −22°F (−30°C) or tem-peratures above 150° F (65° C). Be sure toremove any buildup of snow or ice from theliftgate before pushing any of the powerliftgate switches.

• If anything obstructs the power liftgatewhile it is closing or opening, the liftgatewill automatically reverse to the closed oropen position, provided it meets sufficientresistance.

• There are also pinch sensors attached tothe side of the liftgate. Light pressure any-where along these strips will cause theliftgate to return to the open position.

• If the liftgate is not fully open, push theliftgate button on the key fob twice tooperate the liftgate.

• If the electronic liftgate release is pushedwhile the power liftgate is closing, the lift-gate will reverse to the full open position.

• If the electronic liftgate release is pushedwhile the power liftgate is opening, the lift-gate motor will disengage to allow manualoperation.

• If the power liftgate encounters multipleobstructions within the same cycle, thesystem will automatically stop and the lift-gate must be opened or closed manually.

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allowpoisonous exhaust gases into your ve-hicle. You and your passengers could beinjured by these fumes. Keep the liftgateclosed when you are operating the ve-hicle.

• If you are required to drive with theliftgate open, make sure that all win-dows are closed, and the climate controlblower switch is set at high speed. Donot use the recirculation mode.

61



UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOROPENER (HOMELINK)

• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-heldtransmitters that operate devices such asgarage door openers, motorized gates,lighting or home security systems. TheHomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles12 Volt battery.

• The HomeLink buttons that are located inthe overhead console or sunvisor designatethe three different HomeLink channels.

• To operate HomeLink, push and release anyof the programmed HomeLink buttons.These buttons will activate the devices theyare programmed to with each press of thecorresponding HomeLink button.

• The HomeLink indicator light is locatedabove the center button.

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink

For efficient programming and accuratetransmission of the radio-frequency signal, itis recommended that a new battery be placedin the hand-held transmitter of the devicethat is being programmed to the HomeLinksystem. Make sure your hand-held trans-mitter is programmed to activate the deviceyou are trying to program your HomeLinkbutton to.

Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside ofthe garage before you begin programming.

It is recommended that you erase all thechannels of your HomeLink before you use itfor the first time.

If you have any problems, or require assis-tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for in-formation or assistance.

Erasing All The HomeLink Channels

To erase the channels, follow this procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUNposition.

2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLinkbuttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, oruntil the HomeLink indicator light flashes.

NOTE:Erasing all channels should only be per-formed when programming HomeLink for thefirst time. Do not erase channels when pro-gramming additional buttons.

HomeLink Buttons And Indicator LightGETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

62

http://www.homelink.com/home/welcome

Identifying Whether You Have A RollingCode Or Non-Rolling Code Device

Before programming a device to one ofyour HomeLink buttons, you must determinewhether the device has a rolling code ornon-rolling code.

Rolling Code Devices

To determine if your device has a rollingcode, a good indicator is its manufacturingdate. Typically, devices manufactured after1995 have rolling codes. A device with arolling code will also have a “LEARN” or“TRAIN” button located where the antenna isattached to the device. The button may notbe immediately visible when looking at thedevice. The name and color of the button mayvary slightly by manufacturer.

NOTE:The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not thebutton you normally use to operate the device.

Non-rolling Code Devices

Most devices manufactured before 1995 willnot have a rolling code. These devices willalso not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.

Programming HomeLink To A GarageDoor Opener

To program any of the HomeLink buttons toactivate your garage door opener motor, fol-low the steps below:

NOTE:All HomeLink buttons are programmed usingthis procedure. You do not need to eraseall channels when programming additionalbuttons.

1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUNposition.

2. Place the garage door opener transmitter1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theHomeLink button you wish to program,while keeping the HomeLink indicatorlight in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button youwant to program while you push and holdthe garage door opener transmitter buttonyou are trying to replicate.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and ob-serve the HomeLink indicator light. The

HomeLink indicator light will flash slowlyand then rapidly. Once this happens, re-lease both buttons.

NOTE:Make sure the garage door opener motor isplugged in before moving on to the rollingcode/non-rolling code final steps.

Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps

NOTE:You have 30 seconds in which to initiaterolling code final step 2, after completingrolling code final step 1.

1. At the garage door opener motor (in thegarage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”button. This can usually be found where thehanging antenna wire is attached to thegarage door opener motor. Firmly push andrelease the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.

2. Return to the vehicle and push the pro-grammed HomeLink button three times(holding the button for two seconds eachtime). If the garage door opener motoroperates, programming is complete.

63

3. Push the programmed HomeLink buttonto confirm that the garage door openermotor operates. If the garage door openermotor does not operate, repeat the finalsteps for the rolling code procedure.

Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener FinalSteps

1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLinkbutton and observe the HomeLink indicatorlight. If the HomeLink indicator light stayson constantly, programming is complete.

2. Push the programmed HomeLink buttonto confirm that the garage door openermotor operates. If the garage door openermotor does not operate, repeat the stepsfrom the beginning.

WARNING!

• Your motorized door or gate will openand close while you are programmingthe universal transceiver. Do not pro-gram the transceiver if people or pets arein the path of the door or gate.

• Do not run your vehicle in a closedgarage or confined area while program-

WARNING!ming the transceiver. Exhaust gas fromyour vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide(CO) which is odorless and colorless.Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when in-haled and can cause you and others tobe severely injured or killed.

Programming HomeLink To AMiscellaneous Device

Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Ga-rage Door Opener” for the procedure on howto program HomeLink to a miscellaneousdevice, as it follows the same procedure. Besure to determine if the device has a rollingcode, or non-rolling code before beginningthe programming process.

NOTE:Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after sev-eral seconds of transmission, which may notbe long enough for HomeLink to pick up thesignal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators aredesigned to time-out in the same manner.The procedure may need to be preformedmultiple times to successfully pair the deviceto your HomeLink buttons.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkButton

To reprogram a single HomeLink button thathas been previously trained, without erasingall the channels, follow the procedure below.Be sure to determine whether the new deviceyou want to program the HomeLink button tohas a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code.

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-tion, without starting the engine.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink but-ton until the HomeLink Indicator lightbegins to flash after 20 seconds. Do notrelease the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed withStep 2 in “Programming HomeLink To AGarage Door Opener” and follow all re-maining steps.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

64

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies toall Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped inthis vehicle:





INTERNAL EQUIPMENTPower Outlets

There are three 12 Volt electrical power out-lets on this vehicle.

The front power outlet is located inside thecenter storage bin of the instrument panel.Push inward on the storage lid to open thecompartment and gain access to this poweroutlet.

A second front power outlet is located insidethe center console.

The rear power outlet is located in the rightrear cargo area.

Front Power Outlet

Center Console Power Outlet

65

The power outlets are labeled with either a“key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate howthe outlet is powered. Power outlets labeledwith a “key” are powered when the ignitionswitch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position,while the outlets labeled with a “battery” areconnected directly to the battery and pow-ered at all times.

NOTE:

• Do not exceed the maximum power of160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex-ceeded, the fuse protecting the system willneed to be replaced.

• Power outlets are designed for accessoryplugs only. Do not insert any other object inthe power outlet as this will damage theoutlet and blow the fuse. Improper use ofthe power outlet can cause damage notcovered by your new vehicle warranty.

• The rear cargo power outlet can beswitched to “battery” powered all the timeby switching the power outlet right rearquarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

66

Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — F90 – F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel2 — F104 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console3 — F93 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel

67

Power Inverter

There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverteroutlet located on the back of the centerconsole. This outlet can power cellularphones, electronics and other low power de-vices requiring power up to 150 Watts.

NOTE:The power inverter is designed with built-inoverload protection. If the power rating of150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverterwill automatically shut down. Once the elec-trical device has been removed from theoutlet, the inverter should automatically re-set. If the power rating exceeds approxi-mately 170 Watts, the power inverter mayhave to be reset manually. To reset the in-verter manually, unplug the device and plugit in again. To avoid overloading the circuit,check the power ratings on electrical devicesprior to using the inverter.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death, DO NOT:• insert any objects into the receptacles• touch with wet handsClose the lid when not in use. If this outletis mishandled, it may cause an electricshock and failure.

Power Inverter

1 — USB Ports (Charging Only)2 — Rear Seat Heater Switches3 — Power Inverter Outlet

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

VEH

ICLE

68


INSTRUMENT CLUSTERDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70Instrument Cluster Display LocationAnd Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

TRIP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

WARNING LIGHTS ANDMESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Red Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Yellow Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .76Yellow Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .80Green Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .80White Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .81Blue Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTICSYSTEM — OBD II . . . . . . . . . . . .82Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

EMISSIONS INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . .83


69

INSTRUMENT CLUSTERDISPLAYYour vehicle may be equipped with an instru-ment cluster display, which offers useful in-formation to the driver. With the ignition inthe STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of adoor will activate the display for viewing, anddisplay the total miles, or kilometers, in theodometer. Your instrument cluster display isdesigned to display important informationabout your vehicle’s systems and features.Using a driver interactive display located onthe instrument panel, your instrument clus-ter display can show you how systems areworking and give you warnings when theyaren’t. The steering wheel mounted controlsallow you to scroll through the main menusand submenus. You can access the specificinformation you want and make selectionsand adjustments.

Instrument Cluster Display Location AndControls

The instrument cluster display is located inthe center of the instrument cluster.

1. The top line where reconfigurable telltales,compass direction, outside temperature,Time, Range MPG or Trip are displayed.This also displays the speedometer whenother menu pages are displayed.

2. The main display area where the menusand pop up messages are displayed.

3. The lower line where reconfigurable tell-tales, menu name and menu page aredisplayed.

Instrument Cluster Display

1 — Speedometer Display2 — Main Display3 — Menu Name And Menu Page Instrument Cluster Display Controls

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

INST

RUM

ENT

PAN

EL

70

• Push the up arrow button to scroll upwardthrough the main menus (Speedometer,MPH/km/h, Vehicle Info, Terrain, DriverAssist, Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio, Navigation, Stored Messages,Screen Setup and Speed Warning).

• Push the down arrow button to scroll down-ward through the main menu and sub-menus (Speedometer, MPH/km/h, VehicleInfo, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy,Trip A, Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio, Naviga-tion, Stored Messages, Screen Setup andSpeed Warning).

• Push the right arrow button to access theinformation screens or submenu screens ofa main menu item.

• Push the left arrow button to access theinformation screens or submenu screens ofa main menu item.

• Push the OK button to access/select theinformation screens or submenu screens ofa main menu item. Push and hold the OKbutton for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.

Oil Change Reset

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oilchange indicator system. The “Oil ChangeRequired” message will display in the instru-ment cluster display for five seconds after asingle chime has sounded, to indicate thenext scheduled oil change interval. The en-gine oil change indicator system is duty cyclebased, which means the engine oil changeinterval may fluctuate, dependent upon yourpersonal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue todisplay each time you cycle the ignition to theON/RUN position. To turn off the messagetemporarily, push and release the OK button.To reset the oil change indicator system (afterperforming the scheduled maintenance), re-fer to the following procedure.

Oil Life Reset

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, pushand release the ENGINE START/STOPbutton and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "VehicleInfo" in the instrument cluster display.

3. Push and hold the OK button until thegauge resets to 100%.

Secondary Method For Oil Change ResetProcedure

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, pushand release the ENGINE START/STOPbutton and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,three times within ten seconds.

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, pushand release the ENGINE START/STOPbutton once to return the ignition to theOFF/LOCK position.

NOTE:If the indicator message illuminates whenyou start the vehicle, the oil change indicatorsystem did not reset. If necessary, repeat thisprocedure.

71

Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items

The instrument cluster display can be used toview the following main menu items:

NOTE:Depending on the vehicles options, featuresettings may vary.

• Speedometer • Trip• MPH to km/h • Audio• Vehicle Info • Stored Messages• Driver Assist • Screen Setup• Fuel Economy

NOTE:Refer to your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents)or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further information.

SRT Performance Features

Instrument Cluster Display PerformanceFeatures

The instrument cluster display can be used toprogram the following Performance Features.

• To access, press and release either the up ordown arrow button until “SRT” appears inthe instrument cluster display, then pressand release the right arrow button to cyclethrough the features. Press the OK button toselect a feature.

• 0-60 MPH(0-100 km/h)

• Current G-Force

• 0-100 MPH(0-161 km/h)

• Peak G-Force

• 1/8 Mile Timer • Lap Timer• 1/4 Mile Timer • Lap History• 60 ft Timer • Top Speed• Braking Distance

Uconnect SRT Performance Features

WARNING!Measurement of vehicle statistics with thePerformance Features is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and shouldnot be done on any public roadways. It isrecommended that these features be usedin a controlled environment and within thelimits of the law. The capabilities of thevehicle as measured by the performancepages must never be exploited in a reck-less or dangerous manner, which can jeop-ardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers. Only a safe, attentive, and skillfuldriver can prevent accidents.

• To access the SRT Performance Features,press the “Apps” button on the touchscreenthen press the “Performance Pages” buttonon the touchscreen.

• The Performance Page includes the follow-ing menus:

• Home • Gauges 2• Timers • G – Force• Gauges 1 • Engine

SRT Performance Features Controls

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

INST

RUM

ENT

PAN

EL

72




TRIP COMPUTERPush and release the up or down arrow buttonuntil the Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted inthe instrument cluster display (Toggle left orright to select Trip A or Trip B). Push andrelease the OK button to display the Tripinformation.

WARNING LIGHTS ANDMESSAGESRed Warning Lights

— Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight secondsas a bulb check when the ignition is placed inthe ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. If thelight is either not on during startup, stays on,or turns on while driving, have the systeminspected at an authorized dealer as soon aspossible. This light will illuminate with asingle chime when a fault with the Air BagWarning Light has been detected, it will stayon until the fault is cleared. If the light comeson intermittently or remains on while driving,have an authorized dealer service the vehicleimmediately.

— Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions,including brake fluid level and parking brakeapplication. If the brake light turns on it mayindicate that the parking brake is applied,that the brake fluid level is low, or that thereis a problem with the anti-lock brake systemreservoir.

If the light remains on when the parkingbrake has been disengaged, and the fluidlevel is at the full mark on the master cylinderreservoir, it indicates a possible brake hy-draulic system malfunction or that a problemwith the Brake Booster has been detected bythe Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Elec-tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In thiscase, the light will remain on until the condi-tion has been corrected. If the problem isrelated to the brake booster, the ABS pumpwill run when applying the brake, and a brakepedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reservebraking capacity in the event of a failure to aportion of the hydraulic system. A leak in

either half of the dual brake system is indi-cated by the Brake Warning Light, which willturn on when the brake fluid level in themaster cylinder has dropped below a speci-fied level.

The light will remain on until the cause iscorrected.

NOTE:The light may flash momentarily during sharpcornering maneuvers, which change fluid levelconditions. The vehicle should have serviceperformed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repairis necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake lighton is dangerous. Part of the brake systemmay have failed. It will take longer to stopthe vehicle. You could have a collision.Have the vehicle checked immediately.

73

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) are also equipped with Elec-tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In theevent of an EBD failure, the Brake WarningLight will turn on along with the ABS Light.Immediate repair to the ABS system is re-quired.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can bechecked by turning the ignition switch fromthe OFF position to the ON/RUN position.The light should illuminate for approximatelytwo seconds. The light should then turn offunless the parking brake is applied or a brakefault is detected. If the light does not illumi-nate, have the light inspected by your autho-rized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parkingbrake is applied with the ignition switch inthe ON/RUN position.

NOTE:This light shows only that the parking brake isapplied. It does not show the degree of brakeapplication.

— Battery Charge Warning Light

This light illuminates when the battery is notcharging properly. If it stays on while theengine is running, there may be a malfunc-tion with the charging system. Contact yourauthorized dealer as soon as possible.

This indicates a possible problem with theelectrical system or a related component.

— Door Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when a door isajar/open and not fully closed.

NOTE:If the vehicle is moving, there will also be asingle chime.

— Electric Power Steering FailWarning Light

This light will turn on when there's a faultwith the EPS (Electric Power Steering)

This light will turn on when there's a faultwith the EPS (Electric Power Steering).Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And

Operating” in the Owner’s Manual at https://www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assistcould pose a safety risk to yourself andothers. Service should be obtained as soonas possible.

— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with theElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If aproblem is detected while the vehicle is run-ning, the light will either stay on or flashdepending on the nature of the problem.Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safelyand completely stopped and the transmissionis placed in the PARK position. The lightshould turn off. If the light remains on withthe vehicle running, your vehicle will usuallybe drivable; however, see an authorizeddealer for service as soon as possible.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

INST

RUM

ENT

PAN

EL

74




If the light continues to flash when the ve-hicle is running, immediate service is re-quired and you may experience reduced per-formance, an elevated/rough idle, or enginestall and your vehicle may require towing. Thelight will come on when the ignition is placedin the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position andremain on briefly as a bulb check. If the lightdoes not come on during starting, have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer.

— Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated enginecondition. If the engine coolant temperatureis too high, this indicator will illuminate and asingle chime will sound. If the temperaturereaches the upper limit, a continuous chimewill be sound for four minutes or until theengine is allowed to cool whichever comesfirst.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pullover and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system ison, turn it off. Also, shift the transmissioninto NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If thetemperature reading does not return to nor-

mal, turn the engine off immediately and callfor service. Refer to “If Your Engine Over-heats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for furtherinformation.

— Hood Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when the hoodis ajar/open and not fully closed.


— Liftgate Open Warning Light

This indicator will turn when the liftgate isopen.


— Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure.If the light turns on while driving, stop thevehicle and shut off the engine as soon aspossible. A chime will sound when this lightturns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause iscorrected. This light does not indicate howmuch oil is in the engine. The engine oil levelmust be checked under the hood.

— Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oil temperatureis high. If the light turns on while driving,stop the vehicle and shut off the engine assoon as possible.

— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, if the driver’sseat belt is unbuckled, a chime will soundand the light will turn on. When driving, if thedriver or front passenger seat belt remainsunbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light willflash or remain on continuously and a chimewill sound. Refer to “Occupant RestraintsSystems” in “Safety” for further information.

75

— Transmission Temperature WarningLight — If Equipped

This light indicates that there is excessivetransmission fluid temperature that mightoccur with severe usage such as trailer tow-ing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle andrun the engine at idle or slightly faster, withthe transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, untilthe light turns off. Once the light turns off,you may continue to drive normally.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle whenthe Transmission Temperature WarningLight is illuminated you could cause thefluid to boil over, come in contact with hotengine or exhaust components and causea fire.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the TransmissionTemperature Warning Light illuminatedwill eventually cause severe transmissiondamage or transmission failure.

— Vehicle Security Warning Light —If Equipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-mately 15 seconds when the vehicle securityalarm is arming, and then will flash slowlyuntil the vehicle is disarmed.

Yellow Warning Lights

— Adaptive Cruise Control FaultWarning Light — If Equipped

This light will turn on when the ACC systemis not operating and needs service. For fur-ther information, refer to “Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) — If Equipped” in “StartingAnd Operating.”

— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) WarningLight

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-tem (ABS). The light will turn on when theignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long asfour seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on whiledriving, then the Anti-Lock portion of thebrake system is not functioning and service isrequired. However, the conventional brakesystem will continue to operate normally ifthe brake warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake systemshould be serviced as soon as possible torestore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. Ifthe ABS light does not turn on when theignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by anauthorized dealer.

— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OffWarning Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) is off.

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUNor ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,even if it was turned off previously.

The ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time theTraction Mode is set to Sport, Track or FullOFF in Drive Modes.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

INST

RUM

ENT

PAN

EL

76

— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)Warning Light — If Equipped

The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrumentcluster will come on when the ignition isplaced in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-tion, and when ESC is activated. It should goout with the engine running. If the “ESCIndicator Light” comes on continuously withthe engine running, a malfunction has beendetected in the ESC system. If this lightremains on after several ignition cycles, andthe vehicle has been driven several miles(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soonas possible to have the problem diagnosedand corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the“ESC Indicator Light” come on momen-tarily each time the ignition is placed in theON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;the sounds will stop when ESC becomesinactive.

• This light will come on when the vehicle isin an ESC event.

— LaneSense Failure Warning Light —If Equipped

This light will turn on when the LaneSensesystem is not operating and needs service.Please see your authorized dealer.

— LaneSense Warning Light —If Equipped

The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yel-low when the vehicle is crossing a lane marker.

Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in“Starting And Operating” for further informa-tion.

— Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, andremain on until fuel is added.

A single warning chime will sound with LowFuel Warning.

— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the wind-shield washer fluid is low.

— Engine Check/Malfunction IndicatorWarning Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) is a part of an Onboard DiagnosticSystem called OBD II that monitors engineand automatic transmission control systems.The light will illuminate when the ignition isin the ON/RUN position before engine start.If the bulb does not come on when turningthe key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the con-dition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missinggas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illumi-nate the light after engine start. The vehicleshould be serviced if the light stays onthrough several typical driving styles. In mostsituations, the vehicle will drive normally andwill not require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flashto alert serious conditions that could lead toimmediate loss of power or severe catalyticconverter damage. The vehicle should be ser-viced as soon as possible if this occurs.

77

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, asreferenced above, can reach higher tem-peratures than in normal operating condi-tions. This can cause a fire if you driveslowly or park over flammable substancessuch as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.This could result in death or serious injuryto the driver, occupants or others.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL) on could cause dam-age to the vehicle control system. It alsocould affect fuel economy and driveability.If the MIL is flashing, severe catalyticconverter damage and power loss will soonoccur. Immediate service is required.

SERV4WD — Service 4WD Warning Light —

If Equipped

If the light stays on or comes on duringdriving, it means that the 4WD system is not

functioning properly and that service is re-quired. We recommend you drive to the near-est service center and have the vehicle ser-viced immediately.

— Forward Collision Warning Light —If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault inthe Forward Collision Warning System. Con-tact your local authorized dealer for service.Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in"Safety" for further information.

— Stop/Start System Fault WarningLight — If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly andservice is required. Contact your authorizeddealer for service.

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) Warning Light

The warning light switches on and a messageis displayed to indicate that the tire pressureis lower than the recommended value and/or

that slow pressure loss is occurring. In thesecases, optimal tire duration and fuel con-sumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the conditionmentioned above, the display will show theindications corresponding to each tire insequence.

CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or moreflat tires as handling may be compro-mised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharpbraking and steering. If a tire punctureoccurs, repair immediately using the dedi-cated tire repair kit and contact your au-thorized dealer as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel. (If your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on the vehicleGE

TTIN

GTO

KNOW

YOU

RIN

STRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

78

placard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitor-ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-minates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheatand can lead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s handlingand stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver’s responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale willflash for approximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. This se-quence will continue upon subsequent ve-hicle start-ups as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of replace-ment or alternate tires or wheels on the ve-hicle that prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMS malfunc-tion telltale after replacing one or more tiresor wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for theoriginal equipment tires and wheels.TPMS pressures and warning have beenestablished for the tire size equipped onyour vehicle. Undesirable system opera-tion or sensor damage may result whenusing replacement equipment that is notof the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage.Using aftermarket tire sealants may causethe Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.After using an aftermarket tire sealant it isrecommended that you take your vehicle toyour authorized dealer to have your sensorfunction checked.

79

Yellow Indicator Lights

— Air Suspension Light — IfEquipped

This light will illuminate when the air suspen-sion system is actively adjusting the rideheight.

Forward Collision Warning Off IndicatorLight — If Equipped

This light indicates that Forward CollisionWarning is off.

— 4WD Low Indicator Light — IfEquipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle isin the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The frontand rear driveshafts are mechanically lockedtogether forcing the front and rear wheels torotate at the same speed. Low range providesa greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-creased torque at the wheels.

Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — IfEquipped” in “Starting And Operating” forfurther information on four-wheel drive op-eration and proper use.

Green Indicator Lights

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SetWith No Target Detected Indicator Light —If Equipped

This light will turn on when the AdaptiveCruise Control is SET and there is no targetvehicle detected. Refer to "Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) — If Equipped" in "StartingAnd Operating" for further information.

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SetWith Target Light — If Equipped

This will display when the ACC is set and atarget vehicle is detected. Refer to “AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in“Starting And Operating” for further informa-tion.

— Cruise Control SET Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the speed controlis set to the desired speed. Refer to “SpeedControl” in “Starting And Operating” for fur-ther information.

— Front Fog Indicator Light — IfEquipped

This indicator will illuminate when the frontfog lights are on.

— LaneSense Indicator Light — IfEquipped

The LaneSense indicator is solid green whenboth lane markings have been detected andthe system is “armed” to provide visualwarnings in the instrument cluster and atorque warning in the steering wheel if anunintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to“LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting AndOperating” for further information.

— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the parklights or headlights are turned on.

— Snow Mode Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Snow Mode isactive.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

INST

RUM

ENT

PAN

EL

80

— Sport Mode Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.

— Sport Mode SRT Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Sport Mode isactive.

Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Op-erating” for further information.

— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —If Equipped

This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.

— Tow Mode SRT Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Tow Mode is active.


— Track Mode SRT Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Track Mode isactive.


— Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The turn signal arrows will flash indepen-dently when left or right turn signals areselected. Turn signals can be activated whenthe multifunction lever is moved down (left)or up (right).

NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the ve-hicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)with either turn signal on.

• Check for an inoperative outside light bulbif either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

White Indicator Lights

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ReadyLight — If Equipped

This light will turn on when the vehicleequipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)has been turned on, but not set. Referto “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — IfEquipped” in “Starting And Operating” forfurther information.

Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Custom ModeSRT is active.

Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Op-erating” for further information

— Hill Descent Control (HDC) IndicatorLight — If Equipped

This indicator shows when the Hill DescentControl (HDC) feature is turned on. The lampwill be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC canonly be armed when the transfer case is in the“4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speedis less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If theseconditions are not met while attempting touse the HDC feature, the HDC indicator lightwill flash on/off.

— LaneSense Indicator Light —If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is ON, but notarmed, the LaneSense indicator is solidwhite. This occurs when only left, right, orneither line has been detected. If a singlelane line is detected, and the system is ready

81

to provide only visual warnings if an uninten-tional lane departure occurs on detected laneline. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in“Starting And Operating” for further informa-tion.

— Set Speed Warning Light — IfEquipped

When Set Speed Warning is turned on, thespeed warning telltale will illuminate in theinstrument cluster with a number matchingthe set speed. When the set speed is ex-ceeded, the indication will light up yellowand flash along with a continuous chime (upto ten seconds or until the speed is no longerexceeded). Speed Warning can be turned onand off in the instrument cluster display.

For further information refer to “Instru-ment Cluster Display Menu Items” in “Get-ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” inthe Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi-dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (CanadianResidents).

The number “55” is only an example of aspeed that can be set.

— Cruise Control Ready IndicatorLight

This light will turn on when the speed controlhas been turned on, but not set. Refer to“Speed Control — If Equipped” in “StartingAnd Operating” for further information.

— Selec Speed Control IndicatorLight — If Equipped

This light will turn on when “Selec SpeedControl” is activated.

To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure thevehicle is Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) andpush the button on the Instrument Panel.

NOTE:If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To EnterSelec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appearin the instrument cluster display.

— Valet Mode Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Valet Mode isactive.

Blue Indicator Lights

— High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator shows that the high beamheadlights are on. With the low beams acti-vated, push the multifunction lever forward(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on thehigh beams. Pull the multifunction lever rear-ward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turnoff the high beams. Pull the lever toward youfor a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass"scenario.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTICSYSTEM — OBD IIYour vehicle is equipped with a sophisticatedOnboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.This system monitors the performance of theemissions, engine, and transmission controlsystems. When these systems are operatingproperly, your vehicle will provide excellentperformance and fuel economy, as well asengine emissions well within current govern-ment regulations.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

INST

RUM

ENT

PAN

EL

82




If any of these systems require service, theOBD II system will turn on the MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL). It will also store diag-nostic codes and other information to assistyour service technician in making repairs.Although your vehicle will usually be drivableand not need towing, see your authorizeddealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on couldcause further damage to the emissioncontrol system. It could also affect fueleconomy and driveability. The vehiclemust be serviced before any emissionstests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle isrunning, severe catalytic converter dam-age and power loss will soon occur. Im-mediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an OnboardDiagnostic system (OBD II) and a connectionport to allow access to information related to

the performance of your emissions controls.Authorized service technicians may need toaccess this information to assist with thediagnosis and service of your vehicle andemissions system.

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technicianshould connect equipment to the OBD IIconnection port in order to diagnose orservice your vehicle.

• If unauthorized equipment is connectedto the OBD II connection port, such as adriver-behavior tracking device, it may:• Be possible that vehicle systems,

including safety related systems,could be impaired or a loss of ve-hicle control could occur that mayresult in an accident involving seri-ous injury or death.

• Access, or allow others to access,information stored in your vehiclesystems, including personal informa-tion.

For further information, refer to “Cybersecu-rity” in “Multimedia”.

EMISSIONS INSPECTIONAND MAINTENANCEPROGRAMSIn some localities, it may be a legal require-ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle'semissions control system. Failure to passcould prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspec-tion and Maintenance (I/M), thischeck verifies the “Malfunction In-dicator Light (MIL)” is functioning

and is not on when the engine is running, andthat the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.The OBD II system may not be ready if yourvehicle was recently serviced, recently had adead battery or a battery replacement. If theOBD II system should be determined notready for the I/M test, your vehicle may failthe test.

83

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuatedtest, which you can use prior to going to thetest station. To check if your vehicle's OBD IIsystem is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:If you crank or start the engine, you willhave to start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch tothe ON position, you will see the “Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL)” symbolcome on as part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one oftwo things will happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 secondsand then return to being fully illuminateduntil you turn OFF the ignition or startthe engine. This means that your vehicle'sOBD II system is not ready and you shouldnot proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remainfully illuminated until you place the igni-tion in the off position or start the engine.This means that your vehicle's OBD II sys-tem is ready and you can proceed to the I/Mstation.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you shouldsee your authorized dealer or repair facility.If your vehicle was recently serviced or had abattery failure or replacement, you may needto do nothing more than drive your vehicle asyou normally would in order for your OBD IIsystem to update. A recheck with the abovetest routine may then indicate that the sys-tem is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD IIsystem is ready or not, if the MIL is illumi-nated during normal vehicle operation youshould have your vehicle serviced before go-ing to the I/M station. The I/M station can failyour vehicle because the MIL is on with theengine running.

GETT

ING

TOKN

OWYO

UR

INST

RUM

ENT

PAN

EL

84

SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . .86Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . .86Electronic Brake Control System . . . . .87

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .97Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . .97Forward Collision Warning (FCW) . . . . .99Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .101

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106Occupant Restraint Systems Features . .106Important Safety Precautions . . . . . .106Seat Belt Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . .107Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS). .116Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . .137Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138Safety Checks You Should Make InsideThe Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138Periodic Safety Checks You ShouldMake Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . .140

SAFETY

85

SAFETY FEATURESAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) providesincreased vehicle stability and brake perfor-mance under most braking conditions. Thesystem automatically prevents wheel lock,and enhances vehicle control during braking.

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to en-sure that the ABS is working properly eachtime the vehicle is started and driven. Duringthis self-check, you may hear a slight clickingsound as well as some related motor noises.

ABS is activated during braking when thesystem detects one or more wheels begin tolock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,or panic stops may increase the likelihood ofABS activation(s).

You also may experience the following whenABS activates:

• The ABS motor noise (it may continue torun for a short time after the stop).

• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.

• Brake pedal pulsations.

• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the endof the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• The ABS contains sophisticated elec-tronic equipment that may be suscep-tible to interference caused by improp-erly installed or high output radiotransmitting equipment. This interfer-ence can cause possible loss of anti-lockbraking capability. Installation of suchequipment should be performed byqualified professionals.

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes willdiminish their effectiveness and maylead to a collision. Pumping makes thestopping distance longer. Just pressfirmly on your brake pedal when youneed to slow down or stop.

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural lawsof physics from acting on the vehicle,nor can it increase braking or steeringefficiency beyond that afforded by the

WARNING!condition of the vehicle brakes and tiresor the traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, in-cluding those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, following another vehicletoo closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS equippedvehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner that couldjeopardize the user’s safety or the safetyof others.

ABS is designed to function with the OEMtires. Modification may result in degradedABS performance.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”will turn on when the ignition is turned to theON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long asfour seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” re-mains on or comes on while driving, it indi-cates that the anti-lock portion of the brake

SAFE

TY

86

system is not functioning and that service isrequired. However, the conventional brakesystem will continue to operate normally ifthe “Brake System Warning Light” is not on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on,the brake system should be serviced as soonas possible to restore the benefits of anti-lockbrakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake WarningLight” does not come on when the ignition isturned to the ON/RUN mode, have the lightrepaired as soon as possible.

Electronic Brake Control System

Your vehicle is equipped with an advancedElectronic Brake Control system (EBC). Thissystem includes Electronic Brake Force Dis-tribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill StartAssist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Elec-tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systemswork together to enhance both vehicle stabil-ity and control in various driving conditions.

Your vehicle may also be equipped with TrailerSway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking(RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), DynamicSteering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control(HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

This function manages the distribution of thebraking torque between the front and rearaxles by limiting braking pressure to the rearaxle. This is done to prevent overslip of therear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, andto prevent the rear axle from entering ABSbefore the front axle.

Brake System Warning Light

The red “Brake System Warning Light” willturn on when the ignition is turned to theON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long asfour seconds.

If the “Brake System Warning Light” remainson or comes on while driving, it indicates thatthe brake system is not functioning properlyand that immediate service is required. If the

“Brake System Warning Light” does notcome on when the ignition is turned to theON/RUN mode, have the light repaired assoon as possible.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’sbraking capability during emergency brakingmaneuvers. The system detects an emer-gency braking situation by sensing the rateand amount of brake application and thenapplies optimum pressure to the brakes. Thiscan help reduce braking distances. The BAScomplements the anti-lock brake system(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly re-sults in the best BAS assistance. To receivethe benefit of the system, you must applycontinuous braking pressure during the stop-ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unlessbraking is no longer desired. Once the brakepedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

87

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannotprevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increasethe traction afforded by prevailing roadconditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, driving on very slipperysurfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilitiesof a BAS-equipped vehicle must never beexploited in a reckless or dangerous man-ner, which could jeopardize the user'ssafety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to mitigate rollback from a complete stop while on an in-cline. If the driver releases the brake whilestopped on an incline, HSA will continue tohold the brake pressure for a short period.If the driver does not apply the throttle beforethis time expires, the system will releasebrake pressure and the vehicle will roll downthe hill as normal.

The following conditions must be met inorder for HSA to activate:

• The feature must be enabled.

• The vehicle must be stopped.

• Park brake must be off.

• Driver door must be closed.

• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

• The gear selection must match vehicle up-hill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is inforward gear; vehicle backing uphill is inREVERSE gear).

• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and allforward gears. The system will not activateif the transmission is in PARK or NEU-TRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manualtransmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSAwill remain active.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the HillStart Assist (HSA) will not activate andslight rolling may occur, such as on minorhills or with a loaded vehicle, or whilepulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for

WARNING!active driving involvement. It is always thedriver’s responsibility to be attentive todistance to other vehicles, people, andobjects, and most importantly brake op-eration to ensure safe operation of thevehicle under all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention is always requiredwhile driving to maintain safe control ofyour vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-ings can result in a collision or seriouspersonal injury.

Disabling And Enabling HSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off.To change the current setting, proceed asfollows:

• If disabling HSA using your instrumentcluster display, refer to “Instrument ClusterDisplay” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-ment Panel” for further information.

• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings,refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-media” for further information.

SAFE

TY

88

For vehicles not equipped with an instrumentcluster display, perform the following steps:

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheelspointing straight forward).

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Start the engine.

5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly morethan one-half turn to the left.

6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in thelower switch bank below the climate con-trol four times within 20 seconds. The“ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn onand turn off two times.

7. Rotate the steering wheel back to centerand then an additional slightly more thanone-half turn to the right.

8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode andthen back to ON. If the sequence wascompleted properly, the “ESC Off Indica-tor Light” will blink several times to con-firm HSA is disabled.

9. Repeat these steps if you want to returnthis feature to its previous setting.

Towing With HSA

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigateroll back while towing a trailer.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller withyour trailer, the trailer brakes may beactivated and deactivated with the brakeswitch. If so, there may not be enoughbrake pressure to hold both the vehicleand the trailer on a hill when the brakepedal is released. In order to avoid roll-ing down an incline while resuming ac-celeration, manually activate the trailerbrake or apply more vehicle brake pres-sure prior to releasing the brake pedal.

• HSA is not a parking brake. Always applythe parking brake fully when exiting yourvehicle. Also, be certain to place thetransmission in PARK.

• Failure to follow these warnings can re-sult in a collision or serious personalinjury.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spinof each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin isdetected, the TCS may apply brake pressure tothe spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce enginepower to provide enhanced acceleration andstability. A feature of the TCS, Brake LimitedDifferential (BLD), functions similar to a lim-ited slip differential and controls the wheelspin across a driven axle. If one wheel on adriven axle is spinning faster than the other,the system will apply the brake of the spinningwheel. This will allow more engine torque to beapplied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLDmay remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are ina reduced mode.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control andstability of the vehicle under various drivingconditions. ESC corrects for oversteering orundersteering of the vehicle by applying thebrake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist incounteracting the oversteer or understeercondition. Engine power may also be reducedto help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

89

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determinethe vehicle path intended by the driver andcompares it to the actual path of the vehicle.When the actual path does not match theintended path, ESC applies the brake of theappropriate wheel to assist in counteractingthe oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turningmore than appropriate for the steeringwheel position.

• Understeer — when the vehicle is turningless than appropriate for the steering wheelposition.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight” located in the instrument cluster willstart to flash as soon as the ESC systembecomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flasheswhen the TCS is active. If the “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” be-gins to flash during acceleration, ease up onthe accelerator and apply as little throttle aspossible. Be sure to adapt your speed anddriving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) can-not prevent the natural laws of physicsfrom acting on the vehicle, nor can itincrease the traction afforded by prevail-ing road conditions. ESC cannot preventaccidents, including those resultingfrom excessive speed in turns, driving onvery slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.ESC also cannot prevent accidents re-sulting from loss of vehicle control dueto inappropriate driver input for the con-ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skill-ful driver can prevent accidents. Thecapabilities of an ESC equipped vehiclemust never be exploited in a reckless ordangerous manner which could jeopar-dize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop-erly maintain your vehicle, may changethe handling characteristics of your ve-hicle, and may negatively affect the per-formance of the ESC system. Changesto the steering system, suspension,

WARNING!braking system, tire type and size orwheel size may adversely affect ESCperformance. Improperly inflated andunevenly worn tires may also degradeESC performance. Any vehicle modifica-tion or poor vehicle maintenance thatreduces the effectiveness of the ESCsystem can increase the risk of loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover, per-sonal injury and death.

ESC Operating Modes

NOTE:Depending upon model and mode of opera-tion, the ESC system may have multiple op-erating modes.

ESC On

This is the normal operating mode for theESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, theESC system will be in this mode. This mode

SAFE

TY

90

should be used for most driving conditions.Alternate ESC modes should only be used forspecific reasons as noted in the followingparagraphs.

Partial Off

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for timeswhen a more spirited driving experience isdesired. This mode may modify TCS and ESCthresholds for activation, which allows formore wheel spin than normally allowed. Thismode may be useful if the vehicle becomesstuck.

To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarilypush the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC OffIndicator Light” will illuminate. To turn theESC on again, momentarily push the “ESCOff” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”will turn off.

NOTE:For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modesa momentary button push will toggle the ESCmode. Multiple momentary button pushedmay be required to return to ESC On.

WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCSfunctionality of ESC, (except for the lim-ited slip feature described in the TCSsection), has been disabled and the“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi-nated. When in “Partial Off” mode, theengine power reduction feature of TCS isdisabled, and the enhanced vehicle sta-bility offered by the ESC system is re-duced.

• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabledwhen the ESC system is in the “PartialOff” mode.

Full Off — If Equipped

This mode is intended for off-highway oroff-road use only and should not be used onany public roadways. In this mode, TCS andESC features are turned OFF. To enter the“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESCOff” switch for five seconds while the vehicleis stopped with the engine running. After fiveseconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC OffIndicator Light” will illuminate, and the

“ESC OFF” message will display in the in-strument cluster. To turn ESC ON again,momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.

NOTE:System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds apredetermined speed. When the vehiclespeed slows below the predetermined speedthe system will return to ESC “Full Off”.

“Full Off” can only be achieved in TrackMode if so equipped.

ESC modes may also be affected by drivemodes if so equipped.

WARNING!

• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the enginetorque reduction and stability featuresare disabled. Therefore, enhanced ve-hicle stability offered by the ESC systemis unavailable. In an emergency evasivemaneuver, the ESC system will not en-gage to assist in maintaining stability.ESC “Full Off” mode is intended foroff-highway or off-road use only.

91

WARNING!• With the ESC switched off, the en-

hanced vehicle stability offered by ESCis unavailable. In an emergency evasivemaneuver, the ESC system will not en-gage to assist in maintaining stability.ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended foroff-highway or off-road use.

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can itincrease the traction afforded by prevail-ing road conditions. ESC cannot preventall accidents, including those resultingfrom excessive speed in turns, driving onvery slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.ESC also cannot prevent collisions.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator LightAnd ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/MalfunctionIndicator Light” in the instrumentcluster will come on when the igni-tion is turned to the ON mode. Itshould go out with the engine run-

ning. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indica-tor Light” comes on continuously with the en-gine running, a malfunction has been detectedin the ESC system. If this light remains on afterseveral ignition cycles, and the vehicle has beendriven several miles (kilometers) at speedsgreater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-rized dealer as soon as possible to have theproblem diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight” (located in the instrument cluster)starts to flash as soon as the tires lose tractionand the ESC system becomes active. The “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” alsoflashes when TCS is active. If the “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” beginsto flash during acceleration, ease up on theaccelerator and apply as little throttle as pos-sible. Be sure to adapt your speed and drivingto the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”come on momentarily each time the igni-tion is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, theESC system will be on even if it was turnedoff previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;the sounds will stop when ESC becomesinactive following the maneuver thatcaused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light”indicates the customer haselected to have the ElectronicStability Control (ESC) in a re-duced mode.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential forwheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steeringwheel input and the speed of the vehicle.When ERM determines that the rate ofchange of the steering wheel angle and vehi-cle’s speed are sufficient to potentially causewheel lift, it then applies the appropriatebrake and may also reduce engine power tolessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.

SAFE

TY

92

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel liftoccurring during severe or evasive drivingmaneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due toother factors, such as road conditions, leav-ing the roadway, or striking objects or othervehicles.

NOTE:ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “FullOff” mode (if equipped). Refer to “ElectronicStability Control (ESC)” in this section for acomplete explanation of the available ESCmodes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading,road conditions and driving conditions,influence the chance that wheel lift orrollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent allwheel lift or roll overs, especially thosethat involve leaving the roadway or strikingobjects or other vehicles. The capabilitiesof an ERM-equipped vehicle must neverbe exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner which could jeopardize the user'ssafety or the safety of others.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognizean excessively swaying trailer and will takethe appropriate actions to attempt to stop thesway. TSC will become active automaticallyonce an excessively swaying trailer is recog-nized.

NOTE:TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.Always use caution when towing a trailer andfollow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “StartingAnd Operating” for further information.

When TSC is functioning, the “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” willflash, the engine power may be reduced andyou may feel the brakes being applied toindividual wheels to attempt to stop thetrailer from swaying. TSC is disabled whenthe ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “FullOff” modes.

WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow thevehicle down, stop at the nearest safelocation, and adjust the trailer load toeliminate trailer sway.

Ready Alert Braking (RAB)

Ready Alert Braking may reduce the timerequired to reach full braking during emer-gency braking situations. It anticipates whenan emergency braking situation may occur bymonitoring how fast the throttle is released bythe driver. The EBC will prepare the brakesystem for a panic stop.

Rain Brake Support (RBS)

Rain Brake Support may improve brakingperformance in wet conditions. It will periodi-cally apply a small amount of brake pressureto remove any water buildup on the frontbrake rotors. It functions when the wind-shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. WhenRain Brake Support is active, there is nonotification to the driver and no driver inter-action is required.

93

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of theESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS) mod-ules that provides torque at the steeringwheel for certain driving conditions in whichthe ESC module is detecting vehicle instabil-ity. The torque that the steering wheel re-ceives is only meant to help the driver realizeoptimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notifica-tion the driver receives that the feature isactive is the torque applied to the steeringwheel.

NOTE:The DST feature is only meant to help thedriver realize the correct course of actionthrough small torques on the steering wheel,which means the effectiveness of the DSTfeature is highly dependent on the driver’ssensitivity and overall reaction to the appliedtorque. It is very important to realize that thisfeature will not steer the vehicle, meaningthe driver is still responsible for steering thevehicle.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped

HDC is intended for low speed off road driv-ing while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintainsvehicle speed while descending hills duringvarious driving situations. HDC controls ve-hicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.

HDC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will notactivate).

2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready butactivation conditions are not met, ordriver is actively overriding with brake orthrottle application).

3. Active (feature is enabled and activelycontrolling vehicle speed).

Enabling HDC

HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch,but the following conditions must also be metto enable HDC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range

• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).

• Parking brake is released.

• Driver door is closed.

Activating HDC

Once HDC is enabled it will activate auto-matically if driven down a grade of sufficientmagnitude. The set speed for HDC is select-able by the driver, and can be adjusted byusing the gear shift +/-. The following sum-marizes the HDC set speeds:

HDC Target Set Speeds

• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled butwill not activate

• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)

• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)

• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)

• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)

• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)

• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped

SAFE

TY

94

NOTE:During HDC the +/- shifter input is used forHDC target speed selection, but will not af-fect the gear chosen by the transmission.When actively controlling HDC the transmis-sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding drivingconditions.

Driver Override

The driver may override HDC activation withthrottle or brake application at anytime.

Deactivating HDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain availableif any of the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttleor brake application.

• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).

• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi-cient magnitude, is on level ground, or is onan uphill grade.

• Vehicle is shifted to park.

Disabling HDC

HDC will be deactivated and disabled if anyof the following conditions occur:

• The driver pushes the HDC switch.

• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD LowRange.

• The parking brake is applied.

• Driver door opens.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).

• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.

Feedback To The Driver

The instrument cluster has an HDC icon andthe HDC switch has an LED icon, which offersfeedback to the driver about the state HDCis in.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu-minate and remain on solid when HDC isenabled or activated. This is the normaloperating condition for HDC.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flashfor several seconds then extinguish whenthe driver pushes the HDC switch but en-able conditions are not met.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flashfor several seconds then extinguish whenHDC disables due to excess speed.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flashwhen HDC deactivates due to overheatedbrakes. The flashing will stop and HDC willactivate again once the brakes have cooledsufficiently.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver incontrolling vehicle speed when descend-ing hills. The driver must remain attentiveto the driving conditions and is responsiblefor maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped

SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD LowRange only. SSC maintains vehicle speed byactively controlling engine torque and brakes.

95

SSC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will notactivate).

2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready butactivation conditions are not met, ordriver is actively overriding with brake orthrottle application).

3. Active (feature is enabled and activelycontrolling vehicle speed).

Enabling SSC

SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch,but the following conditions must also be metto enable SSC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.


• Parking brake is released.

• Driver door is closed.

• Driver is not applying throttle.

Activating SSC

Once SSC is enabled it will activate automati-cally once the following conditions are met:

• Driver releases throttle.

• Driver releases brake.

• Transmission is in any selection otherthan P.


The set speed for SSC is selectable by thedriver, and can be adjusted by using the gearshift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed maybe reduced when climbing a grade and thelevel of set speed reduction depends on themagnitude of grade. The following summa-rizes the SSC set speeds:

SSC Target Set Speeds

• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)

• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)

• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)

• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)

• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)

• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)

• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped

• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)

• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• PARK = SSC remains enabled but notactive

NOTE:

• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used forSSC target speed selection but will notaffect the gear chosen by the transmission.While actively controlling SSC the trans-mission will shift appropriately for thedriver-selected set speed and correspond-ing driving conditions.

• SSC performance is influenced by the Ter-rain Select mode. This difference may benotable to the driver and may be perceivedas a varying level of aggressiveness.

SAFE

TY

96

Driver Override:

The driver may override SSC activation withthrottle or brake application at any time.

Deactivating SSC

SSC will be deactivated but remain availableif any of the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttleor brake application.

• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).

• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.

Disabling SSC

SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any ofthe following conditions occur:

• The driver pushes the SSC switch.

• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD LowRange.

• The parking brake is applied.

• Driver door opens.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).

Feedback To The Driver:

The instrument cluster has an SSC icon andthe SSC switch has an LED which offer feed-back to the driver about the state SSC is in.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu-minate and remain on solid when SSC isenabled or activated. This is the normaloperating condition for SSC.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flashfor several seconds then extinguish whenthe driver pushes the SSC switch but en-able conditions are not met.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flashfor several seconds then extinguish whenSSC disables due to excess speed.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flashthen extinguish when SSC deactivates dueto overheated brakes.

WARNING!

SSC is only intended to assist the driver incontrolling vehicle speed when driving inoff road conditions. The driver must re-main attentive to the driving conditionsand is responsible for maintaining a safevehicle speed.

AUXILIARY DRIVINGSYSTEMSBlind Spot Monitoring

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) systemuses two radar-based sensors, located insidethe rear bumper fascia, to detect Highwaylicensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, mo-torcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zonesfrom the rear/front/side of the vehicle.

97

The BSM detection zone covers approxi-mately one lane width on both sides of thevehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length startsat the outside rear view mirror and extendsapproximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rearbumper of the vehicle. The BSM systemmonitors the detection zones on both sides ofthe vehicle when the vehicle speed reachesapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher andwill alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warninglight will momentarily illuminate in both out-side rear view mirrors to let the driver knowthat the system is operational. The BSM

system sensors operate when the vehicle is inany forward gear or REVERSE and entersstand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.

The BSM warning light, located in the out-side mirrors, will illuminate if a vehiclemoves into a blind spot zone.

The BSM system can also be configured tosound an audible (chime) alert and mute theradio to notify you of objects that have en-tered the detection zones.

Rear Cross Path (RCP)

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is in-tended to aid the driver when backing out ofparking spaces where the vision of oncomingvehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly andcautiously out of the parking space until therear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCPsystem will then have a clear view of the crosstraffic and if an oncoming vehicle is de-tected, will alert the driver. When RCP is onand the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver isalerted using both the visual and audiblealarms, including reducing the radio volume.

Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring” in “Safety” inthe Owner's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for more information.

Modes Of Operation

Three selectable modes of operation areavailable in the Uconnect System. Refer to“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in theOwner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further information.

Rear Detection Zones Blind Spot Warning Light

SAFE

TY

98







Blind Spot Alert Lights Only

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, theBSM system will provide a visual alert in theappropriate side view mirror based on a de-tected object. However, when the system isoperating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, thesystem will respond with both visual andaudible alerts when a detected object is pres-ent. Whenever an audible alert is requested,the radio is muted.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide avisual alert in the appropriate side view mirrorbased on a detected object. If the turn signalis then activated, and it corresponds to analert present on that side of the vehicle, anaudible chime will also be sounded. When-ever a turn signal and detected object arepresent on the same side at the same time,both the visual and audible alerts will beissued. In addition to the audible alert theradio (if on) will also be muted.

NOTE:Whenever an audible alert is requested by theBSM system, the radio is also muted.

When the system is in RCP, the system shallrespond with both visual and audible alertswhen a detected object is present. Wheneveran audible alert is requested, the radio is alsomuted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;the RCP state always requests the chime.

Blind Spot Alert Off

When the BSM system is turned off there willbe no visual or audible alerts from either theBSM or RCP systems.

NOTE:The BSM system will store the current oper-ating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Eachtime the vehicle is started the previouslystored mode will be recalled and used.

General Information



1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.



Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) systemprovides the driver with audible and visualwarnings within the instrument cluster dis-play to warn the driver when it detects apotential frontal collision. The warnings areintended to provide the driver with enoughtime to react, avoid or mitigate the potentialcollision.

99

NOTE:FCW monitors the information from the for-ward looking sensors as well as the ElectronicBrake Controller (EBC), to calculate the prob-ability of a forward collision. When the sys-tem determines that a forward collision isprobable, the driver will be provided withaudible and visual warnings.

Changing FCW System Status

The Forward Collision Warning settings arelocated in the Uconnect display in the con-trols settings.

NOTE:

• The default sensitivity of FCW is the“Medium” setting and the system status is“Warning & Braking”. This allows the sys-tem to warn the driver of a possible colli-sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it applies autonomousbraking.

• Changing the FCW status to “Only Warn-ing” prevents the system from providinglimited active braking, or additional brakesupport if the driver is not braking ade-

quately in the event of a potential frontalcollision, but maintains the audible andvisual warnings.

• Changing the FCW status to “Off” preventsthe system from providing autonomousbraking, or additional brake support if thedriver is not braking adequately in the eventof a potential frontal collision. If FCW is setto “Off”, “FCW OFF” will appear in theinstrument cluster display.

Changing FCW Sensitivity

The FCW feature has three settings and canbe changed within the Uconnect SystemScreen:

• Far

• Medium

• Near

Far

The far setting provides warnings for poten-tial collisions more distant in front of thevehicle, allowing the driver to have the mostreaction time to avoid a collision.

More cautious drivers that do not mind fre-quent warnings may prefer this setting.

NOTE:This setting gives you the most reaction time.

Medium

The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”setting and the system status is “Warning &Braking”. This allows the system to warn thedriver of a possible collision with the vehicle infront using audible/visual warnings and it ap-plies autonomous braking.

Near

Changing the FCW sensitivity to the “Near”setting, allows the system to warn you of apotential frontal collision when you are muchcloser.

This setting provides less reaction time thanthe “Far” setting, which allows for a moredynamic driving experience.

More dynamic or aggressive drivers that wantto avoid frequent warnings may prefer thissetting.

SAFE

TY

100

Refer to your Owner's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents)or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further details.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is notintended to avoid a collision on its own,nor can FCW detect every type of potentialcollision. The driver has the responsibilityto avoid a collision by controlling the ve-hicle via braking and steering. Failure tofollow this warning could lead to seriousinjury or death.

Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)NOTE:For vehicles equipped with run flat tires —when the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of14 psi (96 kPa) or lower, always check tirepressure and replace the tire at the firstopportunity. At inflation pressure of/or below14 psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flatmode of operation. In this condition, it is

recommended a vehicle maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum distance of50 miles (80 km). The manufacturer does notrecommend using the run flat feature whiledriving a vehicle loaded at full capacity ortowing a trailer.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)will warn the driver of a low tire pressurebased on the vehicle recommended cold tirepressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperatureby about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).This means that when the outside tempera-ture decreases, the tire pressure will de-crease. Tire pressure should always be setbased on cold inflation tire pressure. This isdefined as the tire pressure after the vehiclehas not been driven for at least three hours, ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after athree-hour period. Refer to “Tires” in “Servic-ing And Maintenance” for information on how toproperly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tirepressure will also increase as the vehicle isdriven - this is normal and there should be noadjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tirepressure if the tire pressure falls below thelow pressure warning threshold for any rea-son, including low temperature effects, ornatural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver oflow tire pressure as long as the conditionexists, and will not turn off until the tirepressure is at or above recommended coldtire pressure. Once the low tire pressurewarning has been illuminated, the tire pres-sure must be increased to the recommendedcold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pres-sure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turnedoff.

NOTE:When filling warm tires, the tire pressure mayneed to be increased up to an additional 4 psi(30 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-ard pressure in order to turn the Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light off.

The system will automatically update and theTire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light willextinguish once the updated tire pressures

101




have been received. The vehicle may need tobe driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle has a recom-mended cold (parked for more than threehours) tire pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa).If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)will decrease the tire pressure to approxi-mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure issufficiently low enough to turn ON the TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Drivingthe vehicle may cause the tire pressure to riseto approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but theTire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light willstill be ON. In this situation, the Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF onlyafter the tires have been inflated to the vehi-cle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for theoriginal equipment tires and wheels.TPMS pressures and warnings have

CAUTION!been established for the tire sizeequipped on your vehicle. Undesirablesystem operation or sensor damage mayresult when using replacement equip-ment that is not of the same size, type,and/or style. The TPM sensor is not de-signed for use on aftermarket wheelsand may contribute to a poor overallsystem performance or sensor damage.Customers are encouraged to use OEMwheels to assure proper TPM featureoperation.

• Using aftermarket tire sealants maycause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-able. After using an aftermarket tiresealant it is recommended that you takeyour vehicle to an authorized dealershipto have your sensor function checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tirepressure, always reinstall the valve stemcap. This will prevent moisture and dirtfrom entering the valve stem, whichcould damage the Tire Pressure Monitor-ing Sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace nor-mal tire care and maintenance, or to pro-vide warning of a tire failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tirepressure gauge while adjusting your tirepressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’s respon-sibility to maintain correct tire pressureusing an accurate tire gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affecttire pressure, and the TPMS will monitorthe actual tire pressure in the tire.

SAFE

TY

102

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)uses wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tirepressure levels. Sensors, mounted to eachwheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tirepressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE:It is particularly important, for you to regu-larly check the tire pressure in all of your tiresand to maintain the proper pressure.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemMessages, which display in the instrumentcluster, and a graphic displaying tire pres-sures

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low PressureWarnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight will illuminate in the instru-ment cluster, and an audible chime

will be activated, when one or more of thefour active road tire pressures are low. Inaddition, the instrument cluster will displayan "Inflate to XX" message and a graphicdisplay of the pressure value(s) with the lowtire(s) in a different color. Refer to “Instru-ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To KnowYour Instrument Panel” for further informa-tion.

NOTE:Your system can be set to display pressureunits in PSI, BAR or kPa.

Should a low tire condition occur on any ofthe four active road tire(s), you should stop assoon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s)that is in a different color on the graphicdisplay to the vehicle’s recommended coldtire pressure displayed in the “Inflate to XX”message.

Tire Pressure Monitor Display

Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display

103

NOTE:When filling warm tires, the tire pressure mayneed to be increased up to an additional 4 psi(30 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-ard pressure in order to turn the Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light off.

The system will automatically update, thegraphic display of the pressure value(s) willreturn to its original color and the Tire Pres-sure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguishonce the updated tire pressure(s) have beenreceived. The vehicle may need to be drivenfor up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) to receive this information.

Service TPM System Warning

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light willflash on and off for 75 seconds, and remainon solid when a system fault is detected.The system fault will also sound a chime. Theinstrument cluster display will display a “SER-VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimumof five seconds. This message is then followedby a graphic display, with “- -“ in place ofthe pressure value(s), indicating which TirePressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not beingreceived.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequencewill repeat, providing the system fault stillexists. If the system fault no longer exists, theTire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will nolonger flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"message will not be present, and a pressurevalue will be displayed instead of dashes.A system fault can occur by any of the follow-ing:

• Jamming due to electronic devices or driv-ing next to facilities emitting the sameRadio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.

• Installing some form of aftermarket windowtinting that affects radio wave signals.

• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels orwheel housings.

• Using tire chains on the vehicle.

• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMsensors.

NOTE:There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor inthe spare tire. The TPMS will not be able tomonitor the tire pressure. If you install thespare tire in place of a road tire that hasa pressure below the low-pressure warning

limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, theTire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light willremain ON, a chime will sound, and theinstrument cluster display will still display apressure value in the different color graphicdisplay and an “Inflate to XX” message willbe displayed. After driving the vehicle for upto 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), theTire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light willflash on and off for 75 seconds and thenremain on solid. In addition, the instrumentcluster display will display a “SERVICE TPMSYSTEM" message for five seconds and thendisplay dashes (- -) in place of the pressurevalue. For each subsequent ignition switchcycle, a chime will sound, the Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light will flash on and offfor 75 seconds and then remain on solid, andthe instrument cluster display will display a"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for fiveseconds and then display dashes (- -) in placeof the pressure value. Once you repair orreplace the original road tire, and reinstall iton the vehicle in place of the spare tire, theTPMS will update automatically.

SAFE

TY

104

In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-tale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in theinstrument cluster display will display a newpressure value instead of dashes (- -), as longas no tire pressure is below the low-pressurewarning limit in any of the four active roadtires. The vehicle may need to be driven forup to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) inorder for the TPMS to receive this informa-tion.

TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped

The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing allfour wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)with wheel and tire assemblies that do nothave TPMS Sensors, such as when installingwinter wheel and tire assemblies on yourvehicle.

To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all fourwheel and tire assemblies (road tires) withtires not equipped with Tire Pressure Moni-toring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehiclefor 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). TheTPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light"

will flash on and off for 75 seconds and thenremain on. The instrument cluster will dis-play the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” messageand then display dashes (--) in place of thepressure values.

Beginning with the next ignition cycle, theTPMS will no longer chime or display the“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in theinstrument cluster but dashes (--) will remainin place of the pressure values.

To reactivate the TPMS, replace all fourwheel and tire assemblies (road tires) withtires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drivethe vehicle for up to 20 minutes above15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the"TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for75 seconds and then turn off. The instrumentcluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-TEM” message and then display pressurevalues in place of the dashes. On the nextignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"message will no longer be displayed as longas no system fault exists.

General Information



(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and

(2) This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.


105

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSYSTEMSSome of the most important safety features inyour vehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) AirBags

• Supplemental Active Head Restraints

• Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in thissection may be standard equipment on somemodels, or may be optional equipment onothers. If you are not sure, ask your autho-rized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the informationin this section. It tells you how to use yourrestraint system properly, to keep you andyour passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take tominimize the risk of harm from a deployingair bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under shouldalways ride buckled up in a vehicle with arear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in arear-facing child restraint) must ride inthe front passenger seat, move the seat asfar back as possible and use the properchild restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”in this section for further information).

3. Children that are not big enough to wearthe vehicle seat belt properly (refer to“Child Restraints” in this section for fur-ther information) should be secured in avehicle with a rear seat in child restraintsor belt-positioning booster seats. Olderchildren who do not use child restraints orbelt-positioning booster seats should rideproperly buckled up in a vehicle with arear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulderbelt behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions providedwith your child restraint to make sure thatyou are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lapand shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seatsshould be moved back as far as practicalto allow the front air bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window.If your vehicle has side air bags, anddeployment occurs, the side air bags willinflate forcefully into the space betweenoccupants and the door and occupantscould be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needsto be modified to accommodate a dis-abled person, refer to the “CustomerAssistance” section for customer servicecontact information.

SAFE

TY

106

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraintin front of an air bag. A deploying pas-senger front air bag can cause death orserious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in avehicle with a rear seat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellentdriver, even on short trips. Someone on theroad may be a poor driver and could cause acollision that includes you. This can happenfar away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts savelives, and they can reduce the seriousness ofinjuries in a collision. Some of the worstinjuries happen when people are thrown fromthe vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibilityof ejection and the risk of injury caused bystriking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone ina motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System(BeltAlert)

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remindthe driver and outboard front seat passenger(if equipped with outboard front passengerseat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. TheBelt Alert feature is active whenever the igni-tion switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi-tion.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignitionswitch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-tion, a chime will signal for a few seconds. Ifthe driver or outboard front seat passenger (ifequipped with outboard front passenger seatBeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignitionswitch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-tion the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn onand remain on until both outboard front seatbelts are buckled. The outboard front passen-ger seat BeltAlert is not active when an out-board front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activatedwhen the vehicle is moving above a specifiedvehicle speed range and the driver or out-board front seat passenger is unbuckled (ifequipped with outboard front passenger seatBeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seatBeltAlert is not active when the outboardfront passenger seat is unoccupied). TheBeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinkingthe Seat Belt Reminder Light and soundingan intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlertwarning sequence has completed, the SeatBelt Reminder Light will remain on until theseat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warningsequence may repeat based on vehicle speeduntil the driver and occupied outboard frontseat passenger seat belts are buckled. Thedriver should instruct all occupants to buckletheir seat belts.

Change of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger(if equipped with outboard front passengerseat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt

107

while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlertwarning sequence will begin until the seatbelts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlertis not active when the outboard front passen-ger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may betriggered when an animal or other items areplaced on the outboard front passenger seator when the seat is folded flat (if equipped).It is recommended that pets be restrained inthe rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses orpet carriers that are secured by seat belts,and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated byyour authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does notrecommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE:If BeltAlert has been deactivated and thedriver or outboard front seat passenger (ifequipped with outboard front passenger seatBeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Re-minder Light will turn on and remain on untilthe driver and outboard front seat passengerseat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle areequipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock onlyduring very sudden stops or collisions. Thisfeature allows the shoulder part of the seatbelt to move freely with you under normalconditions. However, in a collision the seatbelt will lock and reduce your risk of strikingthe inside of the vehicle or being thrown outof the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could leadto more severe injuries in a collision. Theair bags work with your seat belt torestrain you properly. In some collisions,the air bags won’t deploy at all. Alwayswear your seat belt even though you haveair bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengerscan suffer much greater injuries if youare not properly buckled up. You canstrike the interior of your vehicle or otherpassengers, or you can be thrown out of

WARNING!the vehicle. Always be sure you andothers in your vehicle are buckled upproperly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-sion, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a seat belt properly.Occupants, including the driver, shouldalways wear their seat belts whether ornot an air bag is also provided at theirseating position to minimize the risk ofsevere injury or death in the event of acrash.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly couldmake your injuries in a collision muchworse. You might suffer internal injuries,or you could even slide out of the seatbelt. Follow these instructions to wearyour seat belt safely and to keep yourpassengers safe, too.

SAFE

TY

108

WARNING!• Two people should never be belted into a

single seat belt. People belted togethercan crash into one another in a collision,hurting one another badly. Never use alap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for morethan one person, no matter what theirsize.

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase therisk of injury in a collision. The seat beltforces won’t be at the strong hip andpelvic bones, but across your abdomen.Always wear the lap part of your seat beltas low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect youproperly. In a collision, it could even cutinto you. Be sure the seat belt is flatagainst your body, without twists. If youcan’t straighten a seat belt in your ve-hicle, take it to your authorized dealerimmediately and have it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrongbuckle will not protect you properly. The

WARNING!lap portion could ride too high on yourbody, possibly causing internal injuries.Always buckle your seat belt into thebuckle nearest you.

• A seat belt that is too loose will notprotect you properly. In a sudden stop,you could move too far forward, increas-ing the possibility of injury. Wear yourseat belt snugly.

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm isdangerous. Your body could strike theinside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli-sion, increasing head and neck injury. Aseat belt worn under the arm can causeinternal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong asshoulder bones. Wear the seat belt overyour shoulder so that your strongestbones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you willnot protect you from injury during acollision. You are more likely to hit yourhead in a collision if you do not wear yourshoulder belt. The lap and shoulder beltare meant to be used together.

WARNING!• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart

in a collision and leave you with noprotection. Inspect the seat belt systemperiodically, checking for cuts, frays, orloose parts. Damaged parts must be re-placed immediately. Do not disassembleor modify the seat belt system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after a col-lision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sitback and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the backof the front seat, and next to your arm inthe rear seat (for vehicles equipped with arear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pullout the seat belt. Slide the latch plate upthe webbing as far as necessary to allowthe seat belt to go around your lap.

109

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,insert the latch plate into the buckle untilyou hear a “click.”

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snugand lies low across your hips, below yourabdomen. To remove slack in the lap beltportion, pull up on the shoulder belt.To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt thelatch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snugseat belt reduces the risk of sliding underthe seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across theshoulder and chest with minimal, if anyslack so that it is comfortable and notresting on your neck. The retractor willwithdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the redbutton on the buckle. The seat belt willautomatically retract to its stowed posi-tion. If necessary, slide the latch platedown the webbing to allow the seat belt toretract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist atwisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as pos-sible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)above the latch plate, grasp and twist theseat belt webbing 180 degrees to create afold that begins immediately above thelatch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over thefolded webbing. The folded webbing mustenter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until itclears the folded webbing and the seatbelt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, thetop of the shoulder belt can be adjustedupward or downward to position the seat beltaway from your neck. Push or squeeze the

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

1 — Seat Belt2 — Seat Belt Buckle

SAFE

TY

110

anchorage button to release the anchorage,and move it up or down to the position thatserves you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average,you will prefer the shoulder belt anchoragein a lower position, and if you are taller thanaverage, you will prefer the shoulder beltanchorage in a higher position. After yourelease the anchorage button, try to move itup or down to make sure that it is locked inposition.

NOTE:The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. Thisfeature allows the shoulder belt anchorage tobe adjusted in the upward position withoutpushing or squeezing the release button. Toverify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,pull downward on the shoulder belt anchor-age until it is locked into position.

WARNING!

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly couldmake your injuries in a collision muchworse. You might suffer internal injuries,or you could even slide out of the seatbelt. Follow these instructions to wearyour seat belt safely and to keep yourpassengers safe, too.

• Position the shoulder belt across theshoulder and chest with minimal, if anyslack so that it is comfortable and notresting on your neck. The retractor willwithdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

• Misadjustment of the seat belt couldreduce the effectiveness of the safetybelt in a crash.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,even when the webbing is fully extended andthe adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage(if equipped) is in its lowest position, yourauthorized dealer can provide you with a SeatBelt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender shouldbe used only if the existing seat belt is notlong enough. When the Seat Belt Extender isnot required for a different occupant, it mustbe removed.

WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it isphysically required in order to properlyfit the original seat belt system. DO NOTUSE the Seat Belt Extender if, whenworn, the distance between the frontedge of the Seat Belt Extender buckleand the center of the occupant’s body isLESS than 6 inches.

• Using a Seat Belt Extender when notneeded can increase the risk of seriousinjury or death in a collision. Only usethe Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt

Adjustable Anchorage

111

WARNING!is not long enough and only use in therecommended seating positions. Re-move and store the Seat Belt Extenderwhen not needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupantsincluding pregnant women: the risk of injuryin the event of an accident is reduced for themother and the unborn child if they arewearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below theabdomen and across the strong bones of thehips. Place the shoulder belt across the chestand away from the neck. Never place theshoulder belt behind the back or under thearm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped withpretensioning devices that are designed toremove slack from the seat belt in the eventof a collision. These devices may improve theperformance of the seat belt by removingslack from the seat belt early in a collision.Pretensioners work for all size occupants,including those in child restraints.

NOTE:These devices are not a substitute for properseat belt placement by the occupant. Theseat belt still must be worn snugly and posi-tioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items.A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bagmust be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

The front seat belt system is equipped withan Energy Management feature that may helpfurther reduce the risk of injury in the eventof a collision. The seat belt system has aretractor assembly that is designed to releasewebbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor(ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is usedto secure a child restraint system. For addi-tional information, refer to “Installing ChildRestraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” un-der the “Child Restraints” section of thismanual. The figure below illustrates the lock-ing feature for each seating position.Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

SAFE

TY

112

If the passenger seating position is equippedwith an ALR and is being used for normalusage, only pull the seat belt webbing out farenough to comfortably wrap around the occu-pant’s mid-section so as to not activate theALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear aclicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allowthe webbing to retract completely in this caseand then carefully pull out only the amount ofwebbing necessary to comfortably wraparound the occupant’s mid-section. Slide thelatch plate into the buckle until you hear a"click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulderbelt is automatically pre-locked. The seatbelt will still retract to remove any slack in theshoulder belt. Use the Automatic LockingMode anytime a child restraint is installed ina seating position that has a seat belt withthis feature. Children 12 years old and undershould always be properly restrained in avehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraintin front of an air bag. A deploying pas-senger front air bag can cause deathor serious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.


How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulderbelt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seatbelt retracts, you will hear a clickingsound. This indicates the seat belt is nowin the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder beltand allow it to retract completely to disen-gage the Automatic Locking Mode and acti-vate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-ing mode.

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replacedif the switchable Automatic Locking Re-tractor (ALR) feature or any other seatbelt function is not working properlywhen checked according to the proce-dures in the Service Manual.

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)Locations

113

WARNING!• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly

could increase the risk of injury in colli-sions.

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Modeto restrain occupants who are wearingthe seat belt or children who are usingbooster seats. The locked mode is onlyused to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a har-ness for restraining the child.

Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)

These head restraints are passive, deployablecomponents, and vehicles with this equip-ment cannot be readily identified by anymarkings, only through visual inspection ofthe head restraint. The head restraint will besplit in two halves, with the front half beingsoft foam and trim, the back half being deco-rative plastic.

How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) de-termines whether the severity or type of rearimpact will require the Active Head Re-straints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impactrequires deployment, both the driver andfront passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, thefront half of the head restraint extends for-ward to minimize the gap between the backof the occupant’s head and the AHR. Thissystem is designed to help prevent or reducethe extent of injuries to the driver and frontpassenger in certain types of rear impacts.

NOTE:The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may ormay not deploy in the event of a front or sideimpact. However, if during a front impact, asecondary rear impact occurs, the AHR maydeploy based on the severity and type of theimpact.

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components

1 — Head Restraint Front Half(Soft Foam And Trim)2 — Head Restraint Back Half(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes4 — Seat Back

SAFE

TY

114

WARNING!



• Active Head Restraints may be deployedif they are struck by an object such as ahand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci-dental deployment of the Active HeadRestraint, ensure that all cargo is se-cured, as loose cargo could contact theActive Head Restraint during suddenstops. Failure to follow this warningcould cause personal injury if the ActiveHead Restraint is deployed.

NOTE:For more information on properly adjustingand positioning the head restraint, refer to“Supplemental Active Head Restraints” in“Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”

Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)

If the Active Head Restraints are triggeredduring a collision, the front half of the headrestraint will be extended forward and sepa-rated from the rear half of the head restraint(See Image). Do not drive your vehicle afterthe AHRs have deployed. The head restraintmust be reset into the original position to bestprotect the occupant for all types of colli-sions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer mustreset the AHRs on the driver’s and frontpassenger’s seat before driving. Personallyattempting to reset the AHRs may result indamage to the AHRs that could impair theirfunction.

WARNING!

Deployed AHRs are not able to best protectyou in all types of collisions. Have de-ployed AHRs reset by an authorized dealerimmediately.

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed

115

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in thissection may be standard equipment on somemodels, or may be optional equipment onothers. If you are not sure, ask your autho-rized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protectyou in a collision. The Occupant RestraintController (ORC) monitors the internal cir-cuits and interconnecting wiring associatedwith the electrical Air Bag System Compo-nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with thefollowing Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

Air Bag Warning Light

The ORC monitors the readiness of theelectronic parts of the air bag system when-ever the ignition switch is in the START orON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is inthe OFF position or in the ACC position, theair bag system is not on and the air bags willnot inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supplysystem that may deploy the air bag systemeven if the battery loses power or it becomesdisconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Lightin the instrument panel for approximatelyfour to eight seconds for a self-check whenthe ignition switch is first in the ON/RUNposition. After the self-check, the Air BagWarning Light will turn off. If the ORC detectsa malfunction in any part of the system, itturns on the Air Bag Warning Light, eithermomentarily or continuously. A single chimewill sound to alert you if the light comes onagain after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that willilluminate the instrument panel Air BagWarning Light if a malfunction is detectedthat could affect the air bag system. Thediagnostics also record the nature of themalfunction. While the air bag system isdesigned to be maintenance free, if any ofthe following occurs, have an authorizeddealer service the air bag system immedi-ately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not comeon during the four to eight seconds whenthe ignition switch is first in the ON/RUNposition.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on afterthe four to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-mittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en-gine related gauges are not working, the Oc-cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may alsobe disabled. In this condition the air bagsmay not be ready to inflate for your protec-tion. Have an authorized dealer service theair bag system immediately.

SAFE

TY

116

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in yourinstrument panel could mean you won’thave the air bag system to protect you in acollision. If the light does not come on as abulb check when the ignition is first turnedon, stays on after you start the vehicle, or ifit comes on as you drive, have an autho-rized dealer service the air bag systemimmediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light isdetected, which could affect the Supplemen-tal Restraint System (SRS), the RedundantAir Bag Warning Light will illuminate on theinstrument panel. The Redundant Air BagWarning Light will stay on until the fault iscleared. In addition, a single chime willsound to alert you that the Redundant Air BagWarning Light has come on and a fault hasbeen detected. If the Redundant Air BagWarning Light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving have an authorizeddealer service the vehicle immediately. Foradditional information regarding the Redun-dant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “GettingTo Know Your Instrument Panel” section ofthis manual.

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and frontpassenger. The front air bags are a supple-ment to the seat belt restraint systems. Thedriver front air bag is mounted in the center ofthe steering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel,above the glove compartment. The words“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossedon the air bag covers.

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel orinstrument panel during front air bagdeployment could cause serious injury,including death. Air bags need room toinflate. Sit back, comfortably extendingyour arms to reach the steering wheel orinstrument panel.

Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Knee Air Bag

117

WARNING!• Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-senger front air bag can cause death orserious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.


Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has mul-tistage driver and front passenger air bags.This system provides output appropriate tothe severity and type of collision as deter-mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller(ORC), which may receive information fromthe front impact sensors (if equipped) orother system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immedi-ately during an impact that requires air bagdeployment. A low energy output is used inless severe collisions. A higher energy outputis used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driverand/or front passenger seat belt buckleswitch that detects whether the driver or frontpassenger seat belt is buckled. The seat beltbuckle switch may adjust the inflation rate ofthe Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or nearthe air bag on the instrument panel orsteering wheel because any such objectscould cause harm if the vehicle is in acollision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open themmanually. You may damage the air bagsand you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional. Theprotective covers for the air bag cush-ions are designed to open only when theair bags are inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could leadto more severe injuries in a collision. Theair bags work with your seat belt torestrain you properly. In some collisions,

WARNING!air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wearyour seat belts even though you have airbags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-tional protection by supplementing the seatbelts. Front air bags are not expected toreduce the risk of injury in rear, side, orrollover collisions. The front air bags will notdeploy in all frontal collisions, includingsome that may produce substantial vehicledamage — for example, some pole collisions,truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the typeand location of impact, front air bags maydeploy in crashes with little vehicle front-enddamage but that produce a severe initialdeceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicledeceleration over time, vehicle speed anddamage by themselves are not good indica-tors of whether or not an air bag should havedeployed.

SAFE

TY

118

Seat belts are necessary for your protection inall collisions, and also are needed to helpkeep you in position, away from an inflatingair bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiringthe front air bags, it signals the inflator units.A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generatedto inflate the front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and theupper right side of the instrument panelseparate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The front airbags fully inflate in less time than it takes toblink your eyes. The front air bags thenquickly deflate while helping to restrain thedriver and front passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect theknees of the driver and front passenger, andposition the front occupants for improvedinteraction with the front air bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the kneeimpact bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to theknee impact bolsters such as alarmlights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

This vehicle is equipped with a SupplementalDriver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instru-ment panel below the steering column. TheSupplemental Driver Knee Air Bag providesenhanced protection during a frontal impactby working together with the seat belts, pre-tensioners, and front air bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SABs)

This vehicle is equipped with SupplementalSeat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SABs) are located in the outboard side of thefront seats. The SABs are marked with a“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn intothe outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk ofoccupant injury during certain side impacts,in addition to the injury reduction potentialprovided by the seat belts and body structure.

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted SideAir Bag Label

119

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam onthe outboard side of the seatback’s trimcover. The inflating SAB deploys through theseat seam into the space between the occu-pant and the door. The SAB moves at a veryhigh speed and with such a high force that itcould injure occupants if they are not seatedproperly, or if items are positioned in the areawhere the SAB inflates. Children are at aneven greater risk of injury from a deploying airbag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or placeobjects between you and the Side AirBags; the performance could be adverselyaffected and/or objects could be pushedinto you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains(SABICs)

This vehicle is equipped with SupplementalSide Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-tains (SABICs) are located above the sidewindows. The trim covering the SABICs islabeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head andother injuries to front and rear seat outboardoccupants in certain side impacts, in addi-tion to the injury reduction potential providedby the seat belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering theside windows. An inflating SABIC pushes theoutside edge of the headliner out of the wayand covers the window. The SABICs inflatewith enough force to injure occupants if theyare not belted and seated properly, or if itemsare positioned in the area where the SABICsinflate. Children are at an even greater risk ofinjury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk ofpartial or complete ejection of vehicle occu-pants through side windows in certain sideimpact events.

WARNING!

• Do not mount equipment, or stack lug-gage or other cargo up high enough toblock the deployment of the SABICs.The trim covering above the side win-dows where the SABIC and its deploy-ment path are located should remainfree from any obstructions.

• In order for the SABICs to work as in-tended, do not install any accessoryitems in your vehicle which could alter

Supplemental Side Air Bag InflatableCurtain (SABIC) Label Location

SAFE

TY

120

WARNING!the roof. Do not add an aftermarketsunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roofracks that require permanent attach-ments (bolts or screws) for installationon the vehicle roof. Do not drill into theroof of the vehicle for any reason.

Side Impacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to activate incertain side impacts. The Occupant RestraintController (ORC) determines whether the de-ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particularimpact event is appropriate, based on theseverity and type of collision. The side impactsensors aid the ORC in determining the ap-propriate response to impact events. The sys-tem is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bagson the impact side of the vehicle duringimpacts that require Side Air Bag occupantprotection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bagsdeploy independently; a left side impact de-ploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bagsonly. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good

indicator of whether or not Side Air Bagsshould have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all sidecollisions, including some collisions at cer-tain angles, or some side collisions that donot impact the area of the passenger com-partment. The Side Air Bags may deployduring angled or offset frontal collisionswhere the front air bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seatbelt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy inless time than it takes to blink your eyes.

WARNING!

• Occupants, including children, who areup against or very close to Side Air Bagscan be seriously injured or killed. Occu-pants, including children, should neverlean on or sleep against the door, sidewindows, or area where the side air bagsinflate, even if they are in an infant orchild restraint.

• Seat belts (and child restraints whereappropriate) are necessary for your pro-tection in all collisions. They also help

WARNING!keep you in position, away from an in-flating Side Air Bag. To get the bestprotection from the Side Air Bags, occu-pants must wear their seat belts properlyand sit upright with their backs againstthe seats. Children must be properlyrestrained in a child restraint or boosterseat that is appropriate for the size of thechild.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Donot lean against the door or window. Situpright in the center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bagsduring deployment could cause you tobe severely injured or killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone couldlead to more severe injuries in a colli-sion. The Side Air Bags work with yourseat belt to restrain you properly. Insome collisions, Side Air Bags won’tdeploy at all. Always wear your seat belteven though you have Side Air Bags.

121

NOTE:Air bag covers may not be obvious in theinterior trim, but they will open during air bagdeployment.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate incertain rollover events. The ORC determineswhether the deployment of the Side Air Bagsin a particular rollover event is appropriate,based on the severity and type of collision.Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indi-cator of whether or not Side Air Bags shouldhave deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in allrollover events. The rollover sensing systemdetermines if a rollover event may be inprogress and whether deployment is appro-priate. In the event the vehicle experiences arollover or near rollover event, and deploy-ment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, therollover sensing system will also deploy theseat belt pretensioners on both sides of thevehicle.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk ofpartial or complete ejection of vehicle occu-pants through side windows in certain roll-over or side impact events.

Air Bag System Components

NOTE:The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)monitors the internal circuits and intercon-necting wiring associated with electrical AirBag System Components listed below:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflateimmediately after deployment.

NOTE:Front and/or side air bags will not deploy inall collisions. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys theair bags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes causeabrasions and/or skin reddening to the oc-cupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.The abrasions are similar to friction ropeburns or those you might get sliding along acarpet or gymnasium floor. They are notcaused by contact with chemicals. They arenot permanent and normally heal quickly.However, if you haven’t healed significantlywithin a few days, or if you have any blis-tering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see somesmoke-like particles. The particles are anormal by-product of the process that gen-erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag

SAFE

TY

122

inflation. These airborne particles may irri-tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If youhave skin or eye irritation, rinse the areawith cool water. For nose or throat irritation,move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,see your doctor. If these particles settle onyour clothing, follow the garment manufac-turer’s instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bagshave deployed. If you are involved in anothercollision, the air bags will not be in place toprotect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt preten-sioners cannot protect you in anothercollision. Have the air bags, seat belt pre-tensioners, and the seat belt retractor as-semblies replaced by an authorized dealerimmediately. Also, have the Occupant Re-straint Controller System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in theinterior trim, but they will open during airbag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should betaken to an authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communica-tion network remains intact, and the powerremains intact, depending on the nature ofthe event, the ORC will determine whether tohave the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-tem perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the batteryhas power or until the hazard light button ispressed. The hazard lights can be deacti-vated by pressing the hazard light button.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain onas long as the battery has power.

• Unlock the power door locks.

Enhanced Accident Response System ResetProcedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re-sponse System functions after an event, theignition switch must be changed from igni-tion START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Care-fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in theengine compartment and on the ground nearthe engine compartment and fuel tank beforeresetting the system and starting the engine.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bagsystem could cause it to fail when youneed it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you.Do not modify the components or wiring,including adding any kind of badges orstickers to the steering wheel hub trimcover or the upper right side of theinstrument panel. Do not modify thefront bumper, vehicle body structure, oradd aftermarket side steps or runningboards.

123

WARNING!• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of

the air bag system yourself. Be sure totell anyone who works on your vehiclethat it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of yourair bag system. The air bag may inflateaccidentally or may not function prop-erly if modifications are made. Take yourvehicle to an authorized dealer for anyair bag system service. If your seat, in-cluding your trim cover and cushion,needs to be serviced in any way (includ-ing removal or loosening/tightening ofseat attachment bolts), take the vehicleto your authorized dealer. Only manufac-turer approved seat accessories may beused. If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities,contact your authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploymentor hitting a road obstacle, data that will assistin understanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to recorddata related to vehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time, typically30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

• Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only ifa non-trivial crash situation occurs; no dataare recorded by the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location) are re-corded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR datawith the type of personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crash investiga-tion.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to thevehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the information if theyhave access to the vehicle or the EDR.

SAFE

TY

124

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckledup at all times, including babies and chil-dren. Every state in the United States, andevery Canadian province, requires that smallchildren ride in proper restraint systems.This is the law, and you can be prosecuted forignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should rideproperly buckled up in a rear seat, if avail-able. According to crash statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in the rearseats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child canbecome a projectile inside the vehicle. Theforce required to hold even an infant onyour lap could become so great that youcould not hold the child, no matter howstrong you are. The child and others couldbe badly injured or killed. Any child ridingin your vehicle should be in a proper re-straint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of re-straints for children from newborn size to thechild almost large enough for an adult safetybelt. Always check the child seat Owner’sManual to make sure you have the correctseat for your child. Carefully read and followall the instructions and warnings in the childrestraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labelsattached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, makesure that it has a label certifying that it meetsall applicable Safety Standards. You shouldalso make sure that you can install it in thevehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer towww.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm orcall: 1–888–327–4236

• Canadian residents should refer toTransport Canada’s website for additionalinformation: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

125

www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm

www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm



Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and ToddlersChildren who are two years old or younger and whohave not reached the height or weight limits of their

child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle

Small ChildrenChildren who are at least two years old or who have

outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facingchild restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Har-ness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown their forward-facing childrestraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s

seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seatbelt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

Children Too Large forChild Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrownthe height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children riderear-facing in the vehicle until they are twoyears old or until they reach either the heightor weight limit of their rear-facing child re-straint. Two types of child restraints can beused rear-facing: infant carriers and convert-ible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing inthe vehicle. It is recommended for childrenfrom birth until they reach the weight or

eight limit of the infant carrier. Convertiblechild seats can be used either rear-facing orforward-facing in the vehicle. Convertiblechild seats often have a higher weight limit inthe rear-facing direction than infant carriersdo, so they can be used rear-facing by chil-dren who have outgrown their infant carrierbut are still less than at least two years old.Children should remain rear-facing until theyreach the highest weight or height allowed bytheir convertible child seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraintin front of an air bag. A deploying pas-senger front air bag can cause death orserious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.


SAFE

TY

126

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who haveoutgrown their rear-facing convertible childseat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.Forward-facing child seats and convertiblechild seats used in the forward-facing directionare for children who are over two years old orwho have outgrown the rear-facing weight orheight limit of their rear-facing convertiblechild seat. Children should remain in aforward-facing child seat with a harness for aslong as possible, up to the highest weight orheight allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is abovethe forward-facing limit for the child seatshould use a belt-positioning booster seatuntil the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. Ifthe child cannot sit with knees bent over thevehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s backis against the seatback, they should use abelt-positioning booster seat. The child andbelt-positioning booster seat are held in thevehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failureof an infant or child restraint. It couldcome loose in a collision. The childcould be badly injured or killed. Followthe child restraint manufacturer’s direc-tions exactly when installing an infant orchild restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in thevehicle, do not move the vehicle seatforward or rearward because it canloosen the child restraint attachments.Remove the child restraint before ad-justing the vehicle seat position. Whenthe vehicle seat has been adjusted, re-install the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use,secure it in the vehicle with the seat beltor LATCH anchorages, or remove it fromthe vehicle. Do not leave it loose in thevehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, itcould strike the occupants or seatbacksand cause serious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear theshoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs arelong enough to bend over the front of the seatwhen their back is against the seatback,should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Usethis simple 5-step test to decide whether thechild can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back againstthe back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortablyover the front of the vehicle seat – whilethe child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’sshoulder between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’s thighs andnot the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for thewhole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was“no,” then the child still needs to use abooster seat in this vehicle. If the child isusing the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt

127

fit periodically and make sure the seat beltbuckle is latched. A child’s squirming orslouching can move the belt out of position.If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,move the child closer to the center of thevehicle, or use a booster seat to position theseat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder beltunder an arm or behind their back. In acrash, the shoulder belt will not protect achild properly, which may result in serious

WARNING!injury or death. A child must always wearboth the lap and shoulder portions of theseat belt correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Weight of theChild + Child Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

LATCH – LowerAnchors Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors+ Top Tether Anchor

Seat Belt + Top TetherAnchor

Rear-Facing ChildRestraint

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X

Rear-Facing ChildRestraint

More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint

More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X

SAFE

TY

128

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren(LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child re-straint anchorage system called LATCH,which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren. The LATCH system has three

vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two loweranchorages located at the back of the seatcushion where it meets the seatback and onetop tether anchorage located behind the seat-ing position. These anchorages are used toinstall LATCH-equipped child seats withoutusing the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seatingpositions may have a top tether anchoragebut no lower anchorages. In these seatingpositions, the seat belt must be used with thetop tether anchorage to install the child re-straint. Please see the following table formore information.

LATCH Positions For Installing ChildRestraints In This Vehicle

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of thechild restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to

attach the child restraint?65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combinedweight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs

(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead ofthe LATCH system once the combined weight is more

than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

LATCH Label

LATCH Positions For Installing ChildRestraints In This Vehicle

Lower Anchorage Symbol(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

129

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be usedtogether to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child

restraint?No

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCHanchorage system to attach a rear-facing or

forward-facing child restraint.Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages

if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See yourbooster seat owner’s manual for more information.

Can a child seat be installed in the center position usingthe inner LATCH lower anchorages? No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat

in the center seating position.

Can two child restraints be attached using a commonlower LATCH anchorage? No

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more childrestraints. If the center position does not have dedicatedLATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a

child seat in the center position next to a child seat us-ing the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of thefront passenger seat? Yes

The child seat may touch the back of the front passengerseat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more

information.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraint may be removed in the center seatingposition only.

SAFE

TY

130

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that arefound at the rear of the seat cushion where itmeets the seatback, below the anchoragesymbols on the seatback. They are just visiblewhen you lean into the rear seat to install thechild restraint. You will easily feel them if yourun your finger along the gap between theseatback and seat cushion.

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind eachrear seating position located on the back of theseat. To access them, pull the carpeted floorpanel away from the seat back, this will exposethe top tether strap anchorages.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systemswill be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexiblestrap on each side. Each will have a hook orconnector to attach to the lower anchorageand a way to tighten the connection to the

anchorage. Forward-facing child restraintsand some rear-facing child restraints will alsobe equipped with a tether strap. The tetherstrap will have a hook at the end to attach tothe top tether anchorage and a way to tightenthe strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

WARNING!

• Do not install a child restraint in thecenter position using the LATCH system.This position is not approved for install-ing child seats using the LATCH attach-ments. You must use the seat belt andtether anchor to install a child seat in thecenter seating position.

• Never use the same lower anchorage toattach more than one child restraint.Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typicalinstallation instructions.LATCH Anchorages

Tether Strap Anchorages

131

Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether

For rear-facing child restraints secured in thecenter seat position with the vehicle seatbelts, the rear center seat position has anarmrest tether that secures the arm rest inthe upward position.

1. To access the center seat arm rest tether,first lower the arm rest. The tether islocated behind the armrest and hookedonto the plastic seat backing.

2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it fromthe plastic seat backing.

3. Raise the armrest and attach the tetherhook to the strap located on the front ofthe arm rest.

Always follow the directions of the child re-straint manufacturer when installing yourchild restraint. Not all child restraint systemswill be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switch-able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seatbelt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-tions below. See the section “Installing ChildRestraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” tocheck what type of seat belt each seatingposition has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower strapsand on the tether strap of the child seat sothat you can more easily attach the hooksor connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the loweranchorages for that seating position. Forsome second row seats, you may need torecline the seat and / or raise the headrestraint to get a better fit. If the rear seatcan be moved forward and rearward in thevehicle, you may wish to move it to itsrear-most position to make room for thechild seat. You may also move the frontseat forward to allow more room for thechild seat.

Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether

Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether

SAFE

TY

132

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors ofthe child restraint to the lower anchoragesin the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,connect it to the top tether anchorage.See the section “Installing Child Re-straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”for directions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push thechild restraint rearward and downwardinto the seat. Remove slack in the strapsaccording to the child restraint manufac-turer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installedtightly by pulling back and forth on thechild seat at the belt path. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in anydirection.

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR(ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system toinstall a child restraint, stow all ALR seatbelts that are not being used by other occu-pants or being used to secure child restraints.An unused belt could injure a child if theyplay with it and accidentally lock the seat beltretractor. Before installing a child restraintusing the LATCH system, buckle the seat beltbehind the child restraint and out of thechild’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-feres with the child restraint installation, in-stead of buckling it behind the child re-straint, route the seat belt through the childrestraint belt path and then buckle it. Do notlock the seat belt. Remind all children in thevehicle that the seat belts are not toys andthat they should not play with them.

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraintto the LATCH anchorages can lead tofailure of the restraint. The child couldbe badly injured or killed. Follow thechild restraint manufacturer’s directionsexactly when installing an infant or childrestraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designedto withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly-fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-ing other items or equipment to the ve-hicle.

133

Installing Child Restraints Using The VehicleSeat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to prop-erly secure a child restraint can lead tofailure of the restraint. The child couldbe badly injured or killed.

• Follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s directions exactly when installing aninfant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is de-signed to keep the lap portion of the seat belttight around the child restraint so that it isnot necessary to use a locking clip. The ALRretractor can be “switched” into a lockedmode by pulling all of the webbing out of theretractor and then letting the webbing retractback into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALRwill make a clicking noise while the webbingis pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the“Automatic Locking Mode” description in“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”for additional information on ALR.

Please see the table below and the followingsections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For InstallingChild Restraints In This Vehicle

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat BeltsWhat is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the

child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with theseat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child RestraintAlways use the tether anchor when using the seat

belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up tothe recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back ofthe front passenger seat? Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and thechild restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manu-

facturer also allows contact.

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)Locations

ALR = Switchable Automatic LockingRetractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

SAFE

TY

134

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraint may be removed in the centerseating position only.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seatbelt against the belt path of the child restraint? No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position

with an ALR retractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch-able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lapbelt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to prop-erly secure a child restraint can lead tofailure of the restraint. The child couldbe badly injured or killed.

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections exactly when installing an in-fant or child restraint.

1. Place the child seat in the center of theseating position. For some second rowseats, you may need to recline the seatand/or raise the head restraint to get abetter fit. If the rear seat can be movedforward and rearward in the vehicle, youmay wish to move it to its rear-most posi-tion to make room for the child seat. Youmay also move the front seat forward toallow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing fromthe retractor to pass it through the beltpath of the child restraint. Do not twist thebelt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle untilyou hear a “click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lapportion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on theshoulder part of the belt until you havepulled all the seat belt webbing out of theretractor. Then, allow the webbing to re-tract back into the retractor. As the web-bing retracts, you will hear a clickingsound. This means the seat belt is now inthe Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.If it is locked, you should not be able topull out any webbing. If the retractor is notlocked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing totighten the lap portion around the childrestraint while you push the child restraintrearward and downward into the vehicleseat.

135

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strapand the seating position has a top tetheranchorage, connect the tether strap to theanchorage and tighten the tether strap.See the section “Installing Child Re-straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”for directions to attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installedtightly by pulling back and forth on thechild seat at the belt path. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in anydirection.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, socheck the belt occasionally, and pull it tight ifnecessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The TopTether Anchorage:

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front ofthe car seat, including the seat frame or atether anchorage. Only attach the tetherstrap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether

WARNING!anchorage that is approved for that seatingposition, located behind the top of thevehicle seat. See the section “Lower An-chors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)Restraint System” for the location of ap-proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

1. Look behind the seating position whereyou plan to install the child restraint tofind the tether anchorage. You may needto move the seat forward to provide betteraccess to the tether anchorage. If there isno top tether anchorage for that seatingposition, move the child restraint to an-other position in the vehicle if one isavailable.

2. To access the top tether strap anchoragesbehind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floorpanel away from the seat back, this willexpose the top tether strap anchorages.

3. Route the tether strap to provide the mostdirect path for the strap between the an-chor and the child seat. If your vehicle isequipped with adjustable rear head re-straints, raise the head restraint, andwhere possible, route the tether strap un-der the head restraint and between thetwo posts. If not possible, lower the headrestraint and pass the tether strap aroundthe outboard side of the head restraint.

Top Tether Strap Anchorage(Located On Seatback)

SAFE

TY

136

4. For the center seating position, route thetether strap over the seatback and head-rest then attach the hook to the tetheranchor located on the back of the seat.

5. Attach the tether strap hook of the childrestraint to the top tether anchorage asshown in the diagram.

6. Remove slack in the tether strap accord-ing to the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

WARNING!

• The top tether anchorages are not visibleuntil the gap panel is folded down. Donot use the visible cargo tie down hooks,located on the floor behind the seats, toattach a child restraint tether anchor.

• An incorrectly anchored tether strapcould lead to increased head motion andpossible injury to the child. Use only theanchorage position directly behind thechild seat to secure a child restraint toptether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a splitrear seat, make sure the tether strapdoes not slip into the opening betweenthe seatbacks as you remove slack in thestrap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat couldharm your pet. An unrestrained pet will bethrown about and possibly injured, or injure apassenger during panic braking or in a colli-sion.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat inpet harnesses or pet carriers that are securedby seat belts.

SAFETY TIPSTransporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THECARGO AREA.

WARNING!


• It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

Top Tether Strap Mounting

137

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con-tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is col-orless and odorless. Breathing it can makeyou unconscious and can eventually poi-son you. To avoid breathing (CO), followthese safety tips:• Do not run the engine in a closed garage

or in confined areas any longer thanneeded to move your vehicle in or out ofthe area.

• If you are required to drive with thetrunk/liftgate/rear doors open, makesure that all windows are closed and theclimate control BLOWER switch is set athigh speed. DO NOT use the recircula-tion mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parkedvehicle with the engine running, adjustyour heating or cooling controls to forceoutside air into the vehicle. Set theblower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxideentry into the vehicle body is a properlymaintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound ofthe exhaust system, when exhaust fumes canbe detected inside the vehicle, or when theunderside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,have a competent mechanic inspect the com-plete exhaust system and adjacent body ar-eas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, ormispositioned parts. Open seams or looseconnections could permit exhaust fumes toseep into the passenger compartment. Inaddition, inspect the exhaust system eachtime the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oilchange. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make InsideThe Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically,checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Dam-aged parts must be replaced immediately. Donot disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replacedafter a collision. Rear seat belt assembliesmust be replaced after a collision if they havebeen damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-bing, etc.). If there is any question regardingseat belt or retractor condition, replace theseat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light will turn on forfour to eight seconds as a bulb check whenthe ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.If the light is either not on during starting,stays on, or turns on while driving, have thesystem inspected at your authorized dealer assoon as possible. After the bulb check, thislight will illuminate with a single chime whena fault with the Air Bag System has beendetected. It will stay on until the fault iscleared. If the light comes on intermittentlyor remains on while driving, have your autho-rized dealer service the vehicle immediately.Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in“Safety” for further information.

SAFE

TY

138

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrostmode and place the blower control on highspeed. You should be able to feel the airdirected against the windshield. See yourauthorized dealer for service if your defrosteris inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit yourvehicle. Only use a floor mat that does notinterfere with the operation of the accelera-tor, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floormat that is securely attached using the floormat fasteners so it cannot slip out of positionand interfere with the accelerator, brake orclutch pedals or impair safe operation of yourvehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded,or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor matfasteners may cause your floor mat to in-terfere with the accelerator, brake, or

WARNING!clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehiclecontrol. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY orDEATH:• ALWAYS securely attach your floor

mat using the floor mat fasteners. DONOT install your floor mat upside downor turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull toconfirm mat is secured using the floormat fasteners on a regular basis.

• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTINGFLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLEbefore installing any other floor mat.NEVER install or stack an additionalfloor mat on top of an existing floor mat.

• ONLY install floor mats designed to fityour vehicle. NEVER install a floor matthat cannot be properly attached andsecured to your vehicle. If a floor matneeds to be replaced, only use a FCAapproved floor mat for the specificmake, model, and year of your vehicle.

• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat onthe driver’s side floor area. To check forinterference, with the vehicle properlyparked with the engine off, fully depress

WARNING!the accelerator, the brake, and theclutch pedal (if present) to check forinterference. If your floor mat interfereswith the operation of any pedal, or is notsecure to the floor, remove the floor matfrom the vehicle and place the floor matin your trunk.

• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor maton the passenger’s side floor area.

• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall orslide into the driver’s side floor areawhen the vehicle is moving. Objects canbecome trapped under accelerator,brake, or clutch pedals and could causea loss of vehicle control.

• NEVER place any objects under the floormat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob-jects could change the position of thefloor mat and may cause interferencewith the accelerator, brake, or clutchpedals.

• If the vehicle carpet has been removedand re-installed, always properly attachcarpet to the floor and check the floormat fasteners are secure to the vehicle

139

WARNING!carpet. Fully depress each pedal tocheck for interference with the accelera-tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.

• It is recommended to only use mild soapand water to clean your floor mats. Aftercleaning, always check your floor mathas been properly installed and is se-cured to your vehicle using the floor matfasteners by lightly pulling mat.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should MakeOutside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear anduneven wear patterns. Check for stones,nails, glass, or other objects lodged in thetread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cutsand cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts fortightness. Check the tires (including spare)for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brakelights and exterior lights while you work thecontrols. Check turn signal and high beamindicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under the vehicle after overnightparking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluidleaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected orif fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. Thecause should be located and correctedimmediately.

WARNING!

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATHwhen using “Track-Use” parts and equip-ment:• NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment

on public roads. FCA US LLC does notauthorize the use of “Track-Use” equip-ment on public roads.

WARNING!• The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is

for race vehicles on race tracks. To helpensure the safety of the race driver,engineers should supervise the installa-tion of “Track-Use” parts.

• FCA US LLC does not authorize theinstallation or use of any part noted as“Track-Use” on any new vehicle prior toits first retail sale.

WARNING!

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:• ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equip-

ment before driving on public roads.• ALWAYS properly use your three-point

seat belts when driving on public roads.• In a collision, you and your passengers

can suffer much greater injuries if youare not properly buckled up. You canstrike the interior of your vehicle or otherpassengers, or you can be thrown out ofthe vehicle.

SAFE

TY

140


STARTING THE ENGINE —GAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . .143Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

STARTING THE ENGINE —3.0L DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . .144Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . .145Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

STOP/START SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146Possible Reasons The Engine Does NotAutostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147To Start The Engine While In AutostopMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147To Manually Turn Off The Stop/StartSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148To Manually Turn On The Stop/StartSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . .148

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . .148Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . .150Brake/Transmission Shift InterlockSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . .150Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . .151

SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . .153

FOUR WHEEL DRIVEOPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . . .153Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . . .153Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . .155Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped . .157

QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED . . .157Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . .160Instrument Cluster Display Messages . .160Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

SELEC-TERRAIN —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162Selec-Terrain Mode Selection . . . . . . .162Instrument Cluster Display Messages . .163

SELEC-TRACK — IF EQUIPPED(SRT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163Active Damping System . . . . . . . . . .164Launch Control — If Equipped . . . . . .164Guidelines For Track Use . . . . . . . . .165

SPEED CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . .167Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167Setting A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . .168Varying The Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .168Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169Accelerating For Passing . . . . . . . . .169Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL(ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170Setting A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . .170


141

Varying The Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .170To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172Setting The Following Distance . . . . . .172ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . .172Changing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .174

PARKSENSE REAR PARKASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . .174Activation/Deactivation ParkSense . . . .174Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . .175ParkSense System Usage Precautions. .175

PARKSENSE FRONT ANDREAR PARK ASSIST . . . . . . . . . .176ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . .176Activation/Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . .177Engagement/Disengagement . . . . . . .177Operation With A Trailer . . . . . . . . . .177General Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSISTSYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .177

LANESENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .179Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . .179

PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UPCAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180Symbols And Messages On TheDisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

REFUELING THE VEHICLE —GASOLINE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . .180Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . .182

REFUELING THE VEHICLE —DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . .183Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel . . . . .184Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel . . . .185Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .185

TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . .188Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum TrailerWeight Ratings) — Non SRT . . . . . . .188

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum TrailerWeight Ratings) — Diesel . . . . . . . . .189Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum TrailerWeight Ratings) — SRT . . . . . . . . . .190Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal(Summit Models) — If Equipped. . . . .191Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal(SRT Models) — If Equipped . . . . . . .192

RECREATIONAL TOWING(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . .194Towing This Vehicle Behind AnotherVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Recreational Towing-Two Wheel DriveModels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-WheelDrive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195Recreational Towing — Quadra–TracII/Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel DriveModels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

142

STARTING THE ENGINE —GASBefore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fastenyour seat belt, and if present, instruct allother occupants to buckle their seat belts.

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always come toa complete stop, then shift the auto-matic transmission into PARK and applythe parking brake. Always make sure thekeyless ignition node is in the OFFmode, remove the key fob from the ve-hicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Leaving children in a vehicle unattendedis dangerous for a number of reasons. Achild or others could be seriously orfatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to

WARNING!children, and do not leave the ignition ofa vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Achild could operate power windows,other controls, or move the vehicle.


Automatic Transmission

The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL orPARK position before you can start the en-gine. Apply the brakes before shifting intoany driving gear.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur ifthe following precautions are not ob-served:• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or

NEUTRAL into any forward gear whenthe engine is above idle speed.

CAUTION!• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle

has come to a complete stop.• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after

the vehicle has come to a complete stopand the engine is at idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sureyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

Normal Starting

To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK orNEUTRAL.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal whilepushing the ENGINE START/STOP buttononce.

3. The system takes over and attempts tostart the vehicle. If the vehicle fails tostart, the starter will disengage automati-cally after 10 seconds.

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of theengine prior to the engine starting, pushthe button again.

143

NOTE:Normal starting of either a cold or a warmengine is obtained without pumping or press-ing the accelerator pedal.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINESTART/STOP Button

1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then pushand release the ENGINE START/STOPbutton.

2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.

3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (withvehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the trans-mission will automatically select PARKand the engine will turn off, however theignition will remain in the ACC mode(NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a ve-hicle out of the PARK position, or it couldroll.

4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and thevehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h),pushing the START/STOP button once willturn the engine off. The ignition will remainin the ACC mode.

5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph(8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP but-ton must be held for two seconds (or threeshort pushes in a row) to turn the engineoff. The ignition will remain in the ACCmode (NOT the OFF mode) if the engine isturned off when the transmission is not inPARK.

NOTE:The system will automatically time out andthe ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is leftin the ACC or RUN (engine not running) modeand the transmission is in PARK.

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — WithDriver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK OrNEUTRAL Position)

The ENGINE START/STOP button operatessimilar to an ignition switch. It has threemodes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change theignition modes without starting the vehicleand use the accessories, follow these steps:

• Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode,

• Push the ENGINE START/STOP buttononce to place the ignition to the ACC mode(instrument cluster will display “ACC”),

• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button asecond time to place the ignition to theRUN mode (instrument cluster will display“ON/RUN”),

• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button athird time to return the ignition to the OFFmode (instrument cluster will display“OFF”).

STARTING THE ENGINE —3.0L DIESEL ENGINEBefore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,both inside and outside mirrors, and fastenyour seat belts.

The starter is allowed to crank for up to30-second intervals. Waiting a few minutesbetween such intervals will protect the starterfrom overheating.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

144

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always come toa complete stop, then shift the auto-matic transmission into PARK and applythe parking brake. Always make sure thekeyless ignition node is in the OFFmode, remove the key fob from the ve-hicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Leaving children in a vehicle unattendedis dangerous for a number of reasons. Achild or others could be seriously orfatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible tochildren, and do not leave the ignition ofa vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Achild could operate power windows,other controls, or move the vehicle.

WARNING!• Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interiorheat build-up may cause serious injuryor death.

NOTE:Engine start up in very low ambient tempera-ture could result in evident white smoke. Thiscondition will disappear as the engine warmsup.

CAUTION!

• The engine is allowed to crank as long as30 seconds. If the engine fails to startduring this period, please wait at leasttwo minutes for the starter to cool beforerepeating start procedure.

• If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light”remains on, DO NOT START engine be-fore you drain the water from the fuelfilters to avoid engine damage. Refer to“Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter”in “Servicing And Maintenance” in your

CAUTION!Diesel Supplement on www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html U.S. Resi-dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana-dian Residents) for further information.


Start the engine with the transmission gearselector in the PARK position. Apply thebrake before shifting to any driving range.

Normal Starting

Observe the instrument panel cluster lightswhen starting the engine.

NOTE:Normal starting of either a cold or a warmengine is obtained without pumping or press-ing the accelerator pedal

1. Always apply the parking brake.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal whilepushing the ENGINE START/STOP buttononce.

145




NOTE:A delay of the start of up to five seconds ispossible under very cold conditions. The"Wait to Start" telltale will be illuminatedduring the pre-heat process, When theengine Wait To Start light goes off theengine will automatically crank.

CAUTION!If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” re-mains on, DO NOT START engine beforeyou drain the water from the fuel filtersto avoid engine damage. Refer to “Drain-ing Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in “Ser-vicing And Maintenance” in your Die-sel Supplement at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents)or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi-dents) for further information.

3. The system will automatically engage thestarter to crank the engine. If the vehiclefails to start, the starter will disengageautomatically after 25 seconds.

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of theengine prior to the engine starting, pushthe button again.

5. Check that the oil pressure warning lighthas turned off.

6. Release the parking brake.

STOP/START SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPEDThe Stop/Start function is developed to re-duce fuel consumption. The system will stopthe engine automatically during a vehiclestop if the required conditions are met. Re-leasing the brake pedal or pressing the accel-erator pedal will automatically re-start theengine.

Automatic Mode

The Stop/Start feature is enabledafter every normal customer en-gine start. At that time, the sys-tem will go into STOP/STARTREADY and if all other condi-

tions are met, can go into a STOP/STARTAUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.

To Activate The Autostop Mode, The FollowingMust Occur:

• The system must be in STOP/STARTREADY state. A STOP/START READY mes-sage will be displayed in the instrumentcluster display within the Stop/Start sec-tion. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Get-ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” inyour Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi-dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (CanadianResidents) for further information.

• The vehicle must be completely stopped.

• The shifter must be in a forward gear andthe brake pedal depressed.

The engine will shut down, the tachometerwill move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating youare in Autostop. Customer settings will bemaintained upon return to an engine runningcondition.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

146







Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the “Start-ing And Operating” section located in yourOwner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further information.

Possible Reasons The Engine Does NotAutostop

Prior to engine shut down, the system willcheck many safety and comfort conditions tosee if they are fulfilled. Detailed informationabout the operation of the Stop/Start systemmay be viewed in the instrument cluster dis-play Stop/Start Screen. In the following situ-ations, the engine will not stop:

• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.

• Driver’s door is not closed.

• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.

• Battery charge is low.

• The vehicle is on a steep grade.

• Cabin heating or cooling is in process andan acceptable cabin temperature has notbeen achieved.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a highblower speed.

• HVAC set to MAX A/C.

• Engine has not reached normal operatingtemperature.

• The transmission is not in a forward gear.

• Hood is open.

• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.

• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficientpressure.

Other Factors Which Can Inhibit AutostopInclude:

• Accelerator pedal input.

• Engine temp too high.

• 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previ-ous AUTOSTOP.

• Steering angle beyond threshold.

• ACC is on and speed is set.

It may be possible for the vehicle to be drivenseveral times without the STOP/START sys-tem going into a STOP/START READY stateunder more extreme conditions of the itemslisted above.

To Start The Engine While In AutostopMode

While in a forward gear, the engine will startwhen the brake pedal is released or thethrottle pedal is depressed. The transmissionwill automatically re-engage upon engine re-start.

Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To StartAutomatically While In Autostop Mode:

• The transmission selector is moved out ofDRIVE.

• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.

• HVAC system temperature or fan speed ismanually adjusted.

• Battery voltage drops too low.

• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brakepedal applications).

• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.

• A STOP/START system error occurs.

• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode.

147




To Manually Turn Off The Stop/StartSystem

1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (locatedon the switch bank). The light on the switchwill illuminate.

2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will ap-pear in instrument cluster display withinthe Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instru-ment Cluster” in “Getting To Know

Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’sManual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi-dents) for further information.

3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning offthe STOP/START system), the engine willnot be stopped.

4. The STOP/START system will reset itselfback to an ON condition every time theignition is turned off and back on.

To Manually Turn On The Stop/StartSystem

Push the STOP/START Off switch (located onthe switch bank). The light on the switch willturn off.

For complete details on the Stop/StartSystem refer to the “Stop/Start System”in the “Starting And Operating” sectionlocated in your Owners Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

System Malfunction

If there is a malfunction in the STOP/STARTsystem, the system will not shut down theengine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”message will appear in the instrument clusterdisplay. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-play“ in “Getting to Know Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”message appears in the instrument clusterdisplay, have the system checked by yourauthorized dealer.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substi-tute for the parking brake. Always applythe parking brake fully when exiting thevehicle to guard against vehicle move-ment and possible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure youand others if it is not in PARK. Checkby trying to move the transmission gearselector out of PARK with the brake

STOP/START Off Switch

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

148






WARNING!pedal released. Make sure the transmis-sion is in PARK before exiting the ve-hicle.

• The transmission may not engage PARKif the vehicle is moving. Always bring thevehicle to a complete stop before shift-ing to PARK, and verify that the trans-mission gear position indicator solidlyindicates PARK (P) without blinking.Ensure that the vehicle is completelystopped, and the PARK position is prop-erly indicated, before exiting the ve-hicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehiclecould accelerate quickly forward or inreverse. You could lose control of thevehicle and hit someone or something.Only shift into gear when the engine isidling normally and your foot is firmlypressing the brake pedal.

WARNING!• Unintended movement of a vehicle

could injure those in or near the vehicle.As with all vehicles, you should neverexit a vehicle while the engine is run-ning. Before exiting a vehicle, alwayscome to a complete stop, then apply theparking brake, shift the transmissioninto PARK, and turn the ignition OFF.When the ignition is in the OFF mode,the transmission is locked in PARK, se-curing the vehicle against unwantedmovement.

• When exiting the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-attended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could be seri-ously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parkingbrake, brake pedal or the transmissiongear selector.

WARNING!• Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle (or in a location accessible tochildren), and do not leave the ignitionin the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A childcould operate power windows, othercontrols, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur ifthe following precautions are not ob-served:• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE

only after the vehicle has come to acomplete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine isabove idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sureyour foot is firmly pressing the brakepedal.

NOTE:You must press and hold the brake pedalwhile shifting out of PARK.

149

Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition ParkInterlock which requires the transmission tobe in PARK before the ignition can be turnedto the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoidinadvertently leaving the vehicle withoutplacing the transmission in PARK. This sys-tem also locks the transmission in PARKwhenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.

NOTE:The transmission is NOT locked in PARK whenthe ignition is in the ACC mode (even thoughthe engine will be off). Ensure that the trans-mission is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF(not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans-mission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) thatholds the transmission gear selector in PARKunless the brakes are applied. To shift thetransmission out of PARK, the engine mustbe running and the brake pedal must bepressed. The brake pedal must also bepressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE orREVERSE when the vehicle is stopped ormoving at low speeds.

Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode

The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improvethe vehicle's overall fuel economy during nor-mal driving conditions. Push the “ECO”switch in the center stack of the instrumentpanel to activate or disable ECO mode. Alight on the switch indicates when ECO modeis disabled (for regular models) or enabled(for SRT models).

When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is en-gaged, the vehicle control systems willchange the following:

• The transmission will upshift sooner anddownshift later.

• The overall driving performance will bemore conservative.

• Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspensionwill operate in "Aero" mode over a broaderspeed range. Refer to the section onQuadra-Lift for further information.

• In SRT models, the transmission willlaunch (from a stop) in second gear, andthe torque converter clutch may engage atlower engine speeds and remain on longer.

• Some ECO mode functions may be tempo-rarily inhibited based on temperature andother factors.

Active Noise Cancellation — If Equipped

Your vehicle is equipped with an Active NoiseCancellation System. This system uses fourmicrophones embedded in the headliner todetect undesirable exhaust noise, whichsometimes occurs when operating in ECO

ECO Switch

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

150

mode. An onboard frequency generator cre-ates counteracting sound waves through theaudio system to help keep the vehicle quiet.

Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission

Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel efficient8 speed transmission. The gear selector islocated in the center console.

The transmission gear selector providesPARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE andMANUAL or SPORT (AutoStick) shift posi-tions. Manual shifts can be made using theAutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear se-lector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in theMANUAL or SPORT (AutoStick) position (be-side the DRIVE position), or tapping the shiftpaddles (+/-), if equipped, will manually se-lect the transmission gear, and will displaythe current gear in the instrument cluster.Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for furtherinformation.

NOTE:If the gear selector cannot be moved to thePARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position(when pushed forward), it is probably in theAutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVEposition). In AutoStick mode, the transmis-sion gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in theinstrument cluster. Move the gear selector tothe right (into the DRIVE [D] position) foraccess to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

AutoStick

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmissionfeature providing manual shift control, givingyou more control of the vehicle. AutoStickallows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,and improve overall vehicle performance.This system can also provide you with morecontrol during passing, city driving, cold slip-pery conditions, mountain driving, trailertowing, and many other situations.

Operation

To activate AutoStick mode, move the gearselector into the MANUAL (M) or SPORT (S)position (beside the DRIVE position), or tapone of the shift paddles on the steering wheel(if equipped). Tapping the (-) shift paddle

Transmission Gear Selector

1 — Lock Button2 — Transmission Gear Selector

Shift Paddles

151

(if equipped) to enter AutoStick mode willdownshift the transmission to the next lowergear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStickmode will retain the current gear. The currenttransmission gear will be displayed in theinstrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, youcan use the gear selector (in the MANUAL orSPORT position), or the shift paddles (ifequipped), to manually shift the transmis-sion. Tapping the gear selector forward (-)while in the MANUAL (M) or SPORT (S)position, or tapping the (-) shift paddle (ifequipped), will downshift the transmission tothe next lower gear. Tapping the selectorrearward (+) (or tapping the (+) shift paddle,if equipped) will command an upshift.

NOTE:The shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect Per-sonal Settings or, in SRT models, using DriveModes.

In AutoStick mode, the transmission willshift up or down when (+/-) is manually se-lected by the driver (using the gear selector,or the shift paddles, if equipped), unless an

engine lugging or overspeed condition wouldresult. It will remain in the selected gear untilanother upshift or downshift is chosen, ex-cept as described below.

• The transmission will automatically down-shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent enginelugging) and will display the current gear.

• The transmission will automatically down-shift to first gear when coming to a stop.After a stop, the driver should manuallyupshift (+) the transmission as the vehicleis accelerated.

• You can start out, from a stop, in first orsecond gear (or third gear, in 4LO range,Snow mode, or Sand mode). Tapping (+)(at a stop) will allow starting in second gear.Starting out in second or third gear can behelpful in snowy or icy conditions.

• If a requested downshift would cause theengine to over-speed, that shift will notoccur.

• The system will ignore attempts to upshiftat too low of a vehicle speed.

• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (ifequipped), or holding the gear selector inthe (-) position, will downshift the trans-mission to the lowest gear possible at thecurrent speed.

• Transmission shifting will be more notice-able when AutoStick is enabled.

• The system may revert to automatic shiftmode if a fault or overheat condition isdetected.

NOTE:When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control isenabled, AutoStick is not active.

To disengage AutoStick, return the gear se-lector to the DRIVE position, or press andhold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, andthe gear selector is already in DRIVE) until"D" is once again indicated in the instrumentcluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick atany time without taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

152

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional enginebraking on a slippery surface. The drivewheels could lose their grip and the ve-hicle could skid, causing a collision orpersonal injury.

SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Modefeature. This mode is a configuration set upfor typical enthusiast driving. The engine,transmission, and steering systems are all setto their SPORT settings. Sport Mode willprovide improved throttle response and modi-fied shifting for an enhanced driving experi-ence, as well the greatest amount of steeringfeel. This mode may be activated and deac-tivated by pushing the Sport button on theinstrument panel switch bank.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVEOPERATIONQuadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped

The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI rangeonly) transfer case, which provides convenientfull-time four-wheel drive. No driver interactionis required. The Brake Traction Control (BTC)System, which combines standard ABS andTraction Control, provides resistance to anywheel that is slipping to allow additional torquetransfer to wheels with traction.

NOTE:The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriatefor conditions where 4WD LOW range is rec-ommended. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips”in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-mation.

Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped

The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully au-tomatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTOmode. The Quadra-Trac II transfer case pro-vides three mode positions:

• 4WD HI

• NEUTRAL

• 4WD LOW

This transfer case is fully automatic in the4WD HI mode.

When additional traction is required, the4WD LOW position can be used to lock thefront and rear driveshafts together and forcethe front and rear wheels to rotate at the samespeed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for

Sport Mode Button

153

loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving inthe 4WD LOW position on dry, hard-surfacedroads may cause increased tire wear anddamage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW,the engine speed is approximately threetimes that of the 4WD HI position at a givenroad speed. Take care not to overspeed theengine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehiclesdepends on tires of equal size, type, andcircumference on each wheel. Any differencewill adversely affect shifting and cause dam-age to the transfer case.

Because four-wheel drive provides improvedtraction, there is a tendency to exceed safeturning and stopping speeds. Do not go fasterthan road conditions permit.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed ifyou leave the vehicle unattended with thetransfer case in the NEUTRAL position

WARNING!without first fully engaging the parkingbrake. The transfer case NEUTRAL posi-tion disengages both the front and reardrive shafts from the powertrain and willallow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-mission is in PARK. The parking brakeshould always be applied when the driveris not in the vehicle.

Shift Positions

For additional information on the appropriateuse of each 4WD system mode position, seethe information below:

4WD AUTO

This range is used on surfaces such as ice,snow, gravel, sand, and dry hard pavement.

NOTE:Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” fur-ther on in this section for further informationon the various positions and their intendedusages.

NEUTRAL

This range disengages the driveline from thepowertrain. It is to be used for flat towingbehind another vehicle. Refer to “Recre-ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”for further information.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed ifyou leave the vehicle unattended with thetransfer case in the NEUTRAL positionwithout first fully engaging the parkingbrake. The transfer case NEUTRAL posi-tion disengages both the front and reardrive shafts from the powertrain and willallow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-mission is in PARK. The parking brakeshould always be applied when the driveris not in the vehicle.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

154

4WD LOW

This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. Itprovides an additional gear reduction whichallows for increased torque to be delivered toboth the front and rear wheels while providingmaximum pulling power for loose, slipperyroad surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph(40 km/h).

NOTE:Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” forfurther information on the various positionsand their intended usages.

Shifting Procedures

4WD HI To 4WD LOW

With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion or the engine running, shift the transmis-sion into “N”, and push the “4WD LOW”button once on the transfer case switch. The“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrumentcluster will begin to flash and remain on solidwhen the shift is complete.

NOTE:If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or atransfer case motor temperature protectioncondition exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in “N” Press4 Low” message will flash from the instru-ment cluster display. Refer to “InstrumentCluster Display” in “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

4WD LOW To 4WD HI

With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion or the engine running, shift the trans-

mission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WDLOW” button once on the transfer caseswitch. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in theinstrument cluster will flash and go out whenthe shift is complete.

NOTE:

• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, ora transfer case motor temperature protec-tion condition exists, a “For 4x4 High SlowBelow 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in N push4 Low” message will flash from the instru-ment cluster display. Refer to “InstrumentCluster Display” in “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possiblewith the vehicle completely stopped; how-ever, difficulty may occur due to the matingclutch teeth not being properly aligned.Several attempts may be required forclutch teeth alignment and shift comple-tion to occur. The preferred method is withthe vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h).If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph(5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow theshift.

Transfer Case Switch

155

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed ifyou leave the vehicle unattended with thetransfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) positionwithout first fully engaging the parkingbrake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disen-gages both the front and rear drive shaftsfrom the powertrain and will allow thevehicle to roll, even if the transmission isin PARK. The parking brake should alwaysbe applied when the driver is not in thevehicle.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, withthe engine running.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift airsuspension, ensure the vehicle is set toNormal Ride Height.

5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,push and hold the recessed transfer caseNEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se-lector switch) for four seconds. The lightbehind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol willblink, indicating shift in progress. Thelight will stop blinking (stay on solid)when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is com-plete. A “NEUTRAL” message will appearin the instrument cluster display. Refer to“Instrument Cluster Display” in “GettingTo Know Your Instrument Panel” for fur-ther information.

6. After the shift is completed and the NEU-TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEU-TRAL (N) button.

7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

8. Release the brake pedal for five secondsand ensure that there is no vehiclemovement.

9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift thetransmission back into NEUTRAL.

10. Firmly apply the parking brake.

11. With the transmission and transfer casein NEUTRAL, push and hold the EN-GINE START/STOP button until the en-gine turns off.

12. Place the transmission gear selector inPARK. Release the brake pedal.

13. Push the ENGINE STOP/START buttontwice (without pressing the brake pedal),to turn the ignition to the OFF mode.

14. Release the parking brake only when thevehicle is securely attached to a towvehicle.NEUTRAL (N) Switch

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

156

NOTE:If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a“To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral ShiftProcedure in Owner’s Manual” message willflash from the instrument cluster display.Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare yourvehicle for normal usage.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.





6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,push and hold the recessed transfer caseNEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se-lector switch) for one second.

7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator lightturns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.

8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has beenreleased, the transfer case will shift to theposition indicated by the selector switch.

Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped

The optional Quadra-Drive II System featurestwo torque transfer couplings. The couplingsinclude an Electronic Limited-Slip Differen-tial (ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac IItransfer case. The optional ELSD axle is fullyautomatic and requires no driver input tooperate. Under normal driving conditions,

the unit functions as a standard axle, balanc-ing torque evenly between left and rightwheels. With a traction difference betweenleft and right wheels, the coupling will sensea speed difference. As one wheel begins tospin faster than the other, torque will auto-matically transfer from the wheel that hasless traction, to the wheel that has traction.While the transfer case and axle couplingdiffer in design, their operation is similar.Follow the Quadra-Trac II transfer case shift-ing information, preceding this section, forshifting this system.

QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPEDDescription

The Quadra-Lift air suspension system pro-vides full time load leveling capability alongwith the benefit of vehicle height adjustmentby the push of a button. The vehicle willautomatically raise and lower the ride heightto adapt to the appropriate driving condi-tions. At higher speeds, the vehicle will lowerto an aerodynamic ride height and when op-erating in off-road modes, the vehicle willraise the ride height accordingly. The buttons

NEUTRAL (N) Switch

157

near the terrain switch in the center consolearea can be used to set preferred ride heightto match the appropriate conditions.

• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the stan-dard position of the suspension and ismeant for normal driving.

• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approxi-mately 1.1 inches (28 mm) – This is theprimary position for all off-road driving untilOR2 is needed. A smoother and more com-fortable ride will result. Push the “UP” but-ton once from the NRH position while thevehicle speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h).When in the OR1 position, if the vehiclespeed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h)and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will beautomatically lowered to NRH. Refer to“Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” inthe Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi-dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (CanadianResidents) for further information.

• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approxi-mately 2.2 inches (55 mm) – This position isintended for off-roading use only wheremaximum ground clearance is required.To enter OR2, push the “UP” button twicefrom the NRH position or once from the

OR1 position while vehicle speed is below20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if thevehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)the vehicle height will be automaticallylowered to OR1. Refer to “Driving Tips”in “Starting And Operating” in the Owner’sManual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi-dents) for further information.

• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately0.6 inches (15 mm) – This position providesimproved aerodynamics by lowering the ve-hicle. The vehicle will automatically enterAero Mode when the vehicle speed remainsbetween 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph(90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or ifthe vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph (90 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from AeroMode if the vehicle speed remains between20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h)for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehiclespeed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h). Thevehicle will enter Aero Mode, regardless ofvehicle speed if the vehicle is in “SPORT”mode.

Selec-Terrain Switch

1 — UP Button2 — DOWN Button3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp(Customer Selectable)4 — Normal Ride Height IndicatorLamp (Customer Selectable)5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp(Customer Selectable)6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp(Customer Selectable)

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

158







• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-mately 1.6 inches (40 mm) – This positionlowers the vehicle for easier passenger en-try and exit as well as lowering the rear ofthe vehicle for easier loading and unloadingof cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the“DOWN” button once from (NRH) while thevehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin tolower. If the vehicle speed remains between15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h)for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehiclespeed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) theEntry/Exit Mode change will be cancelled.To exit Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up”button once while in Entry/Exit Mode ordrive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h).

NOTE:Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit Mode can be enabled through theUconnect Touch-Screen Radio. If this featureis enabled, the vehicle will only lower if thegear selector is in "PARK", the terrain switchis in "AUTO", the transfer-case is in "AUTO”

and the vehicle level should be either inNormal or Aero Mode. The Vehicle will notautomatically lower if the air suspension levelis in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle isequipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM),the lowering will be suppressed when theignition is switched OFF and the door is opento prevent setting the alarm off.

The Selec-Terrain switch will automaticallychange the vehicle to the proper height basedon the position of the Selec-Terrain switch.The height can be changed from the defaultSelec-Terrain setting by normal use of the airsuspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain”in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-mation.

The system requires that the engine be run-ning for all changes. When lowering the ve-hicle all of the doors, including the liftgate,must be closed. If a door is opened at anytime while the vehicle is lowering the changewill not be completed until the open door(s) isclosed.

The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses alifting and lowering pattern which keeps theheadlights from incorrectly shining into on-coming traffic. When raising the vehicle, therear of the vehicle will move up first and thenthe front. When lowering the vehicle, thefront will move down first and then the rear.

After the engine is turned off, it may benoticed that the air suspension system oper-ates briefly, this is normal. The system iscorrecting the position of the vehicle to en-sure a proper appearance.

To assist with changing a spare tire, theQuadra-Lift air suspension system has a fea-ture which allows the automatic leveling to bedisabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in“Multimedia” for further information.

NOTE:If equipped with a touch screen radio allenabling/disabling of air suspension featuresmust be done through the radio. Refer to“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur-ther information.

159

WARNING!

The air suspension system uses a highpressure volume of air to operate the sys-tem. To avoid personal injury or damage tothe system, see your authorized dealer forservice.

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modesto protect the system in unique situations:

Tire/Jack Mode

To assist with changing a spare tire, the airsuspension system has a feature which allowsthe automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur-ther information.

NOTE:This mode is intended to be enabled withengine running.

Auto Entry/Exit Mode

To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle,the air suspension system has a feature whichautomatically lowers the vehicle to entry/exit

ride height. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in“Multimedia” for further information.


Transport Mode

To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspen-sion system has a feature which will put thevehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable theautomatic load leveling system. Refer to“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur-ther information.


Suspension Display Messages Mode

The “Suspension Display Messages” settingallows you to only display suspension warn-ings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-timedia” for further information.


Wheel Alignment Mode

Before performing a wheel alignment this modemust be enabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”in “Multimedia” for further information.


If equipped with a touch screen radio allenabling/disabling of air suspension featuresmust be done through the radio. Refer to“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur-ther information.

Instrument Cluster Display Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, amessage will appear in the instrument clus-ter. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

Operation

The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminateto show the current position of the vehicle.Flashing indicator lamps will show a positionwhich the system is working to achieve. Whenraising, if multiple indicator lamps are flashing

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

160

on the “Up” button, the highest flashing indi-cator lamp is the position the system is workingto achieve. When lowering, if multiple indica-tors are flashing on the "Up" button the lowestsolid indicator lamp is the position the systemis working to achieve.

Pushing the “UP” button once will move thesuspension one position higher from the cur-rent position, assuming all conditions aremet (i.e. engine running, speed below thresh-old, etc). The “UP” button can be pushedmultiple times, each push will raise the re-quested level by one position up to a maxi-mum position of OR2 or the highest positionallowed based on current conditions (i.e. ve-hicle speed, etc).

Pushing the “DOWN” button once will movethe suspension one position lower from thecurrent level, assuming all conditions are met(i.e. engine running, doors closed, speed be-low threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button canbe pressed multiple times. Each push willlower the requested level by one positiondown to a minimum of Park Mode or thelowest position allowed based on current con-ditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)

Automatic height changes will occur basedon vehicle speed and the current vehicleheight. The indicator lamps and instrumentcluster display messages will operate thesame for automatic changes and user re-quested changes.

• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5,and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicleis in OR2.

• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is inOR1.

• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicatorlamp 4 will be illuminated when the vehicleis in this position.

• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will beilluminated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit Mode. If Entry/Exit Mode is requestedwhile vehicle speed is between 15 mph(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicatorlamp 4 will remain on solid and indicatorlamp 3 will flash as the system waits for thevehicle to reduce speed. If vehicle speed isreduced to, and kept below, 15 mph(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off andindicator lamp 3 will flash until Entry/Exit

Mode is achieved at which point indicatorlamp 3 will go solid. If during the heightchange to Entry/Exit Mode, the vehiclespeed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), theheight change will be paused until thevehicle speed either goes below 15 mph(24 km/h) and the height change continuesto Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds 25 mph(40 km/h) and the vehicle height will returnto NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selectedwhile the vehicle is not moving providedthat the engine is still running and all doorsremain closed.

• Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will beilluminated. Customer driving will disableTransport Mode.

• Tire/Jack Mode - Indicator lamps 3 and6 will be illuminated. Customer driving willdisable Tire/Jack Mode.

• Wheel Alignment Mode - Indicator lamps3 and 4 will be illuminated. Customer driv-ing will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.

161

SELEC-TERRAIN — IFEQUIPPEDSelec-Terrain Mode SelectionSelec-Terrain combines the capabilities ofthe vehicle control systems, along with driverinput, to provide the best performance for allterrains.

Selec-Terrain consists of the following posi-tions:

• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability ininclement weather. Use on and off roadon loose traction surfaces such as snow.

When in Snow mode (depending on certainoperating conditions), the transmissionmay use second gear (rather than first gear)during launches, to minimize wheel slip-page. If equipped with air suspension, thedefault ride height for Snow is Normal RideHeight (NRH).

• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheeldrive operation can be used on and off road.Balances traction with seamless steeringfeel to provide improved handling and ac-celeration over two-wheel drive vehicles.If equipped with air suspension, the levelwill change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).

• Sand – Off road calibration for use on lowtraction surfaces such as sand or wet grass.Driveline is maximized for traction. Somebinding may be felt on less forgiving sur-faces. The electronic brake controls are setto limit traction control management ofthrottle and wheel spin. If equipped withair suspension, the default ride height forSand is Normal Ride Height (NRH).

• Mud – Off road calibration for use on lowtraction surfaces such as mud. Driveline ismaximized for traction. Some binding maybe felt on less forgiving surfaces. The elec-tronic brake controls are set to limit trac-tion control management of throttle andwheel spin. If equipped with air suspen-sion, the level will change to Off Road 1.

• Rock – Off road calibration only availablein 4WD Low range. The vehicle is raised (ifequipped with Air Suspension) for improvedground clearance. Traction based tuning withimproved steer-ability for use on high trac-tion off-road surfaces. Use for low speedobstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.If equipped with air suspension, the vehiclelevel will change to Off-Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain switch is in ROCK mode, and thetransfer case is switched from 4WD Low to4WD High, the Selec-Terrain system will re-turn to AUTO.

NOTE:Activate the Hill Descent Control or SelecSpeed Control for steep downhill control. See“Electronic Brake Control System” in thissection for further information.

Selec-Terrain Switch

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

162

Instrument Cluster Display Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, amessage will appear in the instrument clus-ter. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

SELEC-TRACK —IF EQUIPPED (SRT)Description

Selec-Track combines the capabilities of thevehicle control systems, along with driverinput, to provide the best performance for allterrains.

Rotate the Selec-Track knob to select thedesired mode.

Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multi-media” section in your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

Selec-Track consists of the following positions:

• Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration.Performance based tuning that provides arear wheel drive feel but with improvedhandling and acceleration over a two-wheeldrive vehicle. This feature will reset toAUTO on an ignition cycle.

• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability ininclement weather. Use on and off road onloose traction surfaces such as snow. Thisfeature will reset to AUTO upon an ignitioncycle.

• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheeldrive operation can be used on and off road.Balances traction with seamless steeringfeel to provide improved handling and ac-celeration over two-wheel drive vehicles.

• Track – Track road calibration for use onhigh traction surfaces. Driveline is maxi-mized for traction. Some binding may be

felt on less forgiving surfaces. This featurewill reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle.

• Tow – Use this mode for towing and haulingheavy loads. Vehicle suspension will go tosport mode. Trailer sway control is enabledin the ESC system. This feature will reset toAUTO upon an ignition cycle.

Custom

This mode allows the driver to create a cus-tom vehicle configuration that is saved forquick selection of favorite settings. The sys-tem will return to AUTO mode when theignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF toRUN, if this mode is selected. While in Cus-tom Mode the Stability, Transmission, Steer-ing, Suspension, all-wheel drive set up, andPaddle shifter settings may be configuredthrough the custom mode set-up.

NOTE:Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multi-media” section in your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.Selec-Track Switch

163





Active Damping System

This vehicle is equipped with an electroniccontrolled damping system. This system re-duces body roll and pitch in many drivingsituations including cornering, accelerationand braking. There are 3 modes:

• Street Mode (Available in terrain positionsAUTO, SNOW and CUSTOM.) — Used dur-ing highway speeds where a touring sus-pension feel is desired.

• Sport Mode (Available in terrain positionsAUTO, SPORT, CUSTOM and TOW.) — Pro-vides a firm suspension for better handling.

• Track Mode (Available in terrain positionsAUTO, TRACK and CUSTOM.) — Providesa full firm suspension for an aggressivetrack experience.

Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multi-media” section in your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

Launch Control — If Equipped

This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Con-trol system that is designed to allow the driverto achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in astraight line. Launch Control is a form oftraction control that manages tire slip whilelaunching the vehicle. This feature is in-tended for use during race events on a closedcourse where consistent quarter mile andzero to sixty times are desired. The system isnot intended to compensate for lack of driverexperience or familiarity with the race track.Use of this feature in low traction (cold, wet,gravel, etc.) conditions may results in excesswheel slip outside this systems control result-ing in an aborted launch.

Preconditions:

• Launch Control should not be used on pub-lic roads. Always check track conditionsand the surrounding area.

• Launch Control is not available within thefirst 500 miles (805 km) of engine break-in.

• Launch Control should only be used whenthe engine and transmission are at operat-ing temperature.

• Launch Control is intended to be used ondry, paved road surfaces only.

CAUTION!Use on slippery or loose surfaces maycause damage to vehicle components andis not recommended.

Launch Control is only available when thefollowing procedure is followed:

NOTE:Pushing the SRT button on the Select-Trackswitch or pressing the “Apps” button onthe touchscreen are the two options toaccess launch control features. Please refer to“SRT Drive Modes” in “Multimedia” in yourOwner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further information.1. Press the “Race Options” button on the

touchscreen or push the LAUNCH buttonon the Select-Track switch.

2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” buttonon the touchscreen. This screen will allowyou to adjust your launch RPM’s for opti-mum launch/traction.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

164






3. Press the “Activate Launch Control” but-ton on the touchscreen, follow instruc-tions in the instrument cluster display.

• Make sure the vehicle is not moving.

• Put vehicle in first gear.

• Steering wheel must be pointing straight.

• Vehicle must be on level ground.

• Apply Brake Pressure.

• While holding the brake, rapidly applythe accelerator pedal to wide openthrottle. The engine speed will hold atthe RPM that was set in the “LaunchRPM Set-up” screen.

NOTE:Messages will appear in the instrument clus-ter display to inform the driver if one or moreof the above conditions have not been met.

4. When the above conditions have beenmet, the instrument cluster display willread “Release Brake”.

5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.

Launch control will be active until the vehiclereaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which pointthe Electronic Stability Control (ESC) systemwill return to its current ESC mode.

Launch control will abort before launchcompletion, display “Launch Aborted” in thecluster under any the following conditions:

• The accelerator pedal is released duringlaunch.

• The ESC system detects that the vehicle isno longer moving in a straight line.

• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to changethe system to another mode.

NOTE:After launch control has been aborted, ESCwill return to its current ESC mode.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to shift when the drivewheels are spinning and do not have trac-tion. Damage to the transmission may oc-cur.

Guidelines For Track Use

NOTE:Because of the extreme conditions encoun-tered during track use, any damage or wearassociated with track use may not be coveredby warranty.

• If your SRT vehicle is equipped with DriveModes they will alter the vehicle’s perfor-mance in various driving situations. It isrecommended that your vehicle operates inSPORT or TRACK modes during the trackevent.

• Prior to each track event/day, verify all flu-ids are at the correct levels. Refer to “FluidCapacities” in “Technical Specifications”for further information.

• Prior to each track event, verify the frontand rear brake pads have more than ½ padthickness remaining. If the brake padsrequire changing, please burnish prior totrack outing at full pace.

NOTE:Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested forextended track usage due to increased ther-mal capacity.

165

• At the conclusion of each track event, it isrecommended that a brake bleed proce-dure is performed to maintain the pedalfeel and stopping capability of your BremboHigh Performance brake system.

• It is recommended that each track outingshould end with a minimum of 1 cool downlap using minimal braking.

• If equipped with a removable lower frontfascia grille, it is recommended to remove itfor track use during warm/hot weather toimprove cooling airflow to critical pow-ertrain and cooling system components.

• All SRT vehicles are track tested for24 hours of endurance, however, it is rec-ommended that suspension system, brakesystem, prop shaft, and ½ shaft bootsshould be checked for wear or damage afterevery track event.

• Track usage results in increased operatingtemperatures of the engine, transmission,driveline and brake system. This may affectnoise (NVH) countermeasures designedinto your vehicle. New components mayneed to be installed to return the system tothe original NVH performance.

• Tire pressure:– 40 psi (276 kpa) hot, recommend

32 psi (221 kpa) front, 30 psi (207 kpa)rear cold

NOTE:It is recommended that you target 40 psi(276 kpa) Hot Tire Pressure at the conclusionof each track session. Starting at 32 psi(221 kpa) Front & 30 psi (207 kpa) RearCold and adjusting based on ambient & trackconditions is recommended. Tire pressurecan be monitored via the instrument clusterdisplay and can assist with adjustments.

Track burnishing your brakes:

To avoid “green lining fade” during track use,the brake pads and rotors must have a ther-mal burnish for factory installed componentsor when new brake friction components areinstalled:

1. Use one track session to burnish brakesby driving at 75% speed. Brake at ap-proximately 0.60-0.80g max without ABSintervention.

2. Lap the track in this manner until youstart smelling the brakes. Continue for

another ½ lap at speed, then do a two lapcool down with minimal brake applies.Make sure the brakes are not smoking.If they are, do another cool down lap.

3. Do not continue for more than 1 fullburnishing lap after you start smelling thebrakes. Do not get them smoking heavily.This will get them too hot and affect theirlife negatively in future track use.

4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the pad-dock for at least 30 min. If an infraredthermal gun is available, allow rotors tocool to 200°F (93.3°C) before going backout.

5. There should be a thin, ash layer wheninspecting the pads installed in the cali-per. Having the ash layer go more thanhalf the thickness of the pad materialindicates too aggressive of a burnish.

6. Sometimes, a second burnish session isrequired. If the pads start smelling in thenext track session, reduce speed andbraking decel to burnish targets and fol-low step 2-4.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

166

7. New pads installed on old rotors still needto be burnished. New rotors installed withold pads should be burnished at the trackor street driven for 300 city miles todevelop an adequate lining transfer layeron the rotor surface prior to track use.

8. Rotors that pulsate during track useshould be replaced. Resurfacing of therotors is not recommended, as it removesmass from the rotor, reducing its thermalcapacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotorcheek, making it less robust and increas-ing the likelihood of pulsation in furthertrack use.

SPEED CONTROLWhen engaged, the Speed Control takes overaccelerator operations at speeds greater than25 mph (40 km/h).

The Speed Control buttons are located on theright side of the steering wheel.

NOTE:In order to ensure proper operation, theSpeed Control System has been designed toshut down if multiple Speed Control func-tions are operated at the same time. If thisoccurs, the Speed Control System can bereactivated by pushing the Speed Controlon/off button and resetting the desired ve-hicle set speed.

Activation

Push the on/off button to activate the speedcontrol. CRUISE CONTROL READY will ap-pear on the instrument cluster display toindicate the speed control is on. To turn thesystem off, push the on/off button a secondtime. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear onthe instrument cluster display to indicate thespeed control is off. The system should beturned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on whennot in use is dangerous. You could acci-dentally set the system or cause it to go

Speed Control Switches

1 — Push Cancel2 — Push Set+/Accel3 — Push Resume4 — Push On/Off5 — Push Set-/Decel

167

WARNING!faster than you want. You could lose con-trol and have an accident. Always leave thesystem off when you are not using it.

Setting A Desired Speed

Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehiclehas reached the desired speed, push theSET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Re-lease the accelerator and the vehicle willoperate at the selected speed. Once a speedhas been set a message CRUISE CONTROLSET TO MPH (km/h) will appear indicatingwhat speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp,along with set speed will also appear and stayon in the instrument cluster display when thespeed is set.

Varying The SpeedOnce the Speed Control has been activated,the speed can be increased or decreased.

To Increase Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can in-crease speed by pushing the SET (+) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selectedthrough the instrument panel settings ifequipped. Refer to “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for more information.The speed increment shown is dependanton the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) orMetric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (+) button once will resultin a 1 mph increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in anincrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the setspeed will continue to increase until thebutton is released, then the new set speedwill be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (+) button once will resultin a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in anincrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the setspeed will continue to increase until thebutton is released, then the new set speedwill be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can de-crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selectedthrough the instrument panel settings ifequipped. Refer to “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for more information.The speed increment shown is dependanton the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) orMetric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will resultin a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in adecrease of 1 mph.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

168





• If the button is continually pushed, the setspeed will continue to decrease until thebutton is released, then the new set speedwill be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will resultin a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in adecrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the setspeed will continue to decrease until thebutton is released, then the new set speedwill be established.

Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push theRES button and release. Resume can be usedat any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

Accelerating For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally.When the pedal is released, the vehicle willreturn to the set speed.

Deactivation

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing theCANC button, or normal brake pressure whileslowing the vehicle will deactivate the SpeedControl without erasing the set speed frommemory.

Pushing the on/off button or turning the igni-tion switch OFF erases the set speed frommemory.

ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL (ACC)If your vehicle is equipped with AdaptiveCruise Control, the controls operate exactlythe same as the speed control with only acouple of differences. With this option youcan set a specified distance you would like tomaintain between you and the vehicle in frontof you. If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,

ACC will apply limited braking or accelerationautomatically to maintain a preset followingdistance, while matching the speed of thevehicle ahead.

Adaptive Cruise Switches

1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off2 — Distance Setting – Decrease3 — Distance Setting – Increase

169

If the sensor does not detect a vehicle aheadof you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.

Activation

Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) on/off button.

“ACC READY” will appear in the instrumentcluster display to indicate the ACC is on.

Setting A Desired Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) buttonand release. The instrument cluster displaywill show the set speed.

If the system is set when the vehicle speed isbelow 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shallbe defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If thesystem is set when the vehicle speed is above20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be thecurrent speed of the vehicle.

NOTE:ACC cannot be set if there is a stationaryvehicle in front of your vehicle in close prox-imity.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.If you do not, the vehicle may continue toaccelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:

• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” willappear in the instrument cluster display.

• The system will not be controlling the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicleahead. The vehicle speed will only be de-termined by the position of the acceleratorpedal.

Varying The Speed

Once the ACC has been activated, the speedcan be increased or decreased.

NOTE:

• When you override and push the SET (+)button or SET (-) buttons, the new setspeed will be the current speed of thevehicle.

• When you use the SET (-) button to decel-erate, if the engine’s braking power doesnot slow the vehicle sufficiently to reachthe set speed, the brake system will auto-matically slow the vehicle.

• The ACC system applies the brake down toa full stop when following a target vehicle.If an ACC host vehicle follows a targetvehicle to a standstill, the host vehiclewill release the vehicle brakes two secondsafter coming to a full stop.

• The ACC system maintains set speed whendriving up hill and down hill. However, aslight speed change on moderate hills isnormal. In addition, downshifting may occurwhile climbing uphill or descending down-hill. This is normal operation and necessaryto maintain set speed. When driving up hilland down hill, the ACC system will cancel ifthe braking temperature exceeds normalrange (overheated).

To Increase Speed

While ACC is set, you can increase the setspeed by pushing the SET (+) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selectedthrough the instrument panel settings ifequipped. Refer to “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

170



(Canadian Residents) for more information.The speed increment shown is dependant onthe speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h)units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (+) button once will resultin a 1 mph increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in anincrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the setspeed will continue to increase in 5 mphincrements until the button is released. Theincrease in set speed is reflected in theinstrument cluster display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (+) button once will resultin a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in anincrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the setspeed will continue to increase in 10 km/hincrements until the button is released. Theincrease in set speed is reflected in theinstrument cluster display.

To Decrease Speed

While ACC is set, the set speed can be de-creased by pushing the SET (-) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selectedthrough the instrument panel settings ifequipped. Refer to “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for more information.The speed increment shown is dependant onthe speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h)units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will resultin a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in adecrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the setspeed will continue to decrease in 5 mphdecrements until the button is released.The decrease in set speed is reflected in theinstrument cluster display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will resultin a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in adecrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the setspeed will continue to decrease in 10 km/hdecrements until the button is released.The decrease in set speed is reflected in theinstrument cluster display.

To ResumeIf there is a set speed in memory push the RES(resume) button and then remove your footfrom the accelerator pedal. The instrumentcluster display will show the last set speed.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longerthan two seconds, then the system willcancel and the brake force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the brakesto keep the vehicle at a standstill.

• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a station-ary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in closeproximity.

171



WARNING!

The Resume function should only be usedif traffic and road conditions permit. Re-suming a set speed that is too high or toolow for prevailing traffic and road condi-tions could cause the vehicle to accelerateor decelerate too sharply for safe opera-tion. Failure to follow these warnings canresult in a collision and death or seriouspersonal injury.

Deactivation

Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) on/off button a second time to turn thesystem off.

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off” will ap-pear in the instrument cluster display toindicate the ACC is off.

WARNING!

Leaving the ACC system on when not inuse is dangerous. You could accidentallyset the system or cause it to go faster than

WARNING!you want. You could lose control and havean accident. Always leave the system OFFwhen you are not using it.

Setting The Following Distance

The specified following distance for ACC canbe set by varying the distance setting be-tween four bars (longest), three bars (long),two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Usingthis distance setting and the vehicle speed,ACC calculates and sets the distance to thevehicle ahead. This distance setting appearsin the instrument cluster display.

• To increase the distance setting, push theDistance Setting—Increase button andrelease. Each time the button is pushed,the distance setting increases by one bar(longer).

• To decrease the distance setting, push theDistance Setting—Decrease button and re-lease. Each time the button is pushed, thedistance setting decreases by one bar(shorter).

ACC Operation At Stop

If the ACC system brings your vehicle to astandstill while following a target vehicle, ifthe target vehicle starts moving within twoseconds of your vehicle coming to a stand-still, your vehicle will resume motion withoutthe need for any driver action.

If the target vehicle does not start movingwithin two seconds of your vehicle coming toa standstill, the ACC with Stop system willcancel and the brakes will release. A cancelmessage will display on the instrument clus-ter display and produce a warning chime.Driver intervention will be required at thismoment.

While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicleat a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is un-buckled or the driver door is opened, the ACCwith Stop system will cancel and the brakeswill release. A cancel message will display onthe instrument cluster display and produce awarning chime. Driver intervention will berequired at this moment.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

172

WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, thedriver must ensure that there are no pedes-trians, vehicles or objects in the path ofthe vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-ings can result in a collision and death orserious personal injury.

Changing Modes

If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control modecan be turned off and the system can beoperated as a Normal (Fixed Speed) CruiseControl mode. When in the Normal (FixedSpeed) Cruise Control mode the distancesetting feature will be disabled and the sys-tem will maintain the speed you set.

• To change between the different cruise con-trol modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Con-trol (ACC) on/off button which turns theACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) CruiseControl off.

• Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) CruiseControl on/off button will result in turningon (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed)Cruise Control mode.

Refer to your Owner's Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

WARNING!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-nience system. It is not a substitute foractive driving involvement. It is always thedriver’s responsibility to be attentive ofroad, traffic, and weather conditions, ve-hicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;and, most importantly, brake operation toensure safe operation of the vehicle underall road conditions. Your complete atten-tion is always required while driving tomaintain safe control of your vehicle. Fail-ure to follow these warnings can result in acollision and death or serious personalinjury.The ACC system:• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming

vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g.,a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or adisabled vehicle).

WARNING!• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather

conditions into account, and may belimited upon adverse sight distance con-ditions.

• Does not always fully recognize complexdriving conditions, which can result inwrong or missing distance warnings.

• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stopwhile following a target vehicle and holdthe vehicle for 2 seconds in the stopposition. If the target vehicle does notstart moving within two seconds the ACCsystem will display a message that thesystem will release the brakes and thatthe brakes must be applied manually. Anaudible chime will sound when thebrakes are released.

You should switch off the ACC system:• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy

snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complexdriving situations (i.e., in highway con-struction zones).

• When entering a turn lane or highway offramp; when driving on roads that are

173



WARNING!winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, orhave steep uphill or downhill slopes.

• When towing a trailer up or down steepslopes.

• When circumstances do not allow safedriving at a constant speed.

The Cruise Control system has two controlmodes:• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-

taining an appropriate distance betweenvehicles.

• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlmode for cruising at a constant pre-set speed. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed)Cruise Control Mode” in your Owner’sManual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi-dents) for further details.

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control willnot react to preceding vehicles. Always beaware of the mode selected.

WARNING!You can change the mode by using theCruise Control buttons. The two controlmodes function differently. Always con-firm which mode is selected.

General Information



1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference.



PARKSENSE REAR PARKASSISTParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in therear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behindthe vehicle that is within the sensors’ fieldof view. The sensors can detect obstaclesfrom approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-ing on the location, type and orientation ofthe obstacle.

Activation/Deactivation ParkSense

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled withthe ParkSense switch .

When the ParkSense switch is pushed todisable the system, the instrument clusterdisplay will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”message for approximately five seconds.Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel inthe Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

174







for more information. When the gear selectoris moved to REVERSE and the system isdisabled, the instrument cluster display willshow the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for aslong as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The ParkSense switch LED will be on whenParkSense is disabled or requires service.The ParkSense switch LED will be off whenthe system is enabled. If the ParkSenseswitch is pushed, and the system requiresservice, the ParkSense switch LED will blinkmomentarily, and then the LED will be on.

Instrument Cluster Display

The ParkSense Warning screen will onlybe displayed if Sound and Display is se-lected from the Customer - ProgrammableFeatures section of the Uconnect System.Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-media” in the Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

The ParkSense Warning screen is locatedwithin the instrument cluster display. It pro-vides visual warnings to indicate the distance

between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-tected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument ClusterDisplay” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-ment Panel” in the Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep theParkSense system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi-brations could affect the performance ofParkSense.

• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrumentcluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF”.Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, itremains off until you turn it on again, even ifyou cycle the ignition.

• When you move the gear selector to theREVERSE position and ParkSense is turnedoff, the instrument cluster display will showa “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as longas the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the vol-ume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, tak-ing care not to scratch or damage them. Thesensors must not be covered with ice, snow,slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do socan result in the system not working prop-erly. The ParkSense system might not de-tect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper,or it could provide a false indication that anobstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.

• Use the ParkSense switch to turn theParkSense system OFF if objects such asbicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. areplaced within 12 inches (30 cm) from therear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so canresult in the system misinterpreting a closeobject as a sensor problem, causing the“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICEREQUIRED” message to appear in the in-strument cluster display.

• ParkSense should be disabled when theliftgate is in the open position and thevehicle is in REVERSE. An open liftgatecould provide a false indication that anobstacle is behind the vehicle.

175





WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using ParkSense. Alwayscheck carefully behind your vehicle,look behind you, and be sure to checkfor pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,obstructions, and blind spots beforebacking up. You are responsible forsafety and must continue to pay atten-tion to your surroundings. Failure to doso can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense, it is stronglyrecommended that the ball mount andhitch ball assembly is disconnectedfrom the vehicle when the vehicle is notused for towing. Failure to do so canresult in injury or damage to vehicles orobstacles because the hitch ball will bemuch closer to the obstacle than therear fascia when the loudspeaker soundsthe continuous tone. Also, the sensorscould detect the ball mount and hitchball assembly, depending on its size andshape, giving a false indication that anobstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it isunable to recognize every obstacle, in-cluding small obstacles. Parking curbsmight be temporarily detected or notdetected at all. Obstacles located aboveor below the sensors will not be detectedwhen they are in close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly whenusing ParkSense in order to be able tostop in time when an obstacle is de-tected. It is recommended that thedriver looks over his/her shoulder whenusing ParkSense.

PARKSENSE FRONT ANDREAR PARK ASSISTParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in therear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behindthe vehicle that is within the sensors fieldof view. The sensors can detect obstaclesfrom approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to

79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-ing on the location, type and orientation ofthe obstacle.

The six ParkSense sensors, located in thefront fascia/bumper, monitor the area in frontof the vehicle that is within the sensors’ fieldof view. The sensors can detect obstaclesfrom approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-ing on the location, type and orientation ofthe obstacle.

When an object is detected within 79 inches(200 cm) behind the rear bumper while thevehicle is in REVERSE, a warning will appearin the instrument cluster display. In additiona chime will sound (when Sound and Displayis selected from the Customer ProgrammableFeatures section of the Uconnect Systemscreen). As the vehicle moves closer to theobject, the chime rate will change from single1/2 second tone (for rear only), to slow (forrear only), to fast, to continuous.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

176

Activation/Deactivation

The ParkSense Park Assist system providesvisual and audible indications of the distancebetween the rear and/or front fascia and adetected obstacle when backing up or movingforward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Ifyour vehicle is equipped with an AutomaticTransmission, the vehicle brakes may be au-tomatically applied and released when per-forming a reverse parking maneuver if thesystem detects a possible collision with anobstacle.

ParkSense can be active only when the gearselector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSenseis enabled at one of these gear selector posi-tions, the system will remain active until thevehicle speed is increased to approximately7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warningwill appear in the instrument cluster displayindicating the vehicle is above ParkSenseoperating speed. The system will becomeactive again if the vehicle speed is decreasedto speeds less than approximately 6 mph(9 km/h).

Engagement/Disengagement

To disengage the system, push the ParkSenseswitch, located on the switch panel below theUconnect display.

When the system passes from engaged todisengaged and vice versa, it is always ac-companied by a dedicated message in theinstrument cluster display.

System engaged: ParkSense switch LED off.

System disengaged: ParkSense switch LED onconstantly.

The ParkSense switch LED lights up also inthe case of a ParkSense system failure. If thebutton is pushed with a system failure, theParkSense switch LED flashes for about fiveseconds, then it stays on constantly.

After the ParkSense has been disengaged, itwill stay in this condition until the followingengagement, even if the ignition devicepasses from ON/RUN to OFF and then againto ON/RUN.

Operation With A Trailer

The operation of the sensors is automaticallydeactivated when the trailer's electric plug isinserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. Thesensors are automatically reactivated whenthe trailer's cable plug is removed.

General Warnings

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REARSENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLEWIPE FRONT SENSORS” appears in theinstrument cluster display, clean theParkSense sensors with water, car wash soapand a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hardcloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

PARKSENSE ACTIVEPARK ASSIST SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPEDThe ParkSense Active Park Assist system isintended to assist the driver during paralleland perpendicular parking maneuvers byidentifying a proper parking space, providing

177

audible/visual instructions, and controllingthe steering wheel. The ParkSense ActivePark Assist system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains controlof the accelerator, gear selector and brakes.Depending on the driver's parking maneuverselection, the ParkSense Active Park Assistsystem is capable of maneuvering a vehicleinto a parallel or a perpendicular parkingspace on either side (i.e., driver side or pas-senger side).

NOTE:

• The driver is always responsible for control-ling the vehicle, responsible for any sur-rounding objects, and must intervene asrequired.

• The system is provided to assist the driverand not to substitute the driver.

• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if thedriver touches the steering wheel after be-ing instructed to remove their hands fromthe steering wheel, the system will cancel,and the driver will be required to manuallycomplete the parking maneuver.

• The system may not work in all conditions(e.g. environmental conditions such asheavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for aparking space that has surfaces that willabsorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).

• New vehicles from the dealership musthave at least 30 miles (48 km) accumu-lated before the ParkSense Active ParkAssist system is fully calibrated and per-forms accurately. This is due to the sys-tem’s dynamic vehicle calibration to im-prove the performance of the feature. Thesystem will also continuously perform thedynamic vehicle calibration to account fordifferences such as over or under inflatedtires and new tires.

Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense ActivePark Assist System

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system canbe enabled and disabled with the ParkSenseActive Park Assist switch, located on theswitch panel below the Uconnect display.

To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assistsystem, push the ParkSense Active ParkAssist switch once (LED turns on).

To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assistsystem, push the ParkSense Active ParkAssist switch again (LED turns off).

When the ParkSense Active Park Assist systemis enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching -Push OK to Switch to Perpendicular” messagewill appear in the instrument cluster display.You may switch to perpendicular parking if youdesire. Push the OK button on the left side

ParkSense Active Park Assist SwitchLocation

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

178

steering wheel switch to change your parkingspace setting. You may switch back to parallelparking if you desire.

When searching for a parking space, use theturn signal indicator to select which side ofthe vehicle you want to perform the parkingmaneuver.

NOTE:If the turn signal is not activated, theParkSense Active Park Assist system will au-tomatically search for a parking space on thepassenger's side of the vehicle.

Refer to your Owner's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents)or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further information.

LANESENSELaneSense OperationThe LaneSense system is operational atspeeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense sys-tem uses a forward looking camera to detectlane markings and measure vehicle positionwithin the lane boundaries.

When both lane markings are detected andthe driver unintentionally drifts out of thelane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSensesystem provides a haptic warning in theform of torque applied to the steeringwheel to prompt the driver to remain withinthe lane boundaries. If the driver continuesto unintentionally drift out of the lane, theLaneSense system provides a visual warningthrough the instrument cluster display toprompt the driver to remain within the laneboundaries.

The driver may manually override the hapticwarning by applying torque into the steeringwheel at any time.

When only a single lane marking is detectedand the driver unintentionally drifts acrossthe lane marking (no turn signal applied), theLaneSense system provides visual and hapticwarnings through the instrument cluster dis-play to prompt the driver to remain within thelane. When only a single lane marking isdetected, a haptic (torque) warning will notbe provided.

NOTE:When operating conditions have been met, theLaneSense system will monitor if the driver’shands are on the steering wheel and providesan audible warning to the driver when thedriver’s hands are not detected on the steeringwheel. The system will cancel if the driver doesnot return their hands to the wheel.

Turning LaneSense On Or OffThe default status of LaneSense is off. TheLED in LaneSense button will be illuminatedwhile the system is deactivated.

The LaneSense button is located on theswitch panel below the Uconnect display.

To turn the LaneSense system on, pushthe LaneSense button (LED turns off). A“LaneSense On” message is shown in theinstrument cluster display.

To turn the LaneSense system off, push theLaneSense button once (LED turns on).

NOTE:The LaneSense system will retain the lastsystem state on or off from the last ignitioncycle when the ignition is changed to theON/RUN position.

179




PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UPCAMERASymbols And Messages On The DisplayYou can see an on-screen image of the rear ofyour vehicle whenever the transmission isshifted into REVERSE. The ParkView RearBack-Up Camera image will be displayed onthe Uconnect Display, located on the centerstack of the instrument panel.

If the Uconnect Display appears foggy, cleanthe camera lens located on the rear of thevehicle above the rear license plate.

Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed

When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL orDRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be acti-vated with the “Rear View Camera” button inthe Controls menu. This feature allows thecustomer to monitor the area directly behindthe vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up toten seconds while at speed. If the vehiclespeed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), theRear View Camera image will be displayedcontinuously until deactivated via the “X”button on the touchscreen.

Refer to “ParkView Rear Back-Up Camera — IfEquipped” in “Starting And Operating” in yourOwner's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) orwww.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)for further details.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up;even when using the ParkView RearBack-Up Camera. Always check carefullybehind your vehicle, and be sure to checkfor pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,obstructions, or blind spots before backingup. You must continue to pay attentionwhile backing up. Failure to do so canresult in serious injury or death.

REFUELING THE VEHICLE —GASOLINE ENGINE1. Push the fuel filler door release switch

(located under the headlamp switch).

2. Open the fuel filler door.

Fuel Filler Door Release Switch

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

180




NOTE:In certain cold conditions, ice may pre-vent the fuel door from opening. If thisoccurs, lightly push on the fuel door tobreak the ice buildup and re-release thefuel door using the inside release button.Do not pry on the door.

3. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapperdoors inside the pipe seals the system.

4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the fillerpipe, the nozzle opens and holds the flap-per doors while refueling.

5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuelnozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank isfull.

6. Wait five seconds before removing the fuelnozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.

7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fueldoor.

Emergency Gas Can Refueling

• Most gas cans will not open the flapperdoors.

• A funnel is provided to open the flapperdoors to allow emergency refueling with agas can.

• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storagearea.

• Insert funnel into same filler pipe openingas the fuel nozzle.

• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flap-per doors open.

• Pour fuel into funnel opening.

• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean offprior to putting back in the spare tire stor-age area.

Fuel Filler Door Latch Fuel Filler

181

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit inor near the vehicle when the fuel door isopen or the tank is being filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is run-ning. This is in violation of most stateand federal fire regulations and maycause the “Malfunction Indicator Light”to turn on.

• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into aportable container that is inside of avehicle. You could be burned. Alwaysplace fuel containers on the groundwhile filling.

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, donot “top off” the fuel tank after filling.

Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release

If you are unable to open the fuel filler door,use the fuel filler door emergency release.

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Push the inboard edge of the left storagebin to the center, this will pop up theoutboard edge.

3. Grab popped up outboard edge with otherhand to disengage snaps.

4. Remove the storage bin.

5. Pull the release cable to open the fueldoor, push the release cable back to thehome position to re-seat the fuel doorlatch to the closed position.

NOTE:If the fuel door does not latch after themanual release cable has been activated, theactuator latch should be manually returnedto the closed position.

Storage Bin Location

Release Cable

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

182

REFUELING THE VEHICLE —DIESEL ENGINE1. Press the fuel filler door release switch

(located under the headlamp switch).

2. Open the fuel filler door.

1 — Fuel Fill Location2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location

NOTE:There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper doorinside the filler pipe seals the system.

3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the fillerpipe – the nozzle opens and holds theflapper door while refueling.

4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuelnozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank isfull.

5. Wait five seconds before removing thenozzle to allow fuel to drain from thenozzle.

6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fueldoor.

Fuel Filler Door Release Switch

Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location

183

Emergency Fuel Can Refueling

Most fuel cans will not open the flapper door.

A funnel is provided to open the flapper doorto allow emergency refueling with a fuel can.

1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire kit.

2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe openingas the fuel nozzle.

NOTE:Ensure funnel is inserted fully to holdflapper door open.

3. Pour fuel into funnel opening.

4. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean offprior to putting back in the spare tire kit.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit inor near the vehicle when the fuel door isopen or the tank is being filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is run-ning. This is in violation of most stateand federal fire regulations and maycause the “Malfunction Indicator Light”to turn on.

• A fire may result if fuel is pumped intoa portable container that is inside of avehicle. You could be burned. Alwaysplace fuel containers on the ground whilefilling.

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, donot “top off” the fuel tank after filling.

Avoid Using Contaminated FuelFuel that is contaminated by water or dirtcan cause severe damage to the engine fuelsystem. Proper maintenance of the enginefuel filter and fuel tank is essential. Refer to

Fuel Fill Funnel/Spare Tire/Jack And Tools

1 — Cap-Less Fuel Fill Funnel2 — Spare Tire3 — Tire Changing Tools And Jack

Emergency Fuel Fill Location

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

184

“Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Mainte-nance” in your Diesel Supplement atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel

If you store quantities of fuel, good mainte-nance of the stored fuel is also essential. Fuelcontaminated with water will promote thegrowth of “microbes.” These microbes form“slime” that will clog the fuel filtration sys-tem and lines. Drain condensation from thesupply tank and change the line filter on aregular basis.

NOTE:When a diesel engine is allowed to run out offuel, air is pulled into the fuel system.

If the vehicle will not start, refer to “DealerService / Priming If The Engine Has RunOut Of Fuel” in “Servicing And Mainte-nance” in your Diesel Supplement atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

WARNING!

Do not open the high pressure fuel systemwith the engine running. Engine operationcauses high fuel pressure. High pressurefuel spray can cause serious injury ordeath.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid

Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectiveCatalytic Reduction system to meet the verystringent diesel emissions standards requiredby the Environmental Protection Agency.

The purpose of the SCR system is to reducelevels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted fromengines) that are harmful to our health andthe environment to a near-zero level. Smallquantities of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) isinjected into the exhaust upstream of a cata-lyst where, when vaporized, it converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmlessnitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), twonatural components of the air we breathe.

You can operate with the comfort that yourvehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthierworld environment for this and generations tocome.

System Overview

This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel ExhaustFluid (DEF) injection system and a SelectiveCatalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet theemission requirements.

The DEF injection system consists of thefollowing components:

• DEF tank

• DEF pump

• DEF injector

• Electronically-heated DEF lines

• NOx sensors

• Temperature sensors

• SCR catalyst

The DEF injection system and SCR catalystenable the achievement of diesel emissionsrequirements; while maintaining outstandingfuel economy, drivability, torque and powerratings.

185





Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” forsystem messages and warnings.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injec-tion system. You may occasionally hear anaudible clicking noise from under the ve-hicle at a stop. This is normal operation.

• The DEF pump will run for a period of timeafter engine shutdown to purge the DEFsystem. This is normal operation and maybe audible from the rear of the vehicle.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered avery stable product with a long shelf life. IfDEF is kept in temperatures between 10° and90°F (-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimumof one year.

DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest tem-peratures. For example, DEF may freeze attemperatures at or below 12° F (-11° C). Thesystem has been designed to operate in thisenvironment.

NOTE:When working with DEF, it is important toknow that:

• Any containers or parts that come into con-tact with DEF must be DEF compatible(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass,aluminum, iron or non-stainless steelshould be avoided as they are subject tocorrosion by DEF.

• If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped upcompletely.

Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid

The DEF gauge (located on the instrumentcluster display) will display the level of DEFremaining in the tank. Refer to “InstrumentCluster Display” in “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE:Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed,load, etc.) will effect the amount of DEF thatis used in your vehicle.

DEF Fill Procedure

NOTE:Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the“Technical Specifications” section for thecorrect fluid type.

1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located infuel door).

DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill

1 — Diesel Fuel Filler2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

186

2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fillinlet.

NOTE:

• The DEF gauge may take up to fiveseconds to update after adding a gallonor more of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)to the DEF tank. If you have a faultrelated to the DEF system, the gaugemay not update to the new level. Seeyour authorized dealer for service.

• The DEF gauge may also not immedi-ately update after a refill if the tempera-ture of the DEF fluid is below 12F(-11C). The DEF line heater will possi-bly warm up the DEF fluid and allow thegauge to update after a period of runtime. Under very cold conditions, it ispossible that the gauge may not reflectthe new fill level for several drives.

CAUTION!

• To avoid DEF spillage, and possible dam-age to the DEF tank from overfilling, donot “top off” the DEF tank after filling.

• DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freezebelow 12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system isdesigned to work in temperatures belowthe DEF freezing point, however, if thetank is overfilled and freezes, the systemcould be damaged.

• When DEF is spilled, clean the areaimmediately with water and use an ab-sorbent material to soak up the spills onthe ground.

• Do not attempt to start your engine ifDEF is accidentally added to the dieselfuel tank as it can result in severe dam-age to your engine, including but notlimited to failure of the fuel pump andinjectors.

CAUTION!• Never add anything other than DEF to

the tank – especially any form of hydro-carbon such as diesel fuel, fuel systemadditives, gasoline, or any otherpetroleum-based product. Even a verysmall amount of these, less than100 parts per million or less than 1 oz.per 78 gallons (295 liters) will contami-nate the entire DEF system and willrequire replacement. If owners use acontainer, funnel or nozzle when refillingthe tank, it should either be new or onethat is has only been used for addingDEF. Mopar provides an attachablenozzle with its DEF for this purpose.

3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediatelywhen any of the following happen: DEFstops flowing from the fill bottle into theDEF fill inlet, DEF splashes out the fillinlet, or a DEF pump nozzle automaticallyshuts off.

4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.

187

TRAILER TOWINGTrailer Towing Weights (Maximum TrailerWeight Ratings) — Non SRT

The following chart provides the maximumtrailer weight ratings towable for your givendrivetrain:

Engine Model Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.(See Note)

3.6L (Std Cooling) 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)


3.6L (HD Cooling) 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg)




Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE:The trailer tongue weight must be consideredas part of the combined weight of occupantsand cargo, and should never exceed theweight referenced on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Ser-vicing And Maintenance” for further informa-

tion. The addition of passengers and cargomay require reducing trailer tongue load andGross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributingcargo (to the trailer) may be necessary toavoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1,678 kg).

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

188

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum TrailerWeight Ratings) — Diesel

The following chart provides the maximumtrailer weight ratings towable for your givendrivetrain:

Engine Model Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.(See Note)

3.0L Diesel 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,400 lbs (3,356 kg) 740 lbs (335 kg)

3.0L Diesel 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (326 kg)


NOTE:The trailer tongue weight must be consideredas part of the combined weight of occupantsand cargo, and should never exceed theweight referenced on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Ser-vicing And Maintenance” for further informa-tion. The addition of passengers and cargo

may require reducing trailer tongue load andGross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributingcargo (to the trailer) may be necessary toavoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1 678 kg).

189

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum TrailerWeight Ratings) — SRT

Engine/Transmission GCWR (Gross Combined Wt.Rating) Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.

(See Note)

6.2L Supercharged Auto-matic 12,600 lbs (5,715 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg)

6.4L Automatic 12,600 lbs (5,715 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg)


NOTE:

• The trailer tongue weight must be consid-ered as part of the combined weight ofoccupants and cargo, and should neverexceed the weight referenced on the Tireand Loading Information placard. Refer to“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” forfurther information.

• The manufacturer does not recommend us-ing the run flat feature while driving avehicle loaded at full capacity or towing atrailer.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

190

Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal(Summit Models) — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailerhitch receiver cover, this must be removed toaccess the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped).This hitch receiver cover is located at thebottom center of the rear fascia.

1. Turn the two locking retainers located atthe bottom of the hitch receiver cover a1/4 turn counterclockwise.

NOTE:Use a suitable tool such as a coin in theslot of the locking retainer if needed foradded leverage.

2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (to-wards you), pull downwards to disengagethe tabs located at the top of the hitchreceiver cover.

Hitch Receiver Cover

1 — Hitch Receiver Cover TabLocations2 — Locking Retainers


191

To reinstall the hitch receiver cover aftertowing repeat the procedure in reverse order.

NOTE:Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receivercover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.

Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal(SRT Models) — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailerhitch receiver cover, this must be removed toaccess the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped).This hitch receiver cover is located at thebottom center of the rear fascia.

1. Turn the two locking retainers located atthe bottom of the hitch receiver cover a1/4 turn counterclockwise.

NOTE:Use a suitable tool such as a coin in theslot of the locking retainer if needed foradded leverage.


1 — Hitch Receiver Cover TabLocations2 — Locking Retainers


1 — Hitch Receiver Cover RetainingTabs2 — Hitch Receiver Cover3 — Locking Retainers

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

192

2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward(towards you).

3. Lower back down to disengage the tabslocated at the top of the hitch receivercover and then pull outwards to remove.

To reinstall the hitch receiver cover aftertowing repeat the procedure in reverse order.

NOTE:Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch re-ceiver cover in the bumper fascia prior toinstallation.

Hitch Receiver CoverHitch Receiver Cover

1 — Hitch Receiver Cover RetainingTabs2 — Hitch Receiver Cover3 — Locking Retainer

193

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)Towing This Vehicle Behind Another VehicleTowing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models

Without 4–LO RangeFour-Wheel Drive Models With4–LO Range

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED See Instructions• Transmission in PARK• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)• Tow in forward direction

Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL OK OK OK

NOTE:Recreational towing is not allowed on SRT ve-hicles.

These vehicles may be towed on a flatbed orvehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFFthe ground.

NOTE:

• When towing your vehicle, always followapplicable state and provincial laws. Con-tact state and provincial Highway Safetyoffices for additional details.

• Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift mustbe placed in Transport Mode before tyingthem down (from the body) on a trailer orflatbed truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift” in

“Starting and Operating” for more informa-tion. If the vehicle cannot be placed inTransport mode (for example, engine willnot run), tie-downs should be fastened overthe tires using specific straps (not to thebody). Failure to follow these instructionsmay cause fault codes to be set and/orcause loss of proper tie-down tension.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

194

Recreational Towing-Two Wheel DriveModels

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to thedrivetrain will result.

Recreational towing (for two-wheel drivemodels) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheelsare OFF the ground. This may be accom-plished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer.If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow ve-hicle, following the dolly manufacturer'sinstructions.

NOTE:If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift airsuspension, ensure the vehicle is set toNormal Ride Height.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.

3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift thetransmission into PARK.

4. Turn the ignition OFF.

5. Properly secure the rear wheels to thedolly, following the dolly manufacturer’sinstructions.

6. Install a suitable clamping device, de-signed for towing, to secure the frontwheels in the straight position.

CAUTION!

Towing with the rear wheels on the groundwill cause severe transmission damage.Damage from improper towing is not cov-ered under the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-WheelDrive Models

Recreational towing is not allowed. Thesemodels do not have a NEUTRAL (N) positionin the transfer case.

NOTE:This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed orvehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFFthe ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of theabove requirements can cause severetransmission and/or transfer case damage.Damage from improper towing is not cov-ered under the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive Models

The transfer case must be shifted into NEU-TRAL (N) and the transmission must be inPARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL(N) selection button is adjacent to the trans-fer case selector switch. Shifts into and out oftransfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take placewith the selector switch in any mode position.

195

CAUTION!

• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle.Towing with only one set of wheels onthe ground (front or rear) will causesevere transmission and/or transfer casedamage. Tow with all four wheels eitherON the ground, or OFF the ground (usinga vehicle trailer).

• Tow only in a forward direction. Towingthis vehicle backwards can cause severedamage to the transfer case.

• The transmission must be in PARK forrecreational towing.

• Before recreational towing, perform theprocedure outlined under “Shifting intoNEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that thetransfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N).Otherwise, internal damage will result.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of theabove requirements can cause severetransmission and/or transfer case dam-age. Damage from improper towing isnot covered under the New Vehicle Lim-ited Warranty.

CAUTION!• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on

tow bar on your vehicle. The bumperface bar will be damaged.

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed ifyou leave the vehicle unattended with thetransfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) positionwithout first fully engaging the parkingbrake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)position disengages both the front and reardriveshafts from the powertrain and willallow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-mission is in PARK. The parking brakeshould always be applied when the driveris not in the vehicle.

Use the following procedure to prepare yourvehicle for recreational towing.

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to becertain that the transfer case is fully inNEUTRAL (N) before recreational towingto prevent damage to internal parts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop onlevel ground, with the engine running.



4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift airsuspension, ensure the vehicle is set toNormal Ride Height.

5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,push and hold the recessed transfer caseNEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se-lector switch) for four seconds. The lightbehind the N symbol will blink, indicatingshift in progress. The light will stop blink-ing (stay on solid) when the shift to NEU-TRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR WHEELDRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” messagewill appear in the instrument cluster.

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

196

6. After the shift is completed and the NEU-TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEU-TRAL (N) button.

7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

8. Release the brake pedal for five secondsand ensure that there is no vehiclemovement.

9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift thetransmission back into NEUTRAL.


11. With the transmission and transfer case inNEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINESTART/STOP button until the engineturns off.

12. Place the transmission gear selector inPARK. Release the brake pedal.

13. Push the ENGINE STOP/START buttontwice (without pressing the brake pedal),to turn the ignition to the OFF mode.

14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicleusing a suitable tow bar.


NOTE:

• Steps 1 through 4 are requirements thatmust be met before pushing the NEUTRAL(N) button, and must continue to be metuntil the shift has been completed. If any ofthese requirements are not met beforepushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are nolonger met during the shift, then the NEU-TRAL (N) indicator light will flash continu-ously until all requirements are met or untilthe NEUTRAL (N) button is released.

• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN modefor a shift to take place and for the positionindicator lights to be operable. If the igni-tion is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shiftwill not take place and no position indicatorlights will be on or flashing.

• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicatorlight indicates that shift requirements havenot been met.

• If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Liftair suspension, the engine should bestarted and left running for a minimum of60 seconds (with all the doors closed) atleast once every 24 hours. This processallows the air suspension to adjust thevehicle’s ride height to compensate fortemperature effects.

Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare yourvehicle for normal usage.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leav-ing it connected to the tow vehicle.



NEUTRAL (N) Switch

197



6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,push and hold the recessed transfer caseNEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se-lector switch) for one second.

7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator lightturns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) but-ton. After the NEUTRAL (N) button hasbeen released, the transfer case will shiftto the position indicated by the selectorswitch.

8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turnthe engine OFF.

9. Release the brake pedal.

10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.




14. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, re-lease the brake pedal, and check thatthe vehicle operates normally.

NOTE:

• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements thatmust be met before pushing the NEUTRAL(N) button, and must continue to be metuntil the shift has been completed. If any ofthese requirements are not met beforepushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are nolonger met during the shift, the NEUTRAL(N) indicator light will flash continuouslyuntil all requirements are met or until theNEUTRAL (N) button is released.

• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN modefor a shift to take place and for the positionindicator lights to be operable. If the igni-tion is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shiftwill not take place and no position indicatorlights will be on or flashing.

• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicatorlight indicates that shift requirements havenot been met.

NEUTRAL (N) Switch

STAR

TIN

GAN

DOP

ERAT

ING

198


HAZARD WARNINGFLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . .200Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .205Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

JACKING AND TIRECHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210Run Flat Tires — SRT Models. . . . . . .210Jack/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . .210Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .215

JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . .215Preparations For Jump Starting. . . . . .216Jump Starting Procedure. . . . . . . . . .216

REFUELING IN EMERGENCY. . . .218

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . .218

MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . .218

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . .220

TOWING A DISABLEDVEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . .222Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . .222Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . .223

ENHANCED ACCIDENTRESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS). . . .223

EVENT DATA RECORDER(EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223


199

HAZARD WARNINGFLASHERSControl

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is locatedon the switch bank just above the climatecontrols.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warn-ing flasher. When the switch is activated, alldirectional turn signals will flash on and off towarn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Pushthe switch a second time to turn off theHazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and itshould not be used when the vehicle is inmotion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled andit is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seekassistance, the Hazard Warning flashers willcontinue to operate even though the ignitionis placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashersmay discharge the battery.

BULB REPLACEMENTReplacement Bulbs

Interior Bulbs

Bulb NumberGlove CompartmentLamp 194

Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5WOverhead ConsoleReading Lamps VT4976

Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2Visor Vanity Lamp V26377Underpanel CourtesyLamps 906

Instrument Cluster(General Illumination) 103

Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb NumberHeadlamps(Low Beam) —If Equipped

H11

Premium Headlamps(Low/High Beam)

D3S (Service AtAuthorized Dealer)

Bulb NumberHeadlamps (HighBeam) — If Equipped H9

Premium Park/TurnSignal Lamp

LED - (Service AtAuthorized Dealer)

Premium DaytimeRunning Lamp (DRL)


Front Fog LampsH11


Front Side Marker —If Equipped W5W

Premium Front SideMarker — If Equipped


Front Park/TurnLamp — If Equipped 7444NA (WY28/8W)

Rear Body SideBackup Lamp 7440 (W21W)

Auxiliary LiftgateTail Lamps


Liftgate BackupLamps 921 (W16W)

Rear License Lamps LED - (Service AtAuthorized Dealer)

Rear Body SideStop/Turn Lamps

3157KRD LCP(P27/7W)

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

200

Bulb NumberRear Body Side TailLamps


CHMSL - CenterHigh MountedStop Lamp


NOTE:Numbers refer to commercial bulb types thatcan be purchased from your authorizeddealer.If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit yourauthorized dealer or refer to the applicableService Manual.

Bulb Replacement

High Intensity Discharge Headlamps(HID) — If Equipped

The headlamps are a type of high voltagedischarge tube. High voltage can remain inthe circuit even with the headlamp switch offand the key removed. Because of this, youshould not attempt to service a headlamp bulbyourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take yourvehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulbsockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID)headlamps when the headlamp switch isturned ON. It may cause serious electricalshock or electrocution if not serviced prop-erly. See your authorized dealer for service.

NOTE:On vehicles equipped with High IntensityDischarge (HID) headlamps, when the head-lamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to thelamps. This diminishes and becomes morewhite after approximately 10 seconds, as thesystem charges.

Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped

NOTE:Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-spheric conditions. This will usually clear asatmospheric conditions change to allow thecondensation to change back to vapor. Turn-ing the lamps on will usually accelerate theclearing process.

1. Open the hood.

2. Access the back of the headlamp.

NOTE:

• The air filter housing must be removed.

• The windshield washer reservoir mayneed to be rotated out of the way byremoving the fastener.

• Coolant reservoir (if equipped) willneed to be repositioned by removing thefasteners, and moving the unit out ofthe way.

3. To access the low beam bulb you mustremove the rubber boot seal from back-side of the lamp housing.

NOTE:Ensure the rubber boot is properly rein-stalled to prevent water and moisture fromentering the lamp.

CAUTION!

• Do not contaminate the bulb glass bytouching it with your fingers or by allow-ing it to contact other oily surfaces.Shortened bulb life will result.

201

CAUTION!• Always use the correct bulb size and type

for replacement. An incorrect bulb sizeor type may overheat and cause damageto the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lampwiring.

4. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn counterclockwise to removefrom housing.

5. Disconnect the electrical connector andreplace the bulb.

Front Turn Signal Lamp

The front turn signal lamps are LEDs. Seeyour authorized dealer for service.

1. Open the hood.

2. Access the back of the headlamp.

NOTE:

• The air filter housing must be removed.

• The windshield washer reservoir mayneed to be rotated out of the way byremoving the fastener.

• Coolant reservoir (if equipped) willneed to be repositioned by removingthe fasteners, and moving the unit outof the way.

3. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turncounterclockwise to remove from housing.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector andreplace the bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fin-gers. Oil contamination will severelyshorten bulb life. If the bulb comes incontact with any oily surface, clean thebulb with rubbing alcohol.

Front Fog Lamps

Please see your authorized dealer for service.

Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps

1. Raise the liftgate.

2. Remove the two push-pins from the taillamp housing.

3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rear-ward to disengage the lamp from the ap-erture panel.

Tail Lamp Push Pins

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

202

4. Twist socket counter clockwise and re-move from lamp.

5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.

6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket,and reattach the lamp assembly.

Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp

1. Raise the liftgate.

2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trimfrom the liftgate.

3. Continue removing the trim.

4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.

5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate sock-et(s) counter clockwise.

Rear Of Tail Lamp

1 — Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Socket2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove3 — Rear Turn Signal Bulb Socket

Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps

Liftgate Lower Trim

203

6. Remove/replace bulb(s).

7. Reinstall the socket(s).

8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgatetrim.

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

The center high mounted stop lamp is anLED. Service at an authorized dealer.

Rear License Lamp

The rear license lamps are LEDs. See yourauthorized dealer for service.

FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always usean appropriate replacement fuse withthe same amp rating as the original fuse.Never replace a fuse with another fuse ofhigher amp rating. Never replace ablown fuse with metal wires or any othermaterial. Do not place a fuse inside acircuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Fail-ure to use proper fuses may result inserious personal injury, fire and/or prop-erty damage.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure thatthe ignition is off and that all the otherservices are switched off and/or disen-gaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contactan authorized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safetysystems (air bag system, braking system),power unit systems (engine system, trans-mission system) or steering system blows,contact an authorized dealer.

Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp

1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector –Do Not Remove2 — Backup Bulb Socket Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

204

General Information

The fuses protect electrical systems againstexcessive current.

When a device does not work, you must checkthe fuse element inside the blade fuse for abreak/melt.

Also, please be aware that when using poweroutlets for extended periods of time with theengine off may result in vehicle battery dis-charge.

Underhood Fuses

The Power Distribution Center is located inthe engine compartment near the battery.This center contains cartridge fuses, microfuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A descrip-tion of each fuse and component may bestamped on the inside cover, otherwise thecavity number of each fuse is stamped on theinside cover that corresponds to the followingchart.

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse DescriptionF03 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator FanF05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension — If EquippedF06 40 Amp Green – Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control PumpF07 30 Amp Pink – Starter SolenoidF09 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Brake

Vacuum PumpF10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2F11 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped

Power Distribution Center

205

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse DescriptionF12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3/Power LocksF13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor FrontF14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1F15 40 Amp Green – LTR (Low Temperature Radiator) Engine Cooling PumpF17 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer — If EquippedF19 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Solenoid — If EquippedF20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door ModuleF22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control ModuleF23 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lights #1F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door ModuleF25 30 Amp Pink – Front WipersF26 30 Amp Pink – Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/ValvesF28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If EquippedF29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If EquippedF30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle — If EquippedF32 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control ModuleF34 30 Amp Pink – Slip Differential ControlF35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof - If EquippedF36 30 Amp Pink – Rear DefrosterF37 25 Amp Clear – Rear Blower Motor — If EquippedF38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC — If EquippedF39 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate — If EquippedF40 – 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

206

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse DescriptionF42 – 20 Amp Yellow HornF44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic PortF 45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security GatewayF49 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack/Climate ControlF50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module/Slip Differential -

If EquippedF51 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Node Module/Keyless Ignition/Steering

Column LockF52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery SensorF53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If EquippedF56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel engine only)F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX SensorF58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH — If EquippedF59 – 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)F60 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control ModuleF61 – 10 Amp Red Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor

(Diesel engine only)F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning ClutchF63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/PowertrainF66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof/Passenger Window Switches/Rain SensorF67 – 15 Amp Blue CD/DVD/Bluetooth Hands-free Module — If EquippedF68 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper MotorF69 – 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed — If Equipped

207

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse DescriptionF70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MotorF71 – 30 Amp Green Audio AmplifierF72 – 10 Amp Red PCM — If EquippedF73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RH — If EquippedF75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Control — If EquippedF76 – 10 Amp Red Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability ControlF77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect ModuleF78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module/Electric Power SteeringF80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener/Compass/Anti-Intrusion

ModuleF81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop LightsF82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module/Cruise Control/DTVF83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel DoorF84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank/Instrument ClusterF85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag ModuleF86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag ModuleF87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension — If Equipped/Trailer Tow/Steering

Column Control ModuleF88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster

F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear seats) SelectableF92 – 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp — If EquippedF93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar LighterF94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

208

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse DescriptionF95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera/ParkSenseF96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger —

If EquippedF97 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel —

If EquippedF98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats — If EquippedF99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems Module/DSRC

F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping — If EquippedF101 – 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams —

If EquippedF103 – 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVACF104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)

CAUTION!

• When installing the power distributioncenter cover, it is important to ensurethe cover is properly positioned and fullylatched. Failure to do so may allow waterto get into the power distribution centerand possibly result in an electrical sys-tem failure.

CAUTION!• When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor-

tant to use only a fuse having the correctamperage rating. The use of a fuse with arating other than indicated may result ina dangerous electrical system overload.If a properly rated fuse continues toblow, it indicates a problem in the circuitthat must be corrected.

209

JACKING AND TIRECHANGINGRun Flat Tires — SRT Models

This vehicle is equipped with “run flat” tires.Run flat tires allow the vehicle to be drivenapproximately 50 miles (80km) at 55 mph(88km/h). Tire service should be obtained toavoid prolonged run flat feature usage.

WARNING!

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” isilluminated. Vehicle handling and brakingmay be reduced. You could have a collisionand be severely or fatally injured.

Jack/Spare Tire Stowage

Jack Location

The scissor-type jack and tire changing toolsare located in rear cargo area, below the loadfloor.

Spare Tire Stowage

The spare tire is stowed under the load floorin the rear cargo area and is secured to thebody with a special wing nut.

Preparations For Jacking

CAUTION!Always lift or jack the vehicle from thecorrect jacking points. Failure to followthis information could cause damage tothe vehicle or underbody components.

NOTE:To assist with changing a spare tire, the airsuspension system (if equipped) has a fea-ture which allows the automatic leveling tobe disabled.1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.

Avoid ice or slippery surfaces.

WARNING!Do not attempt to change a tire on the sideof the vehicle closest to moving traffic,pull far enough off the road to avoid beinghit when operating the jack or changingthe wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Apply the parking brake.

Spare Tire/Jack And Tools

1 — Cap-Less Fuel Fill Funnel2 — Spare Tire3 — Tire Changing Tools And Jack

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

210

4. Place the gear selector into PARK.

5. Turn the ignition OFF.

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheeldiagonally opposite of the jacking posi-tion. For example, if changing the rightfront tire, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE:

Passengers should not remain in the ve-hicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift,refer to “Quadra-Lift — If Equipped”in “Starting And Operating” in theOwner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents)or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi-dents) for further information on disablingautomatic leveling.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warn-ings to help prevent personal injury ordamage to your vehicle:• Always park on a firm, level surface as

far from the edge of the roadway aspossible before raising the vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the

wheel to be raised.• Set the parking brake firmly and set an

automatic transmission in PARK.• Never start or run the engine with the

vehicle on a jack.

WARNING!• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when

it is on a jack.• Do not get under the vehicle when it is

on a jack. If you need to get under araised vehicle, take it to a service centerwhere it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indi-cated and for lifting this vehicle during atire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, beextremely careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or in-flated, are securely stowed, spares mustbe stowed with the valve stem facing theground.

Wheel Blocked

211




CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle byjacking on locations other than those indi-cated in the Jacking Instructions for thisvehicle.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and toolsfrom storage.

2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lugnuts by turning them to the left, one turn,while the wheel is still on the ground.

3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.

4. For the front axle, place the jack on thebody flange just behind the front tire asindicated by the triangular lift point sym-bol on the sill molding. Do not raise thevehicle until you are sure the jack is fullyengaged.

Warning Label

Jack And Tools Assembled

Jacking Locations

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

212

5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot onthe rear tie-down bracket, just forward ofthe rear tire (as indicated by the triangularlift point symbol on the sill molding). Donot raise the vehicle until you are sure thejack is fully engaged.

6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jackscrew clockwise. Raise the vehicle onlyuntil the tire just clears the surface andenough clearance is obtained to installthe spare tire. Minimum tire lift providesmaximum stability.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessarycan make the vehicle less stable. It couldslip off the jack and hurt someone near it.Raise the vehicle only enough to removethe tire.

7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.

8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicleand install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightlytighten the nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle offthe jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fullyuntil the vehicle has been lowered. Failureto follow this warning may result in seriousinjury.

Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location

213

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with thevalve stem facing outward. The vehiclecould be damaged if the spare tire ismounted incorrectly.

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jackscrew counterclockwise, and remove thejack and wheel blocks.

10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Pushdown on the wrench while at the end ofthe handle for increased leverage.Tighten the lug nuts in a star patternuntil each nut has been tightened twice.For correct lug nut torque refer to“Torque Specifications” in “TechnicalSpecifications”. If in doubt about thecorrect tightness, have them checkedwith a torque wrench by your authorizeddealer or at a service station.

11. Lower the jack to the fully closed posi-tion and return it and the tools to theproper positions in the foam tray.

12. Remove the small center cap and se-curely store the road wheel in the cargoarea.

13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tirerepaired as soon as possible, properlysecure the spare tire with the specialwing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m),reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray,and latch the rear load floor cover.

NOTE:Do not drive with the spare tire installed formore than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speedof 50 mph (80 km/h).

Installing Spare Wheel/Tire

Spare Tire

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

214

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in acollision or hard stop could endanger theoccupants of the vehicle. Always stow thejack parts and the spare tire in the placesprovided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-paired or replaced immediately.

Changing Procedure1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with thecone shaped end of the nut toward thewheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle offthe jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fullyuntil the vehicle has been lowered. Failureto follow this warning may result in per-sonal injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turningthe jack handle counterclockwise.

4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in“Technical Specifications” for proper lugnut torque. If in doubt about the correcttightness, have them checked with atorque wrench by your authorized dealeror service station.

5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nuttorque with a torque wrench to ensure thatall lug nuts are properly seated against thewheel.

JUMP STARTINGIf your vehicle has a discharged battery it canbe jump started using a set of jumper cablesand a battery in another vehicle or by using aportable battery booster pack. Jump startingcan be dangerous if done improperly soplease follow the procedures in this sectioncarefully.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the batteryis frozen. It could rupture or explode andcause personal injury.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster packor any other booster source with a systemvoltage greater than 12 Volts or damage tothe battery, starter motor, alternator orelectrical system may occur.

NOTE:When using a portable battery booster packfollow the manufacturer's operating instruc-tions and precautions.

215

Preparations For Jump Starting

The battery in your vehicle is located underthe passenger's front seat. There are remotelocations located under the hood to assist injump starting.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fanwhenever the hood is raised. It can startanytime the ignition switch is ON. You canbe injured by moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,watch bands and bracelets that couldmake an inadvertent electrical contact.You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that canburn your skin or eyes and generatehydrogen gas which is flammable andexplosive. Keep open flames or sparksaway from the battery.

NOTE:Be sure that the disconnected ends of thecables do not touch while still connected tothe either vehicle.

1. Apply the parking brake, shift the auto-matic transmission into PARK and turnthe ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnec-essary electrical accessories.

3. Remove the protective cover over the re-mote positive (+) battery post. Pull up-ward on the cover to remove it.

4. If using another vehicle to jump start thebattery, park the vehicle within thejumper cables reach, set the parkingbrake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each otheras this could establish a ground connec-tion and personal injury could result.

Jump Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting proce-dure could result in personal injury orproperty damage due to battery explosion.Remote Battery Posts

1 — Remote Positive (+) Post2 — Remote Negative (–) Post

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

216

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures couldresult in damage to the charging system ofthe booster vehicle or the discharged ve-hicle.

NOTE:Make sure at all times that unused ends ofjumper cables are not contacting each otheror either vehicle while making connections.

If frequent jump starting is required to startyour vehicle you should have the battery andcharging system tested at your authorizeddealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehiclepower outlets draw power from the vehi-cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, ifplugged in long enough without engineoperation, the vehicle’s battery will dis-charge sufficiently to degrade battery lifeand/or prevent the engine from starting.

Cable Connection

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumpercable to the remote positive (+) post of thedischarged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post ofthe booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumpercable to the negative (-) post of thebooster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative(-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-)post of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to thenegative (-) post of the discharged battery.The resulting electrical spark could causethe battery to explode and could result inpersonal injury. Only use the specificground point, do not use any other exposedmetal parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has thebooster battery, let the engine idle a fewminutes, and then start the engine in thevehicle with the discharged battery.

CAUTION!

Do not run the booster vehicle engineabove 2000 rpm since it provides nocharging benefit, wastes fuel and candamage booster vehicle engine.

6. Once the engine is started, remove thejumper cables in the reverse sequence:

Cable Disconnection

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of thejumper cable from the remote negative (-)post of the discharged vehicle.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega-tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of thejumper cable from the positive (+) post ofthe booster battery.

217

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive(+) jumper cable from the remote positive(+) post of the discharged vehicle.

5. Reinstall the protective cover over theremote positive (+) post of the dischargedvehicle.

REFUELING IN EMERGENCYThe funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System islocated in the spare tire storage area. If yourvehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel canis needed, insert the funnel into the fillerneck and proceed to fill the vehicle.

For more information on the Cap-Less FuelSystem refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in“Starting And Operating” in this manual.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATSIn any of the following situations, you canreduce the potential for overheating by takingthe appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place thetransmission in NEUTRAL, but do not in-crease the engine idle speed while prevent-ing vehicle motion with the brakes.

NOTE:There are steps that you can take to slowdown an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.The A/C system adds heat to the enginecooling system and turning the A/C off canhelp remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature controlto maximum heat, the mode control to floorand the blower control to high. This allowsthe heater core to act as a supplement tothe radiator and aids in removing heat fromthe engine cooling system.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steam fromyour radiator. If you see or hear steamcoming from under the hood, do not openthe hood until the radiator has had time tocool. Never try to open a cooling systempressure cap when the radiator or coolantbottle is hot.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system coulddamage your vehicle. If the temperaturegauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stopthe vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the airconditioner turned off until the pointerdrops back into the normal range. If thepointer remains on HOT (H), and you hearcontinuous chimes, turn the engine offimmediately and call for service.

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

WARNING!

Always secure your vehicle by fully apply-ing the parking brake, before activatingthe Manual Park Release. In addition,you should be seated in the driver’s seatwith your foot firmly on the brake pedalwhen activating the Manual Park Release.Activating the Manual Park Release will

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

218

WARNING!allow your vehicle to roll away if it is notsecured by the parking brake or by properconnection to a tow vehicle. Activating theManual Park Release on an unsecuredvehicle could lead to serious injury ordeath for those in or around the vehicle.

In order to move the vehicle in cases wherethe transmission will not shift out of PARK(such as a discharged battery), a Manual ParkRelease is available.

Follow these steps to use the Manual ParkRelease:


2. Open the center console and locate theManual Park Release cover, remove it bysnapping the cover away from the consolehinges.

3. Press and maintain firm pressure on thebrake pedal.

4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push themetal latch in towards the tether strap.

5. While the metal latch is in the open posi-tion, simultaneously pull upwards on thetether strap until the lever clicks andlatches in the released position. Thetransmission is now out of PARK and thevehicle can be moved.

CAUTION!

Closing the armrest while the Manual ParkRelease is activated may damage theManual Park Release mechanism, thetransmission, and/or the armrest.

NOTE:To prevent the vehicle from rolling uninten-tionally, firmly apply the parking brake.

Manual Park Release Cover Removed Released Position

219

To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:

1. To disengage the Manual Park Releaseapply tension upward while pushing therelease latch towards the tether to unlockthe lever.

2. Once the tension has been released andthe lever has been unlocked be sure it isstowed properly and locks into position.

NOTE:Be sure to replace the cover by snapping itback in place.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLEIf your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sandor snow, it can often be moved using a rock-ing motion. Turn the steering wheel right andleft to clear the area around the front wheels.Push and hold the lock button on the gearselector. Then shift back and forth betweenDRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressingthe accelerator.

NOTE:Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE canonly be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmissionremains in NEUTRAL for more than two sec-onds, you must press the brake pedal toengage DRIVE or REVERSE.

Use the least amount of accelerator pedalpressure that will maintain the rocking mo-tion without spinning the wheels or racing theengine.

NOTE:Push the "ESC Off" switch (if necessary), toplace the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system in "Partial Off" mode, before rockingthe vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Con-trol” in “Safety” in the Owner's Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.Once the vehicle has been freed, push the"ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On"mode.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.Forces generated by excessive wheelspeeds may cause damage, or even failure,of the axle and tires. A tire could explodeand injure someone. Do not spin yourvehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 secondscontinuously without stopping when youare stuck and do not let anyone near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

CAUTION!

• Racing the engine or spinning thewheels may lead to transmission over-heating and failure. Allow the engine toidle with the transmission in NEUTRALfor at least one minute after every fiverocking-motion cycles. This will mini-mize overheating and reduce the risk oftransmission failure during prolongedefforts to free a stuck vehicle.

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

220



CAUTION!• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting

between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spinthe wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),or drivetrain damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning thewheels too fast may lead to transmissionoverheating and failure. It can also dam-age the tires. Do not spin the wheelsabove 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear(no transmission shifting occurring).

TOWING A DISABLEDVEHICLEThis section describes procedures for towinga disabled vehicle using a commercial towingservice. If the transmission and drivetrain areoperable, disabled vehicles may also betowed as described under “Recreational Tow-ing” in “Starting And Operating”.

NOTE:Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must beplaced in Transport mode, before tying themdown (from the body) on a trailer or flatbedtruck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift” in “StartingAnd Operating” for more information. If thevehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode(for example, engine will not run), tie-downsmust be fastened to the axles (not to thebody). Failure to follow these instructionsmay cause fault codes to be set and/or causeloss of proper tie-down tension.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive ModelsWithout 4WD LOW Range

Four-Wheel Drive Models With4WD LOW Range

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

See instructions in“Recreational Towing”

• Transmission in PARK• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)• Tow in forward direction

Wheel Lift Or Dolly TowFront NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL OK OK OK

221

NOTE:SRT vehicles and 4WD models without 4WDLOW range should only be towed with all fourwheels OFF the ground.

Proper towing or lifting equipment is requiredto prevent damage to your vehicle. Use onlytow bars and other equipment designed forthis purpose, following equipment manufac-turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains ismandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towingdevice to main structural members of thevehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack-ets. State and local laws regarding vehiclesunder tow must be observed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, de-frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignitionmust be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACCmode.

If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle'sbattery is discharged, refer to “Manual ParkRelease” in this section for instructions onshifting the transmission out of PARK fortowing.

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling type equipment whentowing. Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flat bedtruck, do not attach to front or rear sus-pension components. Damage to your ve-hicle may result from improper towing.

Two-Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing yourvehicle with all four wheels OFF the groundusing a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and thetransmission is operable, the vehicle may betowed (with rear wheels on the ground) underthe following conditions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Re-fer to "Manual Park Release" in this sectionfor instructions on shifting the transmissionto NEUTRAL when the engine is off.

• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph(48 km/h).

• The towing distance must not exceed30 miles (48 km).

If the transmission is not operable, or thevehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km),tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle ona flatbed, or with the front wheels raised andthe rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (whenusing a suitable steering wheel stabilizer tohold the front wheels in the straight position)with the rear wheels raised and the frontwheels on the ground.

CAUTION!Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) orfarther than 30 miles (48 km) with rearwheels on the ground can cause severetransmission damage. Damage from im-proper towing is not covered under theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Four-Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing withall wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable meth-ods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or withone end of vehicle raised and the oppositeend on a towing dolly.

INCA

SEOF

EMER

GEN

CY

222

If flatbed equipment is not available, and thetransfer case is operable, vehicles with atwo-speed transfer case may be towed (in theforward direction, with ALL wheels on theground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL(N) and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to“Recreational Towing” for detailed instruc-tions.

Vehicles equipped with a single-speed trans-fer case have no NEUTRAL position, andtherefore must be towed with all four wheelsOFF the ground.

CAUTION!

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used(if the remaining wheels are on theground). Internal damage to the transmis-sion or transfer case will occur if a front orrear wheel lift is used when towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of theabove requirements can cause severetransmission and/or transfer case dam-age. Damage from improper towing isnot covered under the New Vehicle Lim-ited Warranty.

Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks,there will be one in the rear and two mountedon the front of the vehicle. The rear hook willbe located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

NOTE:For off-road recovery, it is recommended touse both of the front tow hooks to minimizethe risk of damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuckvehicle. Chains may break, causing seri-ous injury or death.

• Stand clear of vehicles when pullingwith tow hooks. Tow straps may becomedisengaged, causing serious injury.

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, torescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do notuse tow hooks for tow truck hookup or high-way towing. You could damage your vehicle.

ENHANCED ACCIDENTRESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)This vehicle is equipped with an EnhancedAccident Response System.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-tems” in “Safety” for further information onthe Enhanced Accident Response System(EARS) function.

EVENT DATA RECORDER(EDR)This vehicle is equipped with an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performedunder certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hit-ting a road obstacle.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-tems” in “Safety” for further information onthe Event Data Recorder (EDR).

223

224


SCHEDULED SERVICINGNON-SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . .228

SCHEDULED SERVICING —SRT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

SCHEDULED SERVICING —DIESEL ENGINE. . . . . . . . . . . . .232Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up ToB5 Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233Additional Maintenance — B6 ToB20 Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . .2363.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2365.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2376.2L Supercharged Engine . . . . . . . .2386.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

3.0L Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .240Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine . .241Checking Oil Level — 3.0 DieselEngine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .241Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . .242

DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . .242Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . .243Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . .245Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . .250

RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .250

TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .250Tires — General Information . . . . . . .259Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . .264Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . .266Tire Chains (Traction Devices) —Non-SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — SRT. . .268Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . .268

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTA-TION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITYGRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . .270

INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . .270Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . .271Leather Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271


225

SCHEDULED SERVICINGNON-SRTYour vehicle is equipped with an automaticoil change indicator system. The oil changeindicator system will remind you that it istime to take your vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oilchange indicator message will illuminate.This means that service is required for yourvehicle. Operating conditions such as fre-quent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hotor cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuelusage will influence when the “Oil ChangeRequired” message is displayed. Severe op-

erating conditions can cause the changeoil message to illuminate as early as3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos-sible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oilchange indicator message after completingthe scheduled oil change.

NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil changeintervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),twelve months or 350 hours of engine runtime, whichever comes first. The 350 hoursof engine run or idle time is generally only aconcern for fleet customers.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level.

• Check windshield washer fluid level.

• Check the tire inflation pressures and lookfor unusual wear or damage.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,brake master cylinder and fill as needed.

• Check function of all interior and exteriorlights

Maintenance Plan

Required Maintenance

Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the fol-lowing pages for required maintenance.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:• Change oil and filter.• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.• Inspect exhaust system.• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

226

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

20,0

00

30,0

00

40,0

00

50,0

00

60,0

00

70,0

00

80,0

00

90,0

00

100,

000

110,

000

120,

000

130,

000

140,

000

150,

000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,0

00

48,0

00

64,0

00

80,0

00

96,0

00

112,

000

128,

000

144,

000

160,

000

176,

000

192,

000

208,

000

224,

000

240,

000

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X

Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace ifnecessary. X X X X X X X

Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using yourvehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailertowing.

X X X X X X X

Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X

Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air filter. X X X X X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X

Replace spark plugs.** X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. X X

Change transfer case fluid. X

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X

** The spark plug change interval is mileagebased only, yearly intervals do not apply.

227

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on oraround a motor vehicle. Do only servicework for which you have the knowledgeand the right equipment. If you have anydoubt about your ability to perform aservice job, take your vehicle to a com-petent mechanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintainyour vehicle could result in a componentmalfunction and effect vehicle handlingand performance. This could cause anaccident.

Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle

Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km)if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and offroad environment or is operated predomi-nately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s.This type of vehicle use is considered SevereDuty.

SCHEDULED SERVICING —SRTThe Scheduled Maintenance services listedin this manual must be done at the times ormileages specified to protect your vehiclewarranty and ensure the best vehicle perfor-mance and reliability. More frequent mainte-nance may be needed for vehicles in severeoperating conditions, such as dusty areas andvery short trip driving. Inspection and serviceshould also be done anytime a malfunction issuspected.

The oil change indicator system will remindyou that it is time to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance.

The instrument cluster display will display an“Oil Change Required” message and a singlechime will sound, indicating that an oil changeis necessary.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oilchange indicator message will illuminate. Thismeans that service is required for your vehicle.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,within the next 500 miles (805 km).

NOTE:

• The oil change indicator message will notmonitor the time since the last oil change.Change your vehicle's oil if it has been sixmonths since your last oil change, even ifthe oil change indicator message is NOTilluminated.

• Change your engine oil more often if youdrive your vehicle off-road for an extendedperiod of time.

• Under no circumstances should oil changeintervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km)or six months, whichever comes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil changeindicator message after completing the sched-uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change isperformed by someone other than your autho-rized dealer, the message can be reset byreferring to the steps described under “Instru-ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To KnowYour Instrument Panel” in this guide.

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

228

At Each Stop For Fuel

• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “EngineCompartment” in this section for furtherinformation.

• Check the windshield washer solvent andadd if required.

Once A Month

• Check tire pressure and look for unusualwear or damage.

• Inspect the battery, and clean and tightenthe terminals as required.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser-voir, engine oil, brake master cylinder, andadd as needed.

• Check all lights and other electrical itemsfor correct operation.

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required mainte-nance items may result in damage to thevehicle.

Maintenance Plan

Miles:

6,00

0

12,0

00

18,0

00

24,0

00

30,0

00

36,0

00

42,0

00

48,0

00

54,0

00

60,0

00

66,0

00

72,0

00

78,0

00

84,0

00

90,0

00

96,0

00

102,

000

108,

000

114,

000

120,

000

126,

000

132,

000

138,

000

144,

000

150,

000

Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

Or Kilometers:

10,0

00

20,0

00

30,0

00

40,0

00

50,0

00

60,0

00

70,0

00

80,0

00

90,0

00

100,

000

110,

000

120,

000

130,

000

140,

000

150,

000

160,

000

170,

000

180,

000

190,

000

200,

000

210,

000

220,

000

230,

000

240,

000

250,

000

Change the engine oil and engineoil filter. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Rotate the tires, rotate at the firstsign of irregular wear, even if it occursbefore scheduled maintenance.

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

229

Miles:

6,00

0

12,0

00

18,0

00

24,0

00

30,0

00

36,0

00

42,0

00

48,0

00

54,0

00

60,0

00

66,0

00

72,0

00

78,0

00

84,0

00

90,0

00

96,0

00

102,

000

108,

000

114,

000

120,

000

126,

000

132,

000

138,

000

144,

000

150,

000

Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

Or Kilometers:

10,0

00

20,0

00

30,0

00

40,0

00

50,0

00

60,0

00

70,0

00

80,0

00

90,0

00

100,

000

110,

000

120,

000

130,

000

140,

000

150,

000

160,

000

170,

000

180,

000

190,

000

200,

000

210,

000

220,

000

230,

000

240,

000

250,

000

If using your vehicle for any of thefollowing: dusty or off-road condi-tions. Inspect the engine air cleanerfilter; replace if necessary.

X X X X X X X X X X X X

Inspect the brake linings; replace ifnecessary. X X X X X X X X X X X X

Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X

Inspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X X X X X

Adjust the parking brake on vehiclesequipped with four wheel discbrakes.

X X X X X

Drain the transfer case and refill. X X X X X

Inspect the accessory drive beltsreplace if necessary. X X

Inspect the front and rear axlefluid. Change if using your vehiclefor any of the following: police, taxi,fleet, sustained high speed driving,off-road or frequent trailer towing.

X X X X X X

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

230

Miles:

6,00

0

12,0

00

18,0

00

24,0

00

30,0

00

36,0

00

42,0

00

48,0

00

54,0

00

60,0

00

66,0

00

72,0

00

78,0

00

84,0

00

90,0

00

96,0

00

102,

000

108,

000

114,

000

120,

000

126,

000

132,

000

138,

000

144,

000

150,

000

Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

Or Kilometers:

10,0

00

20,0

00

30,0

00

40,0

00

50,0

00

60,0

00

70,0

00

80,0

00

90,0

00

100,

000

110,

000

120,

000

130,

000

140,

000

150,

000

160,

000

170,

000

180,

000

190,

000

200,

000

210,

000

220,

000

230,

000

240,

000

250,

000

Inspect front suspension, tie rodends, and boot seals, for cracks orleaks and all parts for damage,wear, improper looseness or endplay; replace if necessary.

X X X X X X X X X X X X

Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X

Inspect and replace the PCV Valveif necessary X

Replace the spark plugs –6.2L Supercharged Engine. ** X X

Replace the spark plugs –6.4L Engine. ** X

Flush and replace the engine cool-ant at 120 months if not done at150,000 miles (240,000 km).

X X

** The spark plug change interval is mileagebased only, monthly intervals do not apply.

231

WARNING!



SCHEDULED SERVICING —DIESEL ENGINEYour vehicle is equipped with an automaticoil change indicator system. The oil changeindicator system will remind you that it istime to take your vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oilchange indicator message will illuminate.This means that service is required for yourvehicle. Operating conditions such as fre-quent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot orcold ambient temperatures will influencewhen the “Oil Change Required” messageis displayed. Severe Operating Conditionswill cause the change oil message to illumi-nate more frequently. Have your vehicle ser-viced as soon as possible, within the next500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil changeindicator message after completing the sched-uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change isperformed by someone other than your autho-rized dealer, the message can be reset byreferring to the steps described under “Instru-ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To KnowYour Instrument Panel” in this guide.

NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil changeintervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km)or twelve months, whichever comes first.

Engine Oil Filter Replacement

Residual oil in the housing may spill from thehousing when the new filter is installed if theresidual oil is not either removed from thehousing or enough time has not elapsed toallow the oil to drain back into the engine.When servicing the oil filter on this engine,carefully remove the filter and use a suctiongun to remove any residual oil left in thehousing or wait about 30 minutes for the oilto drain back into the engine.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level

• Check windshield washer fluid level

• Check the tire inflation pressures and lookfor unusual wear or damage

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser-voir, brake master cylinder, and fill as needed

• Check function of all interior and exteriorlights

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

232

Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up ToB5 Biodiesel

Required Maintenance

Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the follow-ing pages for required maintenance.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:• Change oil and filter.• Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.• Drain water from fuel filter assembly.• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.• Inspect exhaust system.• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.

At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:• Change fuel filter.

233

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

10,0

00

20,0

00

30,0

00

40,0

00

50,0

00

60,0

00

70,0

00

80,0

00

90,0

00

100,

000

110,

000

120,

000

130,

000

140,

000

150,

000

Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

16,0

00

32,0

00

48,0

00

64,0

00

80,0

00

96,0

00

112,

000

128,

000

144,

000

160,

000

176,

000

192,

000

208,

000

224,

000

240,

000

Additional Inspections

Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X

Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X

Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehiclefor police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. X X X X X X X

Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X

Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X

Additional Maintenance

Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Replace fuel filters and drain water from the fuel filter assembly. Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and must not exceed20,000 miles (32 000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5.

Replace engine air filter. X X X X X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. X X

Replace accessory drive belt(s). X

Change transfer case fluid. X

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

234

WARNING!



Additional Maintenance — B6 ToB20 Biodiesel

NOTE:

• Under no circumstances should oil changeintervals exceed 8,000 miles (12 875 km)or six months, whichever comes first whenusing Biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).

• The owner is required to monitor mileagefor B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oilchange indicator system does not reflectthe use of biofuels.

• Fuel filter change interval is maintained atevery second oil change. This is especiallyimportant with biodiesel usage.

235

ENGINE COMPARTMENT3.6L Engine

1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir4 — Engine Oil Filter Access 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir5 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

236

5.7L Engine

1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal

237

6.2L Supercharged Engine

1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick3 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal6 — Air Cleaner Filter

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

238

6.4L Engine

1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal

239

3.0L Diesel Engine

1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Coolant Pressure Reservoir4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

240

Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine

To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’sengine, the engine oil must be maintained atthe correct level. Check the oil level at regularintervals, such as every fuel stop. The besttime to check the engine oil level is about fiveminutes after a fully warmed up engine isshut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on levelground will improve the accuracy of the oillevel readings. Always maintain the oil levelwithin the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Addingone quart of oil when the reading is at thebottom of the SAFE zone will result in areading at the top of the safe zone on theseengines.

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcasewill cause aeration or loss of oil pressure.This could damage your engine.

Checking Oil Level — 3.0 Diesel Engine

To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle'sengine, the engine oil must be maintained atthe correct level. Check the oil level at regularintervals. The best time to check the oil levelis before starting the engine after it has beenparked overnight. When checking oil afteroperating the engine, first ensure the engineis at full operating temperature, then wait forfive minutes after engine shutdown to checkthe oil.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on levelground will improve the accuracy of the oillevel readings. Add oil only when the level onthe dipstick is below the “MIN” mark. Thetotal capacity from the MIN mark to the MAXmark is 1 qt (1 L).

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcasewill cause oil aeration or loss of oil pres-sure. This could damage your engine.

NOTE:It is possible for your oil level to be slightlyhigher than a previous check. This would bedue to diesel fuel that may temporarily be inthe crankcase due to operation of the dieselparticulate filter regeneration strategy. Thisfuel will evaporate out under normal opera-tion.

Never operate the engine with oil level belowthe “MIN” mark or above the upper “MAX”mark.

Adding Washer Fluid

The instrument cluster display will indicatewhen the washer fluid level is low. When thesensor detects a low fluid level, the wind-shield will light on the vehicle graphic outlineand the “WASHER FLUID LOW” messagewill be displayed.

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washersand the rear window washer is shared. Thefluid reservoir is located in the engine com-partment, be sure to check the fluid level atregular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-

241

shield washer solvent only (not radiator anti-freeze). When refilling the washer fluid reser-voir, take some washer fluid and apply it to acloth or towel and wipe clean the wiperblades, this will help blade performance. Toprevent freeze-up of your windshield washersystem in cold weather, select a solution ormixture that meets or exceeds the tempera-ture range of your climate. This rating infor-mation can be found on most washer fluidcontainers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washersolvents are flammable. They could igniteand burn you. Care must be exercisedwhen filling or working around the washersolution.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water,nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solutionand can burn or even blind you. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your eyes,skin, or clothing. Do not lean over abattery when attaching clamps. If acidsplashes in eyes or on skin, flush thearea immediately with large amounts ofwater. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce-dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” forfurther information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.Keep flame or sparks away from thebattery. Do not use a booster battery orany other booster source with an outputgreater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cableclamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cableson the battery that the positive cable isattached to the positive post and thenegative cable is attached to the nega-tive post. Battery posts are marked posi-tive (+) and negative (-) and are identi-fied on the battery case. Cable clampsshould be tight on the terminal postsand free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the bat-tery is in the vehicle, disconnect bothvehicle battery cables before connectingthe charger to the battery. Do not use a“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

DEALER SERVICEYour authorized dealer has the qualified ser-vice personnel, special tools, and equipmentto perform all service operations in an expertmanner. Service Manuals are available whichinclude detailed service information for yourvehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals be-fore attempting any procedure yourself.

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

242

NOTE:Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems may void your warranty and could resultin civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on oraround a motor vehicle. Only do servicework for which you have the knowledgeand the proper equipment. If you have anydoubt about your ability to perform a ser-vice job, take your vehicle to a competentmechanic.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air con-ditioner should be checked and serviced byan authorized dealer at the start of each warmseason. This service should include cleaningof the condenser fins and a performance test.Drive belt tension should also be checked atthis time.

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressorlubricants approved by the manufac-turer for your air conditioning system.Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-mable and can explode, injuring you.Other unapproved refrigerants or lubri-cants can cause the system to fail, re-quiring costly repairs. Refer to WarrantyInformation Book, for further warrantyinformation.

• The air conditioning system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidrisk of personal injury or damage to thesystem, adding refrigerant or any repairrequiring lines to be disconnectedshould be done by an experienced tech-nician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your airconditioning system as the chemicals candamage your air conditioning components.Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

Air Conditioning Filter Replacement(A/C Air Filter)

Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this sec-tion for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Do not remove the cabin air filter while thevehicle is running, or while the ignition isin the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With thecabin air filter removed and the bloweroperating, the blower can contact handsand may propel dirt and debris into youreyes, resulting in personal injury.

243

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh airinlet behind the glove compartment. Performthe following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and removeall contents.

2. There are glove compartment travel stopson both sides of the glove compartmentdoor, partially close the glove compart-ment door and push inward to release theglove compartment travel stop on one sideand repeat this procedure for the oppositeside.

3. Pull the right hand side of the glove com-partment door toward the rear of the ve-hicle to disengage the glove compartmentdoor from its hinges.

NOTE:When disengaging the glove compartmentdoor from its hinges, there will be someresistance.

4. With the glove compartment door loose,remove the glove compartment tensiontether and tether clip by sliding the cliptoward the face of the glove compartmentdoor and lifting the clip out of glove com-partment door.

5. Remove the filter cover by disengagingthe retaining tab and mid way snap thatsecures the filter cover to the HVAC hous-

ing. Disengage the mid way snap by pull-ing the door outward. Unhinge the filtercover on the right side to fully remove thecover.

6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling itstraight out of the housing.

Glove Compartment

1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether3 — Glove Compartment Door

A/C Air Filter Cover

1 — Retaining Tab2 — Mid Way Snap3 — Filter Cover Hinge

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

244

7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow onthe filter pointing toward the floor. Wheninstalling the filter cover, make sure theretaining tabs fully engage the cover.

CAUTION!

The cabin air filter is identified with anarrow to indicate airflow direction throughthe filter. Failure to properly install thefilter will result in the need to replace itmore often.

8. Reinstall the glove compartment door onthe glove compartment door hinge andreattach the glove compartment tensiontether by inserting the tether clip in theglove compartment and sliding the clipaway from the face of the glove compart-ment door.

9. Push the door to the near closed positionto reengage the glove compartment travelstops.

NOTE:Ensure the glove compartment door hingesand glove compartment travel stops are fullyengaged.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper bladesand the windshield periodically with a spongeor soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner.This will remove accumulations of salt or roadfilm.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for longperiods may cause deterioration of the wiperblades. Always use washer fluid when usingthe wipers to remove salt or dirt from a drywindshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frostor ice from the windshield. Keep the bladerubber out of contact with petroleum prod-ucts such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE:Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de-pending on geographical area and frequencyof use. Poor performance of blades may bepresent with chattering, marks, water linesor wet spots. If any of these conditions arepresent, clean the wiper blades or replace asnecessary.

The wiper blades and wiper arms should beinspected periodically, not just when wiperperformance problems are experienced. Thisinspection should include the followingpoints:

• Wear Or Uneven Edges

• Foreign Material

• Hardening Or Cracking

• Deformation Or Fatigue

If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,replace the affected wiper arm or blade with anew unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiperarm or blade that is damaged.

Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

CAUTION!

Do not allow the wiper arm to spring backagainst the glass without the wiper bladein place or the glass may be damaged.

245

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper bladeoff of the glass, until the wiper arm is inthe full up position.

2. To disengage the wiper blade from thewiper arm, flip up the release tab on the

wiper blade and while holding the wiperarm with one hand, slide the wiper bladedown towards the base of the wiper arm.

3. With the wiper blade disengaged, removethe wiper blade from the wiper arm byholding the wiper arm with one hand and

separating the wiper blade from the wiperarm with the other hand (move the wiperblade toward the right side of the vehicleto separate the wiper blade from the wiperarm).

4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In LockedPosition

1 — Wiper2 — Release Tab3 — Wiper Arm

Wiper Blade With Release Tab InUnlocked Position

1 — Wiper Blade2 — Release Tab3 — Wiper Arm

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm

1 — Wiper Blade2 — Release Tab3 — Wiper Arm

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

246

Installing The Front Wipers

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, untilthe wiper arm is in the full up position.

2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on thetip of the wiper arm with the wiper releasetab open and the blade side of the wiperfacing up and away from the windshield.

3. Insert the hook on the tip of the armthrough the opening in the wiper bladeunder the release tab.

4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook onthe wiper arm and rotate the wiper bladeuntil it is flush against the wiper arm. Folddown the latch release tab and snap it intoits locked position. Latch engagement willbe accompanied by an audible click.

5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away

from the glass to allow the rear wiperblade to be raised off of the glass.

NOTE:The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raisedoff the glass unless the wiper arm pivot

cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fullyraise the rear wiper arm without unsnap-ping the wiper arm pivot cap may damagethe vehicle.

2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.

3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiperarm, grasp the bottom end of the wiperblade nearest to wiper arm with your righthand. With your left hand hold the wiperarm as you pull the wiper blade away fromthe wiper arm past its stop far enough tounsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from thereceptacle on the end of the wiper arm.

Rear Wiper

1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap2 — Wiper Arm3 — Wiper Blade

Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position

1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap2 — Wiper Arm3 — Wiper Blade

247

NOTE:Resistance will be accompanied by anaudible snap.

4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiperblade, move the wiper blade upward andaway from the wiper arm to disengage.

5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm ontothe glass.

Installing The Rear Wiper

1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away fromthe glass to allow the rear wiper blade to beraised off of the glass.

NOTE:The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raisedoff the glass unless the wiper arm pivotcap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fullyraise the rear wiper arm without unsnap-ping the wiper arm pivot cap may damagethe vehicle.

2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.

3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into theopening on the end of the wiper arm. Grabthe bottom end of the wiper arm with onehand, and press the wiper blade flush withthe wiper arm until it snaps into place.

4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass andsnap the wiper arm pivot cap back intoplace.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fanmotor lead before working near the ra-diator cooling fan.

• You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steamfrom your radiator. If you see or hearsteam coming from under the hood, donot open the hood until the radiator hashad time to cool. Never open a coolingsystem pressure cap when the radiatoror coolant bottle is hot.

• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelryaway from the radiator cooling fan whenthe hood is raised. The fan starts auto-matically and may start at any time,whether the engine is running or not.

• When working near the radiator coolingfan, disconnect the fan motor lead orturn the ignition to the OFF mode. Thefan is temperature controlled and canstart at any time the ignition is in the ONmode.

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm

1 — Wiper Arm2 — Wiper Blade

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

248

WARNING!• You or others can be badly burned by hot

engine coolant (antifreeze) or steamfrom your radiator. If you see or hearsteam coming from under the hood, donot open the hood until the radiator hashad time to cool. Never try to open acooling system pressure cap when theradiator is hot.

Engine Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec-tion every 12 months (before the onset offreezing weather, where applicable). If theengine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the sys-tem should be drained, flushed, and refilledwith fresh OAT coolant (conforming toMS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Checkthe front of the A/C condenser for any accu-mulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, cleanby gently spraying water from a garden hosevertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the engine cooling system hoses forbrittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, andtightness of the connection at the coolant

recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the en-tire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THECOOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THECOOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance,all brake system components should be in-spected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte-nance Plan” in this section for the propermaintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failureand possibly a collision. Driving with yourfoot resting or riding on the brake pedalcan result in abnormally high brake tem-peratures, excessive lining wear, and pos-sible brake damage. You would not haveyour full braking capacity in an emergency.

Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level of the master cylinder shouldbe checked whenever the vehicle is serviced,or immediately if the brake system warning

light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bringlevel within the designated marks on the sideof the reservoir of the brake master cylinder.Be sure to clean the top of the master cylin-der area before removing cap. With discbrakes, fluid level can be expected to fall asthe brake pads wear. Brake fluid level shouldbe checked when pads are replaced. If thebrake fluid is abnormally low, check the sys-tem for leaks.

Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-cal Specifications” for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer's recommendedbrake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-cants” in “Technical Specifications” forfurther information. Using the wrongtype of brake fluid can severely damageyour brake system and/or impair its per-formance. The proper type of brake fluidfor your vehicle is also identified on theoriginal factory installed hydraulic mas-ter cylinder reservoir.

249

WARNING!• To avoid contamination from foreign

matter or moisture, use only new brakefluid or fluid that has been in a tightlyclosed container. Keep the master cylin-der reservoir cap secured at all times.Brake fluid in a open container absorbsmoisture from the air resulting in a lowerboiling point. This may cause it to boilunexpectedly during hard or prolongedbraking, resulting in sudden brake fail-ure. This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir canresult in spilling brake fluid on hot en-gine parts, causing the brake fluid tocatch fire. Brake fluid can also damagepainted and vinyl surfaces, care shouldbe taken to avoid its contact with thesesurfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid tocontaminate the brake fluid. Brake sealcomponents could be damaged, causingpartial or complete brake failure. Thiscould result in a collision.


Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory anddoes not require adjustment under normaloperating conditions. Routine fluid levelchecks are not required; therefore the trans-mission has no dipstick. Your authorizeddealer can check your transmission fluidlevel using special service tools. If you noticefluid leakage or transmission malfunction,visit your authorized dealer immediately tohave the transmission fluid level checked.Operating the vehicle with an improper fluidlevel can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visityour authorized dealer immediately. Se-vere transmission damage may occur. Yourauthorized dealer has the proper tools toadjust the fluid level accurately.

RAISING THE VEHICLEIn the case where it is necessary to raise thevehicle, go to an authorized dealer or servicestation.

TIRESTire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects ofthe following information: Tire Markings, TireIdentification Numbers, Tire Terminology andDefinitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

250

Tire Markings NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is basedon U.S. design standards. P-Metric tireshave the letter “P” molded into the sidewallpreceding the size designation. Example:P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based onEuropean design standards. Tires designedto this standard have the tire size moldedinto the sidewall beginning with the sec-tion width. The letter "P" is absent fromthis tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing isbased on U.S. design standards. The sizedesignation for LT-Metric tires is the sameas for P-Metric tires except for the letters“LT” that are molded into the sidewallpreceding the size designation. Example:LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for tem-porary emergency use only. Temporary highpressure compact spare tires have the letter“T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preced-ing the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.design standards and it begins with thetire diameter molded into the sidewall.Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOTSafety Stan-dards Code(TIN)

4 — MaximumLoad

2 — SizeDesignation

5 — MaximumPressure

3 — ServiceDescription

6 — Treadwear,Traction andTemperatureGrades

251

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code• "R" means radial construction, or• "D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

252

EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 = Load Index• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure,

vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or• LL = Light load tire or• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

253

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides ofthe tire; however, the date code may only beon one side. Tires with white sidewalls willhave the full TIN, including the date code,

located on the white sidewall side of the tire.Look for the TIN on the outboard side of blacksidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. Ifthe TIN is not found on the outboard side,then you will find it on the inboard side of thetire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for

highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)• 03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)• 01 means the year 2001• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.

Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

254

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the frontdoor.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has notbeen driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sittingfor a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (poundsper square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflationpressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tireplacard.

Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loadingcapacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflationpressures.

255

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:The proper cold tire inflation pressure islisted on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rearedge of the driver's side door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire,including the spare tire (if equipped), at leastmonthly and inflate to the recommendedpressure for your vehicle.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important informationabout the:

1. Number of people that can be carried inthe vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire mustnot exceed the load carrying capacity of thetire on your vehicle. You will not exceed thetire's load carrying capacity if you adhere tothe loading conditions, tire size, and cold tireinflation pressures specified on the Tire andLoading Information placard in “VehicleLoading” in the “Starting And Operating”section of this manual.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

256

NOTE:Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for thefront and rear axles must not be exceeded.

To determine the maximum loading condi-tions of your vehicle, locate the statement“The combined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”on the Tire and Loading Information placard.The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if appli-cable) should never exceed the weight refer-enced here.

Steps For Determining Correct LoadLimit—

(1) Locate the statement “The com-bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs. and therewill be five 150 lb passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kgand there will be five 68 kg passengers inyour vehicle, the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

257

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. The following table shows exampleson how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage,

and towing capacities of your vehicle withvarying seating configurations and numberand size of occupants. This table is for illus-tration purposes only and may not be accu-rate for the seating and load carry capacity ofyour vehicle.

• For the following example, the combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

258

WARNING!Overloading of your tires is dangerous.Overloading can cause tire failure, affectvehicle handling, and increase your stop-ping distance. Use tires of the recom-mended load capacity for your vehicle.Never overload them.

Tires — General InformationTire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential tothe safe and satisfactory operation of yourvehicle. Four primary areas are affected byimproper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerousand can cause collisions.

WARNING!• Underinflation increases tire flexing and

can result in overheating and tire failure.• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to

cushion shock. Objects on the road andchuckholes can cause damage that re-sult in tire failure.

• Overinflated or underinflated tires canaffect vehicle handling and can fail sud-denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steer-ing problems. You could lose control ofyour vehicle.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side ofthe vehicle to the other can cause thevehicle to drift to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated tothe recommended cold tire inflationpressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affectthe stability of the vehicle and can produce afeeling of sluggish response or over respon-siveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to sidemay cause erratic and unpredictable steer-ing response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side maycause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rollingresistance resulting in higher fuel consump-tion.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures cancause abnormal wear patterns and reducedtread life, resulting in the need for earlier tirereplacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarringand uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure islisted on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edgeof the driver's side door.

259

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a goodquality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do notmake a visual judgement when determiningproper inflation. Tires may look properlyinflated even when they are under-inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visibledamage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.This will prevent moisture and dirt fromentering the valve stem, which could dam-age the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placardare always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Coldtire inflation pressure is defined as the tirepressure after the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours, or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum ofthree hours. The cold tire inflation pressuremust not exceed the maximum inflation pres-sure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject toa wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tirepressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperaturechange. Keep this in mind when checkingtire pressure inside a garage, especially in theWinter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F(20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F(0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressureshould be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), whichequals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) forthis outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOTreduce this normal pressure build up or yourtire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safespeeds and within posted speed limits.Where speed limits or conditions are suchthat the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,maintaining correct tire inflation pressure isvery important. Increased tire pressure and

reduced vehicle loading may be required forhigh-speed vehicle operation. Refer to yourauthorized tire dealer or original equipmentvehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflationpressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle undermaximum load is dangerous. The addedstrain on your tires could cause them tofail. You could have a serious collision. Donot drive a vehicle loaded to the maximumcapacity at continuous speeds above75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other typesof tires on your vehicle will cause yourvehicle to handle poorly. The instabilitycould cause a collision. Always use radialply tires in sets of four. Never combinethem with other types of tires.

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

260

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may berepaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section ofyour tire (sidewall damage is not repair-able).

• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of aninch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire re-pairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires thathave experienced a loss of pressure should bereplaced immediately with another Run Flattire of identical size and service description(Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) aftera rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapidloss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flatmode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tireinflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the

run flat mode it has limited driving capabili-ties and needs to be replaced immediately.A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicleloaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer whilea tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section formore information.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice con-ditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheelsabove 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “InCase Of Emergency” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.Forces generated by excessive wheelspeeds may cause tire damage or failure.A tire could explode and injure someone.Do not spin your vehicle's wheels fasterthan 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than

WARNING!30 seconds continuously when you arestuck, and do not let anyone near a spin-ning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the originalequipment tires to help you in determiningwhen your tires should be replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottomof the tread grooves. They will appear asbands when the tread depth becomes a1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is

Tire Tread

1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire

261

worn to the tread wear indicators, the tireshould be replaced. Refer to “ReplacementTires” in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent uponvarying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflationpressures can cause uneven wear patternsto develop across the tire tread. These ab-normal wear patterns will reduce tread life,resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-ment.

• Distance driven.

• Performance tires, tires with a speed ratingof V or higher, and Summer tires typicallyhave a reduced tread life. Rotation of thesetires per the vehicle scheduled mainte-nance is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replacedafter six years, regardless of the remainingtread. Failure to follow this warning can

WARNING!result in sudden tire failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting inserious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry placewith as little exposure to light as possible.Protect tires from contact with oil, grease,and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a bal-ance of many characteristics. They should beinspected regularly for wear and correct coldtire inflation pressures. The manufacturerstrongly recommends that you use tiresequivalent to the originals in size, quality andperformance when replacement is needed.Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indi-cators” in this section. Refer to the Tire andLoading Information placard or the VehicleCertification Label for the size designation ofyour tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbolfor your tire will be found on the originalequipment tire sidewall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found inthe “Tire Safety Information” section of thismanual for more information relating to theLoad Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing justone tire can seriously affect your vehicle’shandling. If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specifications matchthose of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your autho-rized tire dealer or original equipment dealerwith any questions you may have on tirespecifications or capability. Failure to useequivalent replacement tires may adverselyaffect the safety, handling, and ride of yourvehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,or speed rating other than that specifiedfor your vehicle. Some combinations ofunapproved tires and wheels maychange suspension dimensions and per-formance characteristics, resulting in

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

262

WARNING!changes to steering, handling, and brak-ing of your vehicle. This can cause un-predictable handling and stress to steer-ing and suspension components. Youcould lose control and have a collisionresulting in serious injury or death. Useonly the tire and wheel sizes with loadratings approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load indexor capacity, other than what was origi-nally equipped on your vehicle. Using atire with a smaller load index could re-sult in tire overloading and failure. Youcould lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tireshaving adequate speed capability canresult in sudden tire failure and loss ofvehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of adifferent size may result in false speedom-eter and odometer readings.

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all sea-sons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).Traction levels may vary between different allseason tires. All season tires can be identifiedby the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation onthe tire sidewall. Use all season tires only insets of four; failure to do so may adverselyaffect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wetand dry conditions, and are not intended tobe driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle isequipped with Summer tires, be aware thesetires are not designed for Winter or colddriving conditions. Install Winter tires on yourvehicle when ambient temperatures are lessthan 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered withice or snow. For more information, contact anauthorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all seasondesignation or mountain/snowflake symbolon the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only insets of four; failure to do so may adverselyaffect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice con-ditions. You could lose vehicle control,resulting in severe injury or death. Drivingtoo fast for conditions also creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use ofsnow tires during the Winter. Snow tires canbe identified by a “mountain/snowflake”symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires,select tires equivalent insize and type to the origi-nal equipment tires. Usesnow tires only in sets offour; failure to do so mayadversely affect the safety

and handling of your vehicle.

263

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratingsthan what was originally equipped with yourvehicle and should not be operated at sus-tained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). Forspeeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer tooriginal equipment or an authorized tire dealerfor recommended safe operating speeds, load-ing and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance onice, skid and traction capability on wet or drysurfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studdedtires; therefore, local laws should be checkedbefore using these tire types.

Spare Tires — If EquippedRefer to the applicable section in the appro-priate chapter in the Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents) for further information.

For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kitinstead of a spare tire, please refer to“Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency”in your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi-

dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (CanadianResidents) for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance,do not take your vehicle through an auto-matic car wash with a compact or limiteduse temporary spare installed. Damage tothe vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped TireAnd Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sparetire and wheel equivalent in look and func-tion to the original equipment tire and wheelfound on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.This spare tire may be used in the tire rota-tion for your vehicle. If your vehicle has thisoption, refer to an authorized tire dealer forthe recommended tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emer-gency use only. You can identify if your ve-hicle is equipped with a compact spare bylooking at the spare tire description on the

Tire and Loading Information Placard locatedon the driver’s side door opening or on thesidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de-scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”preceding the size designation. Example:T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, theoriginal equipment tire should be repaired (orreplaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle atthe first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt tomount a conventional tire on the compactspare wheel, since the wheel is designedspecifically for the compact spare tire. Do notinstall more than one compact spare tire andwheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact and collapsible spares are fortemporary emergency use only. With thesespares, do not drive more than 50 mph(80 km/h). Temporary use spares havelimited tread life. When the tread is wornto the tread wear indicators, the temporary

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

264






WARNING!use spare tire needs to be replaced. Besure to follow the warnings, which apply toyour spare. Failure to do so could resultin spare tire failure and loss of vehiclecontrol.

Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped

The collapsible spare is for temporary emer-gency use only. You can identify if your ve-hicle is equipped with a collapsible spare bylooking at the spare tire description on theTire and Loading Information Placard locatedon the driver’s side door opening or on thesidewall of the tire.

Collapsible spare tire description example:165/80-17 101P.

Since this tire has limited tread life, theoriginal equipment tire should be repaired (orreplaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle atthe first opportunity.

Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel isproperly installed to the vehicle. Inflate thecollapsible tire using the electric air pumpbefore lowering the vehicle.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt tomount a conventional tire on the collapsiblespare wheel, since the wheel is designedspecifically for the collapsible spare tire.

WARNING!

Compact and Collapsible spares are fortemporary emergency use only. With thesespares, do not drive more than 50 mph(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-ited tread life. When the tread is worn tothe tread wear indicators, the temporaryuse spare tire needs to be replaced. Besure to follow the warnings, which apply toyour spare. Failure to do so could result inspare tire failure and loss of vehicle con-trol.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emer-gency use only. This tire may look like theoriginally equipped tire on the front or rearaxle of your vehicle, but it is not. This sparetire may have limited tread life. When thetread is worn to the tread wear indicators, thetemporary use full size spare tire needs to be

replaced. Since it is not the same as youroriginal equipment tire, replace (or repair)the original equipment tire and reinstall onthe vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporaryemergency use only. This tire is identified bya label located on the limited use sparewheel. This label contains the driving limita-tions for this spare. This tire may look like theoriginal equipped tire on the front or rear axleof your vehicle, but it is not. Installation ofthis limited use spare tire affects vehiclehandling. Since it is not the same as youroriginal equipment tire, replace (or repair)the original equipment tire and reinstall onthe vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency useonly. Installation of this limited use sparetire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,do not drive more than the speed listed onthe limited use spare wheel. Keep inflatedto the cold tire inflation pressures listed on

265

WARNING!your Tire and Loading Information Placardlocated on the driver’s side B-Pillar or therear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace(or repair) the original equipment tire atthe first opportunity and reinstall it on yourvehicle. Failure to do so could result in lossof vehicle control.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi-num and chrome plated wheels, should becleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soapand water to maintain their luster and to pre-vent corrosion. Wash wheels with the samesoap solution recommended for the body of thevehicle.

Your wheels are susceptible to deteriorationcaused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesiumchloride, calcium chloride, etc., and otherroad chemicals used to melt ice or controldust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or spongeand mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not

use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. Theycan damage the wheel’s protective coatingthat helps keep them from corroding andtarnishing.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washesthat use acidic solutions or strong alkalineadditives or harsh brushes. Many aftermar-ket wheel cleaners and automatic carwashes may damage the wheel's protectivefinish. Such damage is not covered by theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only carwash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner orequivalent is recommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includ-ing excessive brake dust, care must be taken inthe selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemi-cals and equipment to prevent damage to thewheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or MoparChrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidiccleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, abristle brush, metal polishes or ovencleaner. These products may damage thewheel's protective finish. Such damage isnot covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Only car wash soap, MoparWheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-mended.

NOTE:If you intend parking or storing your vehiclefor an extended period after cleaning thewheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicleand apply the brakes to remove the waterdroplets from the brake components. Thisactivity will remove the red rust on the brakerotors and prevent vehicle vibration whenbraking.

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

266

Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or LowGloss Clear Coat Wheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with thesespecialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheelcleaners, abrasives, or polishing com-pounds. They will permanently damagethis finish and such damage is not coveredby the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAPAND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Usedon a regular basis; this is all that is re-quired to maintain this finish.

Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — Non-SRT

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-dations to guard against damage.

• Traction device must be of proper size forthe tire, as recommended by the tractiondevice manufacturer.

• Install on Rear Tires Only

• Due to limited clearance, Thule XG-12 Proor equivalent is recommended on P245/70R17, 265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S,Snow) between front and rear axles cancause unpredictable handling. You couldlose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,observe the following precautions:• Because of restricted traction device

clearance between tires and other sus-pension components, it is important thatonly traction devices in good conditionare used. Broken devices can cause se-rious damage. Stop the vehicle immedi-ately if noise occurs that could indicatedevice breakage. Remove the damagedparts of the device before further use.

CAUTION!• Install device as tightly as possible and

then retighten after driving about ½ mile(0.8 km).

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns

and large bumps, especially with aloaded vehicle.

• Do not drive for a prolonged period ondry pavement.

• Observe the traction device manufactur-er’s instructions on the method of instal-lation, operating speed, and conditionsfor use. Always use the suggested oper-ating speed of the device manufacturer’sif it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Do not use traction devices on a com-pact spare tire.

267

Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — SRT

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-dations to guard against damage.

• Traction device must be of proper size forthe tire, as recommended by the tractiondevice manufacturer.

• Install on Rear Tires Only

• Due to limited clearance, RUD-GRIP 4X4 orEquivalent is recommended on 295/45R20tires.

WARNING!Using tires of different size and type(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axlescan cause unpredictable handling. Youcould lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,observe the following precautions:• Because of restricted traction device

clearance between tires and other sus-

CAUTION!pension components, it is importantthat only traction devices in good condi-tion are used. Broken devices can causeserious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-diately if noise occurs that could indi-cate device breakage. Remove the dam-aged parts of the device before furtheruse.

• Install device as tightly as possible andthen retighten after driving about ½ mile(0.8 km).

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns

and large bumps, especially with aloaded vehicle.

• Do not drive for a prolonged period ondry pavement.

• Observe the traction device manufactur-er’s instructions on the method of instal-lation, operating speed, and conditionsfor use. Always use the suggested oper-ating speed of the device manufacturer’sif it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Do not use traction devices on a com-pact spare tire.

Tire Rotation Recommendations

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicleoperate at different loads and perform differ-ent steering, handling, and braking func-tions. For these reasons, they wear at unequalrates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rota-tion of tires. The benefits of rotation areespecially worthwhile with aggressive treaddesigns such as those on On/Off-Road typetires. Rotation will increase tread life, help tomaintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels,and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for theproper maintenance intervals. More frequentrotation is permissible if desired. The reasonsfor any rapid or unusual wear should becorrected prior to rotation being performed.

NOTE:The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System willautomatically locate the pressure values dis-played in the correct vehicle position followinga tire rotation.

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

268

The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross” shown in the following diagram.

DEPARTMENT OFTRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIRE QUALITYGRADESThe following tire grading categorieswere established by the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration. Thespecific grade rating assigned by thetire's manufacturer in each category isshown on the sidewall of the tires onyour vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must con-form to Federal safety requirements inaddition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparativerating, based on the wear rate of thetire when tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified government testcourse. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100. The rela-tive performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may depart signifi-cantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices,and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thesegrades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement, as measuredunder controlled conditions on speci-fied government test surfaces of as-phalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-aheadbraking traction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

Tire Rotation

269

Temperature Grades

The Temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire's resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heat,when tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel.

Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance, which all pas-senger vehicle tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-sent higher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel, than theminimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is prop-erly inflated and not overloaded. Ex-cessive speed, under-inflation, orexcessive loading, either separatelyor in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

INTERIORSSeats And Fabric Parts

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-stery and carpeting.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaningpurposes. Many are potentially flam-mable, and if used in closed areas theymay cause respiratory harm.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts withchemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. Thiswill weaken the fabric. Sun damage can alsoweaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Do not removethe belts from the vehicle to wash them. Drywith a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed orworn or if the buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in acollision and leave you with no protection.Inspect the belt system periodically, check-ing for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damagedparts must be replaced immediately. Do notdisassemble or modify the system. Seatbelt assemblies must be replaced after acollision if they have been damaged (i.e.,bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

SERV

ICIN

GAN

DM

AIN

TEN

ANCE

270

Plastic And Coated PartsUse Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

CAUTION!

• Direct contact of air fresheners, insectrepellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-tizers to the plastic, painted, or deco-rated surfaces of the interior may causepermanent damage. Wipe away immedi-ately.

• Damage caused by these type of prod-ucts may not be covered by your NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in thisvehicle are molded in clear plastic. Whencleaning the lenses, care must be taken toavoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soapsolution may be used, but do not use highalcohol content or abrasive cleaners. Ifsoap is used, wipe clean with a cleandamp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Leather PartsMopar Total Clean is specifically recom-mended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preservedby regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasiveand damage the leather upholstery andshould be removed promptly with a dampcloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easilywith a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Careshould be taken to avoid soaking your leatherupholstery with any liquid. Please do not usepolishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, de-tergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to cleanyour leather upholstery. Application of aleather conditioner is not required to main-tain the original condition.

NOTE:If equipped with light colored leather, it tendsto show any foreign material, dirt, and fabricdye transfer more so than darker colors. Theleather is designed for easy cleaning, andFCA recommends Mopar total care leathercleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leatherseats as needed.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-basedand/or Ketone based cleaning products toclean leather seats, as damage to the seatmay result.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on aregular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, orany commercial household-type glasscleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.Use caution when cleaning the inside rearwindow equipped with electric defrosters orwindows equipped with radio antennas. Donot use scrapers or other sharp instrumentsthat may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spraycleaner on the towel or cloth that you areusing. Do not spray cleaner directly on themirror.

271

272


IDENTIFICATION DATA . . . . . . .274Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . .274

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUESPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . .275Torque Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .275

FUEL REQUIREMENTS —GASOLINE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . .2763.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2765.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2766.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine . .277Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . .277

FUEL REQUIREMENTS –DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . .277Diesel Fuel Specifications . . . . . . . .278

FLUID CAPACITIES — NON SRT . .279

FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT . . . . .279

FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL . . .280

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —NON-SRT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —SRT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —3.0L DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . .284Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285

MOPAR ACCESSORIES . . . . . . .286Authentic Accessories By Mopar . . . . .286


273

IDENTIFICATION DATAVehicle Identification Number

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) isfound on a label located on the left frontcorner of the instrument panel pad, visiblefrom outside of the vehicle through the wind-shield. This number also is stamped on theright front floor, behind the right front seat.Move the right front seat forward to allowbetter viewing of the stamped VIN. This num-ber also appears on the Automobile Informa-tion Disclosure Label affixed to a window onyour vehicle. Save this label for a convenientrecord of your vehicle identification numberand optional equipment. NOTE:

It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VIN Location Right Front Body VIN LocationTECH

NIC

ALSP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S

274

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUESPECIFICATIONSProper lug nut/bolt torque is very important toensure that the wheel is properly mounted tothe vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re-moved and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lugnuts/bolts should be torqued using a properlycalibrated torque wrench using a high qualitysix sided (hex) deep wall socket.

Torque SpecificationsBase Model Vehicle

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/Bolt Size

Lug Nut/Bolt Socket

Size130 Ft-Lbs(176 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm

SRT Model Vehicle

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/Bolt Size

Lug Nut/Bolt Socket

Size110 Ft-Lbs(149 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm

**Use only your authorized dealer recom-mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or removeany dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior tomounting the tire and remove any corrosionor loose particles.

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star patternuntil each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on thelug nut/bolt (do not insert it half way).

NOTE:If in doubt about the correct tightness, havethem checked with a torque wrench by yourauthorized dealer or service station.

After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle offthe jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fullyuntil the vehicle has been lowered. Failureto follow this warning may result in per-sonal injury.

Torque Pattern

275

FUEL REQUIREMENTS —GASOLINE ENGINE3.6L Engine

Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blendsgreater than 15% in this engine.

These engines are de-signed to meet allemissions regulationsand provide optimumfuel economy and per-formance when usinghigh quality unleaded“Regular” gasoline

having a posted octane number of 87 asspecified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use ofhigher octane “Premium” gasoline is not re-quired, as it will not provide any benefit over“Regular” gasoline in these engines.

While operating on gasoline with an octanenumber of 87, hearing a light knocking soundfrom the engine is not a cause for concern.However, if the engine is heard making aheavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num-ber lower than 87 can cause engine failureand may void or not be covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problemssuch as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-tions. If you experience these symptoms, tryanother brand of gasoline before consideringservice for the vehicle.

5.7L Engine


This engine is de-signed to meet allemissions regulationsand provide satisfac-tory fuel economy andperformance when us-ing high-quality un-leaded gasoline having

an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified bythe (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane“Plus” gasoline is recommended for opti-mum performance and fuel economy.

While operating on gasoline with an octanenumber of 87, hearing a light knocking soundfrom the engine is not a cause for concern.However, if the engine is heard making aheavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num-ber lower than 87 can cause engine failureand may void or not be covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.


TECH

NIC

ALSP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S

276

6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine


These engines are de-signed to meet allemissions regulations,provide optimal fueleconomy and perfor-mance when usinghigh-quality unleaded“Premium” gasoline

having a posted octane number of 91 asspecified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline isrequired in these engines.

While operating on gasoline with the requiredoctane number, hearing a light knockingsound from the engine is not a cause forconcern. However, if the engine is heardmaking a heavy knocking sound, see yourdealer immediately. Use of gasoline with alower than recommended octane number cancause engine failure and may void or not becovered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.


Materials Added To Fuel

Designated TOP TIERDetergent Gasolinecontains a higher levelof detergents to furtheraide in minimizing en-gine and fuel system deposits. When avail-able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasolineis recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.comfor a list of TOP TIER Detergent GasolineRetailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaningagents should be avoided. Many of thesematerials intended for gum and varnish re-moval may contain active solvents or similaringredients. These can harm fuel system gas-ket and diaphragm materials.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS –DIESEL ENGINEFederal law requires that you must fuel thisvehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Dieselfuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibitsthe use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel(500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damageto the emissions control system.

Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputablesupplier in your vehicle. For most year-roundservice, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM(formerly known as the American Societyfor Testing and Materials) specificationD-975 Grade S15 will provide good perfor-mance. If the vehicle is exposed to extremecold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required tooperate at colder-than-normal conditions forprolonged periods, use climatized No. 2 die-sel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will providebetter protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.

277

http://www.toptiergas.com

WARNING!

Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuelblending agent. They can be unstable un-der certain conditions and hazardous orexplosive when mixed with diesel fuel.

Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of wa-ter. To prevent fuel system trouble, drain theaccumulated water from the fuel/water sepa-rator using the fuel/water separator drain pro-vided on the fuel filter housing. If you buygood quality fuel and follow the cold weatheradvice above, fuel conditioners should notbe required in your vehicle. If available inyour area, a high cetane “premium” dieselfuel may offer improved cold-starting andwarm-up performance.

CAUTION!

If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” re-mains on, DO NOT START engine beforeyou drain the water from the fuel filter(s)to avoid engine damage. Refer to“Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in“Servicing And Maintenance” in your Die-sel Supplement at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents)or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi-dents) for further information.

Diesel Fuel Specifications

This diesel engine has been developed totake advantage of the high energy contentand generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra LowSulfur diesel fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfurclimatized diesel fuels.

NOTE:

• If you accidentally fill the fuel tank withgasoline on your diesel vehicle, do not startthe engine. Damage to the engine and fuelsystem could occur. Please call your autho-rized dealer for service.

• A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meetingASTM specification D-975 may be usedwith your diesel engine without any adjust-ments to regular service schedules.

• Commercially available fuel additives arenot necessary for the proper operation ofyour diesel engine.

• No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel shouldonly be used where extended arctic condi-tions (-10°F or -23°C) exist.

TECH

NIC

ALSP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S

278




FLUID CAPACITIES — NON SRTU.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate)3.6L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.0 Liters5.7L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.0 LitersEngine Oil With Filter3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters5.7L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 LitersCooling System*3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula orequivalent) 10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters

5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula orequivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package 15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters

5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula orequivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package 16 Quarts 15.2 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUID CAPACITIES — SRTU.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate) 24.6 Gallons 93.0 LitersEngine Oil With Filter6.2 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633) 8.3 Quarts 7.8 Liters6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters

279

U.S. MetricCooling System*6.2L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula thatmeets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.) 14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters

6.2L Engine Intercooler (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 MileFormula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.) 4.0 Quarts 3.9 Liters

6.4 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula thatmeets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.) 16 Quarts 15.5 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESELU.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

3.0L Diesel Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 8 Gallons 30.3 Liters

Engine Oil With Filter

3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API CJ-4) 8 Quarts 7.7 Liters

Cooling System

3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine (Mopar Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 10 Year/150,000 MileFormula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)) 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters

TECH

NIC

ALSP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S

280

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — NON-SRTEngineComponent Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic AdditiveTechnology).

Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA MaterialStandard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap forcorrect SAE grade.

Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA MaterialStandard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap forcorrect SAE grade.

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.

Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.

Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).

Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze)other than specified Organic AdditiveTechnology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-freeze), may result in engine damageand may decrease corrosion protection.Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

CAUTION!gine coolant is different and should notbe mixed with Hybrid Organic AdditiveTechnology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-freeze) or any “globally compatible”coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT enginecoolant (antifreeze) is introduced into

CAUTION!the cooling system in an emergency, thecooling system will need to be drained,flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT cool-ant (conforming to MS.90032), by anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.

281

CAUTION!• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based

engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Donot use additional rust inhibitors or an-tirust products, as they may not be com-patible with the radiator engine coolantand may plug the radiator.

CAUTION!• This vehicle has not been designed for

use with propylene glycol-based enginecoolant (antifreeze). Use of propyleneglycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)is not recommended.

ChassisComponent Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use thecorrect fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.

Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I) We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.

Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II) We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.

Axle Differential (Rear) – With ElectronicLimited-Slip Differential (ELSD)

We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier.

Axle Differential (Rear) – Without ElectronicLimited-Slip Differential (ELSD)

We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3,SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

TECH

NIC

ALSP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S

282

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRTEngineComponent Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine PartEngine/Intercooler Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic

Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufac-

turer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API)categories of SN.The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oilmeeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).

ChassisComponent Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartAutomatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the

correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Selec-Track) We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.Axle Differential (Rear) – With ElectronicLimited-Slip Differential (ELSD)

We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with integrated frictionmodifier.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

283

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — 3.0L DIESEL ENGINEEngineComponent Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartEngine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic

Additive Technology).Engine Oil We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar or Shell Rotella that meets FCA

Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CJ-4 engine oil category is required.Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.Fuel Filters We recommend you use Mopar Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a fuel filter that does not

meet the manufacturers filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system lifeand reliability.

Fuel Selection Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that youmust fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) andprohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage tothe emissions control system. For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTMspecification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance. We recommend you use a blend of upto 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM specification D-975 with your diesel engine.This vehicle iscompatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than 20% biodiesel meeting ASTMspecification D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance intervals are followed as directed.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Mopar Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to theISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.

TECH

NIC

ALSP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S

284

NOTE:If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold(below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to operateat colder-than-normal conditions for pro-longed periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel

fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50%No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide betterprotection from fuel gelling or wax-pluggingof the fuel filters.

ChassisComponent Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartAutomatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the

correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I) We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II) We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.Axle Differential (Rear) – With ElectronicLimited-Slip Differential (ELSD)

We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifieradditive.

Axle Differential (Rear) – Without ElectronicLimited-Slip Differential (ELSD)

We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

285

MOPAR ACCESSORIESAuthentic Accessories By Mopar

In choosing Authentic Accessories you gainfar more than expressive style, premium pro-tection, or extreme entertainment, you alsobenefit from enhancing your vehicle withaccessories that have been thoroughly testedand factory-approved.

The following highlights just some of themany Authentic Jeep Accessories by Moparfeaturing a fit, finish, and functionality spe-cifically for your Jeep Grand Cherokee.

EXTERIOR:• Front End Cover • Window Air Deflectors • Molded Splash Guards• Wheels • Skid Plates • Tow Hooks• Tubular Side Steps • Hitch Receiver • Front Air Deflector

INTERIOR:• Carpet Floor Mats • Katzkin Leather Interiors • Cargo Net• All-weather Floor Mats • Footwell Lighting • Bright Pedal Kit• Cargo Barrier • Molded Cargo Tray • Door Sill Guards

TECH

NIC

ALSP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S

286

ELECTRONICS:• Remote Start • Mopar Connect • Rear View Camera• Park Distance Sensors

CARRIERS:• Sport Utility Bars • Roof Box Cargo Carrier • Roof Mount Bike Carrier• Roof Mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • Roof Mount Water Sports Carrier • Roof Mount Cargo Basket and Cargo Net

For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accesso-ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership oronline at mopar.com for U.S. residents andmopar.ca for Canadian residents.

NOTE:All parts are subject to availability.

287

http://www.mopar.com/

http://mopar.ca/

288

MULTIMEDIA

CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . .291

OFF ROAD PAGES —IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292Off Road Pages Status Bar . . . . . . . .292Vehicle Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293Pitch And Roll — If Equipped . . . . . .294Accessory Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294Selec-Terrain — If Equipped . . . . . . .294

TIPS CONTROLS ANDGENERAL INFORMATION . . . . .295Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . .295Reception Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . .295Care And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .296Anti-Theft Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .296

SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN —IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped(Available on Uconnect 4C NAV) . . . . .296SiriusXM Guardian Activation . . . . . .297Download The Uconnect App . . . . . . .298

Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4CNAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298Maintaining Your SiriusXM GuardianAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298Built-In Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features . .301

UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCHDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304Uconnect 4 At A Glance . . . . . . . . .304Personalized Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . .306Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Apple CarPlay Integration . . . . . . . . .309

UCONNECT 4C/4C NAVWITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY . . . . . .310Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance . . .310Personalized Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . .312Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314Apple CarPlay Integration . . . . . . . . .317

UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . .320

IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYERCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Audio Jack (AUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . .321

UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTER-TAINMENT (RSE) SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322Dual Video Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .323Blu-ray Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .323Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325Accessibility — If Equipped. . . . . . . .325

NAVIGATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326Changing The Navigation Voice PromptVolume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326Finding Points Of Interest . . . . . . . . .328Finding A Place By Spelling The Name . .328One-Step Voice Destination Entry . . . .328Setting Your Home Location. . . . . . . .328Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329Adding A Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

MULTIMEDIA

289

Taking A Detour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV) . . . . .330SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) . . . . . .330

UCONNECT PHONE . . . . . . . . . .331Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands FreeCalling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) YourMobile Phone To The UconnectSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Common Phone Commands(Examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336Mute (Or Unmute) MicrophoneDuring Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336Transfer Ongoing Call BetweenHandset And Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .336Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336Voice Command Tips . . . . . . . . . . . .337Changing The Volume . . . . . . . . . . .337

Using Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . .337Incoming Text Messages . . . . . . . . .338Helpful Tips And Common QuestionsTo Improve Bluetooth PerformanceWith Your Uconnect System . . . . . . .339

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITIONQUICK TIPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . .339Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . .340Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342Climate (4C/4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . .343Navigation (4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . .343SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) —If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Register (4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C NAV) . .344Mobile App (4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . .345SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) . . . . . .345Apple CarPlay — If Equipped . . . . . . .346Android Auto — If Equipped . . . . . . .346General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .347Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . .347

MU

LTIM

EDIA

290

CYBERSECURITYYour vehicle may be a connected vehicle andmay be equipped with both wired and wire-less networks. These networks allow your ve-hicle to send and receive information. Thisinformation allows systems and features inyour vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certainsecurity features to reduce the risk of unau-thorized and unlawful access to vehicle sys-tems and wireless communications. Vehiclesoftware technology continues to evolve overtime and FCA US LLC, working with its sup-pliers, evaluates and takes appropriate stepsas needed. Similar to a computer or otherdevices, your vehicle may require softwareupdates to improve the usability and perfor-mance of your systems or to reduce the po-tential risk of unauthorized and unlawful ac-cess to your vehicle systems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful accessto your vehicle systems may still exist, even ifthe most recent version of vehicle software(such as Uconnect software) is installed.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict allof the possible outcomes if your vehi-cle’s systems are breached. It may bepossible that vehicle systems, includingsafety related systems, could be im-paired or a loss of vehicle control couldoccur that may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card,or CD) into your vehicle if it came from atrusted source. Media of unknown origincould possibly contain malicious soft-ware, and if installed in your vehicle, itmay increase the possibility for vehiclesystems to be breached.

• As always, if you experience unusualvehicle behavior, take your vehicle toyour nearest authorized dealer immedi-ately.

NOTE:

• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact youdirectly regarding software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security andminimize the potential risk of a securitybreach, vehicle owners should:

– Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-update to learn about availableUconnect software updates.

– Only connect and use trusted mediadevices (e.g. personal mobile phones,USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communica-tions cannot be assured. Third parties mayunlawfully intercept information and privatecommunications without your consent. For fur-ther information, refer to “Data Collection &Privacy” in “Uconnect + SiriusXM Guardian”in your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplementand “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your In-strument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana-dian Residents).

291

www.driveuconnect.com/software-update

www.driveuconnect.com/software-update

www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html

www.owners.mopar.ca

OFF ROAD PAGES —IF EQUIPPEDYour vehicle is equipped with Off RoadPages, which provides the vehicle statuswhile operating on off road conditions. Itsupplies information relating to the vehicleride height, the status of the transfer case,the pitch and roll of the vehicle (if equipped),and the active Selec-Terrain mode.

To access Off Road Pages, press the “Apps”button on the touchscreen, and then select“Off Road Pages”.

Off Road Pages has the following selectablepages:

• Vehicle Dynamics

• Suspension

• Pitch and Roll — If Equipped

• Accessory Gauge

• Selec-Terrain — If Equipped

Off Road Pages Status BarThe Off Road Pages Status Bar is locatedalong the bottom of Off Road Pages and ispresent in each of the five selectable pageoptions. It provides continually updating in-formation for the following items:

• Current Transfer Case Status (only appearswhen in 4WD LOW)

• Current Selec-Terrain mode — If Equipped

• Current Latitude/Longitude

• Current Altitude of the vehicle

• Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Controland Selected Speed in MPH (km/h)

Main Menu1 — Off Road Pages App2 — Uconnect Apps Button

Status Bar

1 — Transfer Case Status (Only whenin 4WD LOW)2 — Selec-Terrain Mode — If Equipped3 — Current Latitude/Longitude4 — Current Altitude5 — Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Statusand Set Speed

MU

LTIM

EDIA

292

Vehicle Dynamics

The Vehicle Dynamics page displays informa-tion concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.

The following information is displayed:

• Steering angle in degrees

• Status of Transfer case

• Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped

Suspension

The Suspension page displays informationconcerning the vehicle’s suspension.

The following information is displayed:

• Suspension Articulation Indicator

• Current Ride Height Status — If Equipped– Normal– Off Road 1– Off Road 2– Entry/Exit– Aero

NOTE:The wheel articulation will be represented bya yellow color in the Suspension ArticulationIndicator. If Ride Height is adjusted, the RideHeight indicator on the screen will switch tothe appropriate height and the SuspensionArticulation Indicator will show the move-ment and change in height.

Vehicle Dynamics Menu

1 — Steering Angle2 — Transfer Case Status3 — Rear Axle Locker Status

Suspension Menu

1 — Suspension Articulation Indicator2 — Current Ride Height

293

Pitch And Roll — If Equipped

The Pitch And Roll page displays the vehi-cle’s current pitch (angle up and down) androll (angle side to side) in degrees. The pitchand roll gauges provide a visualization of thecurrent vehicle angle.

Accessory Gauges

The Accessory Gauges page displays thecurrent status of the vehicle’s Coolant Tem-perature, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure (GasVehicles Only), Transmission Temperature,and Battery Voltage.

Selec-Terrain — If Equipped

The Selec-Terrain page displays the currentSelec-Terrain mode through a high resolutionimage. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode willalter the image on the screen. The vehiclemust be in the ON/RUN position to displaySelec-Terrain information.

The selectable modes are as follows:

• Snow

• Sand

• Auto — Default

• Mud

• Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4 Wheel DriveLow

Pitch And Roll Menu

1 — Current Pitch2 — Current Roll

Accessory Gauges Menu

1 — Coolant Temperature2 — Oil Temperature3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)4 — Battery Voltage5 — Transmission Temperature

MU

LTIM

EDIA

294

NOTE:While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off RoadPages Status Bar will also display the currentSelec-Terrain mode.

TIPS CONTROLS ANDGENERAL INFORMATIONSteering Wheel Audio Controls

The steering wheel audio controls are locatedon the rear surface of the steering wheel.

Right Switch

• Push the switch up or down to increase ordecrease the volume.

• Push the button in the center to changemodes AM/FM/CD/SXM.

Left Switch

• Push the switch up or down to search forthe next listenable station or select the nextor previous CD track.

• Push the button in the center to select thenext preset station (radio) or to change CDsif equipped with a CD Player.

Reception Conditions

Reception conditions change constantlywhile driving. Reception may be interferedwith by the presence of mountains, buildingsor bridges, especially when you are far awayfrom the broadcaster.

The volume may be increased when receivingtraffic alerts and news.

Current Selec-Terrain Mode

Steering Wheel Audio Controls

295

Care And Maintenance

Observe the following precautions to ensurethe system is fully operational:

• The display lens should not come into con-tact with pointed or rigid objects whichcould damage its surface; use a soft, dryanti-static cloth to clean and do not press.

• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives toclean the display lens.

• Prevent any liquid from entering the sys-tem: this could damage it beyond repair.

Anti-Theft Protection

The system is equipped with an anti-theftprotection system based on the exchange ofinformation with the electronic control unit(Body Computer) on the vehicle.

This guarantees maximum safety and preventsthe secret code from being entered after thepower supply has been disconnected.

If the check has a positive outcome, thesystem will start to operate, whereas if thecomparison codes are not the same or if the

electronic control unit (Body Computer) isreplaced, the system will ask the user to enterthe secret code. See an authorized dealer forfurther information.

SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN —IF EQUIPPEDSiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped(Available on Uconnect 4C NAV)

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely withyour hands on the steering wheel. You havefull responsibility and assume all risksrelated to the use of the features andapplications in this vehicle. Only use thefeatures and applications when it is safe todo so. Failure to do so may result in anaccident involving serious injury or death.

NOTE:Your vehicle may be transmitting data asauthorized by the subscriber.

SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownershipand driving experience. When connected toan operable network, you can:

• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardianoperator who can connect you to emergencyresponders.

• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and startyour vehicle from virtually anywhere, usingthe SiriusXM Guardian App from your de-vice. You can also do so by logging into yourowner site, or by calling SiriusXM GuardianCare when your vehicle has an operablenetwork connection. Services can only beused where coverage is available.

• Receive text or email notifications if yourvehicle's security alarm goes off.

• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, usingGPS technology to help authorities locateyour vehicle if it is stolen.

• Get operator assistance using the ASSISTbutton on your interior rearview mirror.

MU

LTIM

EDIA

296

Before you drive, familiarize yourself with theeasy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.

1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons arelocated on your rearview mirror. The AS-SIST button is used for contacting Road-side Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXMGuardian Care, and Uconnect Care. TheSOS Call button connects you to aSiriusXM Guardian Care Agent, who canconnect you to emergency services.

2. The Uconnect “Apps ” button is lo-cated in the center of the menu bar of theradio touchscreen. This is where you canmanage your Apps.

3. The Uconnect Voice Command andUconnect Phone buttons are located onthe left side of your steering wheel. Thesebuttons let you use your voice to givecommands, make phone calls, send andreceive text messages hands-free, enternavigation destinations, and control yourradio and media devices.

Included Trial Period For New Vehicles

Your new vehicle may come with an includedtrial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardianservices starting at the date of vehicle pur-chase (date based on vehicle sales notifica-tion from your dealer). To activate the trial,you must first register with SiriusXM Guardian.After the trial period, if you wish to continueyour SiriusXM Guardian services you canchoose to purchase a subscription.

SiriusXM Guardian Activation

To unlock the full potential of SiriusXMGuardian in your vehicle, you must activateyour SiriusXM Guardian services.

1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of yourin-vehicle touchscreen.

2. Select the Activate Services icon fromyour list of apps.

3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with aSiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agentwho will activate services in your vehicle,or select “Enter Email” to activate on theweb.

Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here arejust a few examples of things you’ll be ableto do:

• Know that help, if you need it, is only abutton press away with Assist.

• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors fromhundreds of miles away.

• Find your vehicle, no matter where youparked, using the convenient VehicleFinder function.

• Use Send & Go to send a navigation routefrom your mobile phone to your vehicle’snavigation system.

For further information:.

• U.S. residents visit:www.siriusxm.com/guardian

• Canadian residents visit:www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca

297

www.siriusxm.com/guardian

www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca

Download The Uconnect App

You’re only a few steps away from using remotecommands and other valuable services.

To use the Uconnect App:

• Search for and download the Uconnect appfrom the store on your compatible iPhone orAndroid powered device.

• Log in to the app using the email addressand password you created when you acti-vated the services.

• Press the “Remote” button on the bottommenu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Re-mote Start (if equipped), and activate yourhorn and lights remotely.

• Press the “Location” button on the bottommenu bar of the app to bring up a map tolocate your vehicle or send a location toyour vehicle’s navigation system.

• Press the menu button (three horizontallines) in the upper left corner of the app toaccess settings and support information.

Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C NAV)

Subscriptions can be purchased online bylogging into your owner account. If you needhelp push the ASSIST button on the rearviewmirror, then select SiriusXM Guardian Careor:

• U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827

• Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091

Maintaining Your SiriusXM GuardianAccount

Selling Your Vehicle

When you sell your vehicle, we recommendthat you remove your SiriusXM GuardianAccount information from the vehicle. You cando this by pressing the ASSIST button in yourvehicle and selecting SiriusXM Guardian, orcall:

• U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827

• Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091

Built-In Features

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands onthe wheel. You have full responsibility andassume all risks related to the use of theUconnect features, SiriusXM Guardianservices, and applications in this vehicle.Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXMGuardian services when it is safe to do so.Failure to do so may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.

Mobile App

MU

LTIM

EDIA

298

WARNING!

• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-tion to the road. Some features are lim-ited while the vehicle is in motion. Someservices, including SOS, will NOT workwithout a subscription and an operablenetwork connection.

• Ignoring the rearview mirror light couldmean you may not have SOS Call service ifneeded. If the rearview mirror light isilluminated, have an authorized dealerservice the SOS Call system immediately.

• The Occupant Restraint Controller(ORC) turns on the Air Bag WarningLight on the instrument panel if a mal-function is detected in any part of theairbag system. If the Air Bag WarningLight is illuminated, the air bag systemmay not be working properly and theSOS Call system may not send a signal toa SOS Call operator if an air bag isdeployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light isilluminated, have an authorized dealerservice your vehicle immediately.

WARNING!• If anyone in the vehicle could be in

danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,dangerous road conditions or location),do not wait for voice contact from a SOSCall operator. All occupants should exitthe vehicle immediately and move to asafe location.

• The SOS Call system is embedded intothe vehicle’s electrical system. Do notadd aftermarket electrical equipment tothe vehicle’s electrical system. This mayprevent your vehicle from sending a sig-nal to initiate an emergency call. Toavoid interference that can cause theSOS Call system to fail, never add after-market equipment (e.g., two-way mobileradio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) toyour vehicle’s electrical system ormodify the antennas on your vehicle.

• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERYPOWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD-ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-DENT), the Uconnect features, apps,and SiriusXM Guardian services, amongothers, will not operate.


1. ASSIST Call (4C NAV) — The rearview mirrorcontains an ASSIST button, allowing you tospeak to a call center agent for support:

• Roadside Assistance Call — If you get aflat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be con-nected to someone who can help any-time. Additional fees may apply. Addi-tional information in this section.

SOS Call Button And ASSIST

1 — SOS Call Button2 — ASSIST Button

299

• Uconnect Care — In vehicle support forUconnect Apps and Features.

• SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehiclesupport for SiriusXM Guardian services.

• Vehicle Care — Total support for yourFCA US LLC vehicle.

NOTE:In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Servicesto you, we may record and monitor your conver-sations with Roadside Assistance, UconnectCare, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or Vehicle Care,whether such conversations are initiatedthrough the SiriusXM Guardian services in yourvehicle, your device, or via a landline device,and may share information obtained throughsuch recording and monitoring in accordancewith regulatory requirements. You acknowl-edge, agree, and consent to any recording,monitoring or sharing of information obtainedthrough any such call recordings.

2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — Therearview mirror contains a SOS Call but-ton that, when pressed, may place a callfrom your vehicle to a SiriusXM GuardianCare operator, who can connect you toemergency service operators, to request

help from local police, fire or ambulancepersonnel. If this button is accidentallypressed, you will have ten seconds to stopthe call. To cancel, press the SOS Callbutton again or press the “Cancel” buttonshown on the touchscreen. After ten sec-onds has passed, the SOS call will beplaced and only the SOS Call operator cancancel it. The LED light on the rearviewmirror will turn green once a connection toa SOS Call operator has been made. Thegreen LED light will turn off once the SOSCall is terminated. Have an authorizeddealer service the vehicle if the rearviewmirror light is continuously red. Onequipped vehicles, this feature requires afunctioning electrical system, a subscrip-tion, and an operable network connection.If a connection is made between a SOS Calloperator and your vehicle, you understandand agree that SOS Call operators willstay on the line, even after you connectwith emergency services. The Emergencyservices operator may, like any otheremergency call, record conversations andsounds in and near your vehicle uponconnection.

3. Theft Alarm Notification — The Theft AlarmNotification feature notifies you via emailor text (SMS) message when the vehicle’sfactory-installed security alarm systemhas been set-off. There are a number ofreasons why your alarm may have beentriggered, one of which could be that yourvehicle was stolen. If so, please see thedetails of the Stolen Vehicle Assistanceservice below. When you activate, TheftAlarm Notification is automatically set tosend you an email at the email addressyou provide should the alarm go off. Youmay also opt to have a text message sentto your device.

4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicleis stolen, contact local law enforcementimmediately to file a stolen vehicle report.Once this report has been filed, SiriusXMGuardian Care can help locate your ve-hicle. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agentwill ask for the stolen vehicle report num-ber issued by local law enforcement. Aslong as your vehicle has a SiriusXMGuardian subscription and an operablenetwork connection, the agent may beable to locate the stolen vehicle and work

MU

LTIM

EDIA

300

with law enforcement to help recover it.Your vehicle must have an operable net-work connection and must be registeredwith SiriusXM Guardian with an activesubscription that includes the applicablefeature.

5. 4G Wi—Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allowsyou and your passengers to connect theirportable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Ficapabilities of your Uconnect system. Pur-chasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the useof an Internet-enabled portable device.

a. Select Wi-Fi Hotspot located underthe Uconnect “Apps” menu.

b. Select the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot optionfrom the touchscreen to locate yourHotspot Name and Password.

c. From your portable device Wi-Fi set-tings menu, select the Hotspot Namefrom the list of available networks andenter the provided Password.

d. Open the web browser on your portabledevice and enter the following webaddress: www.att.com/myvehicleaccount.

e. Create a myVehicle account or log in toyour existing one.

f. Select and purchase the desired sub-scription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspotwill activate after a few minutes.

For additional assistance, call AT&TCustomer Care at: 866-595-1330

NOTE:Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem for any of the in vehicle SiriusXMGuardian services to operate.

SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features

If you own a compatible iPhone or Androidpowered device, the Uconnect App allowsyou to remotely lock or unlock your doors,start your engine or activate your horn andlights from virtually anywhere. Your vehiclemust be equipped with remote start, musthave a SiriusXM Guardian subscription, andmust have an operable network connection.Services can only be used where coverage isavailable. You can download the App fromMopar Owner Connect or from the App Store(iPhone) or Google Play Store (Android). Visit

UconnectPhone.com to determine if yourdevice is compatible. For Uconnect Phonecustomer support and to determine if yourdevice is compatible.

U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com orcall 1-877-855-8400.

Canadian residents - visit DriveUconnect.caor call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) orcall:1-800-387-9983 (French).

Remote Start (If Equipped) — This featureprovides the ability to start the engine on yourvehicle, without the keys and from virtuallyany distance. You can send a request to yourvehicle in one of two ways:

1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-ible device.

2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.

• After 15 minutes if you have not en-tered your vehicle with the key, theengine will shut off automatically.

• You can also send a command to turn-off an engine that has been remotestarted.

301

http://www.uconnectphone.com/


http://www.DriveUconnect.ca

• This remote function requires your ve-hicle to be equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start system. To uti-lize this feature after the Uconnect Appis downloaded, login with your username and password.

To use this feature after the Uconncet App isdownloaded, login using your user name andpassword. You will need your four digitSiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirmthe request. Press the “remote start” icon onyour Uconnect App to remotely start the ve-hicle.

You can set-up notifications for your account toreceive an email or text (SMS) message everytime a command is sent. Login to Mopar OwnerConnect at moparownerconnect.com andclick on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXMGuardian Notifications.

Remote Door Lock/Unlock — This feature pro-vides the ability to lock or unlock the door onyour vehicle, without the keys and from virtu-

ally any distance. You can send a request toyour vehicle in one of three ways:



3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Careon the phone.

To use this feature after the Uconnect Appis downloaded, login using your user nameand password. You will need your four digitSiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm therequest. Press the “closed lock” icon on yourUconnect App to lock the doors, and press the“open lock” icon to unlock the driver’s door.

You can set-up notifications for your account toreceive an email or text (SMS) message everytime a command is sent. Login to Mopar OwnerConnect at moparownerconnect.com andclick on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXMGuardian Notifications.

Remote Horn And Lights — It’s easy to locate avehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parkingarea by activating the horn and lights. It mayalso help if you need to draw attention to yourvehicle for any reason. You can send a re-quest to your vehicle in one of three ways:



3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Careon the phone.

To use this feature after the Uconnect App isdownloaded, login using your user name andpassword. You will need your four digitSiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirmthe request. You can set-up notifications foryour account to receive an email or text(SMS) message every time a command issent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect atmoparownerconnect.com and click on EditProfile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifi-cations.

MU

LTIM

EDIA

302

https://www.moparownerconnect.com/Pages/global.aspx



Vehicle Finder

The Vehicle Finder feature of the UconnectMobile App allows you to find the location ofyour vehicle when you can't remember whereit's parked. You can also sound the alarm andflash the lights to make finding your vehicleeven easier.

To find your vehicle:

1. Press the “Location” tab on the UconnectMobile App bottom bar.

2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine thelocation of your vehicle.

3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap-pears, once your vehicle is located.

4. Select your preferred Navigation App toroute a path to your vehicle.

Send & Go

The Send & Go feature of the UconnectMobile App allows you to search for a desti-nation on your mobile device and then sendthe route to your vehicle’s Uconnect Naviga-tion system.

To send a navigation route to your vehicle:

1. Press the “Location” tab on the UconnectMobile App bottom bar.

2. Either type in the destination you wouldlike to navigate to, or search through oneof the categories provided.

3. Select the destination you want to route tofrom the list that appears.

4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, andthen confirm the destination by pressing“Yes,” to send the navigation route to theUconnect Navigation in your vehicle.

5. Finally, confirm the route inside your ve-hicle by pressing the “Go Now” option onthe pop-up that appears on the touch-screen, when the vehicle is started.

303

UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAYUconnect 4 At A Glance

CAUTION!

Do NOT attach any object to the touch-screen, doing so can result in damage tothe screen.


Setting The Time

• For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and thenpress the time display at the top of thescreen. Press “Yes.”

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Screen

MU

LTIM

EDIA

304

• If the time is not displayed at the top of thescreen, press the “Settings” button on thetouchscreen. In the Settings screen, pressthe “Time & Date” button on the touch-screen, then check or uncheck this option.

• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours andSet Time Minutes to adjust the time.

• If these features are not available, uncheckthe Sync Time box.

• Press “X” to save your settings and exit outof the Clock Setting screen.

Audio Settings

• Press of the “Audio” button on the touch-screen to activate the Audio settings screento adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, SpeedAdjusted Volume, Surround Sound, Loud-ness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, andRadio Off With Door.

• You can return to the Radio screen bypressing the “X” located at the top right.

Balance/Fade

• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on thetouchscreen to Balance audio between thefront speakers or fade the audio betweenthe rear and front speakers.

• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or“Right” buttons on the touchscreen orpress and drag the Speaker Icon to adjustthe Balance/Fade.

Equalizer

• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-screen to activate the Equalizer screen.

• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-screen, or press and drag over the level barfor each of the equalizer bands. The levelvalue, which spans between plus or minusnine, is displayed at the bottom of each ofthe bands.

Speed Adjusted Volume

• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” buttonon the touchscreen to activate the SpeedAdjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad-justed Volume is adjusted by pressing thevolume level indicator. This alters the auto-matic adjustment of the audio volume withvariation to vehicle speed.

Loudness

• Press the “On” button on the touchscreen toactivate Loudness. Press “Off” to deactivatethis feature. When Loudness is On, the soundquality at lower volumes improves.

AUX Volume Offset

• Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button onthe touchscreen to activate the AUX Vol-ume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offsetis adjusted by pressing of the “+” and “–”buttons. This alters the AUX input audiovolume. The level value, which spans be-tween plus or minus three, is displayedabove the adjustment bar.

Auto Play

• Press the “Auto Play” button on the touch-screen to activate the Auto Play screen. TheAuto Play feature has two settings “On” and“Off.” With Auto Play on, music will beginto play from a connected device, immedi-atley after it is connected to the radio

305

Personalized Menu BarThe Uconnect features and services in themain menu bar are easily changed for yourconvenience. Simply follow these steps:

1. Press the “Apps ” button to open theApp screen.

2. Press and hold, then drag the selectedApp to replace an existing shortcut in themain menu bar.

The new app shortcut, that was draggeddown onto the main menu bar, will nowbe an active App/shortcut.

NOTE:This feature is only available if the vehicle isin PARK.

Uconnect 4 Main Menu

MU

LTIM

EDIA

306

Radio

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio

1 — Radio Station Presets2 — Toggle Between Presets3 — Status Bar4 — Main Category Bar5 — Audio Settings

6 — Seek Up7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station8 — Seek Down9 — Browse And Manage Presets10 — Radio Bands

307

WARNING!ALWAYS drive safely with your hands onthe wheel. You have full responsibility andassume all risks related to the use of theUconnect features, SiriusXM Guardianservices, and applications in this vehicle.Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXMGuardian services when it is safe to do so.Failure to do so may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.

• To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra-dio” button on the touchscreen.

Selecting Radio Stations

• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM orSXM) button on the touchscreen.

Seek Up/Seek Down

• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons onthe touchscreen for less than two seconds toseek through radio stations.

• Press and hold either arrow button on thetouchscreen for more than two seconds tobypass stations without stopping. The radiowill stop at the next listenable station once thearrow button on the touchscreen is released.

Direct Tune

• Tune directly to a radio station by pressingthe “Tune” button on the screen, and en-tering the desired station number.

Store Radio Presets Manually

Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). Theyare shown at the top of your radio screen. Tosee the 12 preset stations per band, press thearrow button on the touchscreen at the topright of the screen to toggle between the twosets of six presets.

To store a radio preset manually, follow thesteps below:

1. Tune to the desired station.

2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-ton on the touchscreen for more than twoseconds or until you hear a confirmationbeep.

Android Auto

Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnectsystem, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, orhigher, powered smartphone with a dataplan, that allows you to project your smart-phone and a number of its apps onto thetouchscreen radio display. Android Auto au-tomatically brings you useful information,and organizes it into simple cards that appearjust when they are needed. Android Auto canbe used with Google's best-in-class speechtechnology, the steering wheel controls, theknobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,and the radio display’s touchscreen to controlmany of your apps. To use Android Autofollow the following procedure:

1. Download the Android Auto app from theGoogle Play store on your Android-powered smartphone.

2. Connect your Android powered smartphoneto one of the media USB ports in yourvehicle. If the Android Auto app was notdownloaded, the first time you plug yourdevice in, the app will begin to download.

MU

LTIM

EDIA

308

NOTE:Be sure to use the factory-provided USBcable that came with your phone, as after-market cables may not work.

3. Once the device is connected and recog-nized, Android Auto should automaticallylaunch, but you can also launch it bytouching the Android Auto icon on thetouchscreen, located under Apps.

Once Android Auto is up and running on yourUconnect radio, the following features can beutilized using your smartphone’s data plan:

• Google Maps for navigation

• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,etc. for music

• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu-nication

• Hundred of compatible apps

NOTE:To use Android Auto, make sure you are in anarea with cellular coverage. Android Automay use cellular data and your cellular cov-erage is shown in the upper right corner of theradio screen. Once Android Auto has made aconnect through USB, Android Auto will alsoconnect via Bluetooth.

Apple CarPlay Integration

Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay,the smarter, more secure way to use youriPhone in the car, and stay focused on the road.Use your Uconnect Touchscreen display, thevehicle's knobs and controls, and your voicewith Siri to get access to Apple Music, Maps,Messages, and more.

To use CarPlay, make sure you are usingiPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set-tings, ensure your iPhone is unlocked for thevery first connection only, and then use thefollowing procedure:

1. Connect your iPhone to one of the mediaUSB ports in your vehicle.

NOTE:Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-ning cable that came with your phone, asaftermarket cables may not work.

Android Auto

Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage

309

2. Once the device is connected and recog-nized, CarPlay should automaticallylaunch, but you can also launch it bytouching the CarPlay on the touchscreen,located under Apps.

Once CarPlay is up and running on yourUconnect radio, the following features can beutilized using your iPhone’s data plan:

• Phone

• Music

• Messages

• Maps

NOTE:To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data isturned on, and that you are in an area withcellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov-erage is shown on the left side of the radioscreen.

UCONNECT 4C/4C NAVWITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAYUconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands onthe wheel. You have full responsibility andassume all risks related to the use of theUconnect features, SiriusXM Guardianservices, and applications in this vehicle.Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXMGuardian services when it is safe to do so.Failure to do so may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Do NOT attach any object to the touch-screen, doing so can result in damage tothe screen.

CarPlayCarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage

MU

LTIM

EDIA

310


Setting The Time

• Model 4C NAV synchronizes time automati-cally via GPS, so it should not require anytime adjustment. If you do need to set thetime manually, follow the instructions be-low for Model 4C NAV.

• For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and thenpress the time display at the top of thescreen. Press “Yes.”

• If the time is not displayed at the top of thescreen, press the “Settings” button on thetouchscreen. In the Settings screen, pressthe “Clock” button on the touchscreen,then check or uncheck this option.

• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours andSet Time Minutes to adjust the time.

• If these features are not available, uncheckthe Sync Time box.

• Press “X” to save your settings and exit outof the Clock Setting screen.

Background Themes

• Screen background themes are selectablefrom a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’dlike to set a theme, follow the instructionsbelow.

• Press the “Settings” button on the touch-screen.

• Press the “Display” button on the touch-screen.

• Then press “Set Theme” button on thetouchscreen and select a theme.

Audio Settings

• Press of the “Audio” button on the touch-screen to activate the Audio settings screento adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, andSpeed Adjusted Volume.

• You can return to the Radio screen bypressing the “X” located at the top right.

Balance/Fade

• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on thetouchscreen to Balance audio between thefront speakers or fade the audio betweenthe rear and front speakers.

• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or“Right” buttons on the touchscreen orpress and drag the Speaker Icon to adjustthe Balance/Fade.

Equalizer

• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-screen to activate the Equalizer screen.

• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-screen, or press and drag over the level barfor each of the equalizer bands. The levelvalue, which spans between plus or minusnine, is displayed at the bottom of each ofthe Bands.

Speed Adjusted Volume

• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” buttonon the touchscreen to activate the SpeedAdjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad-justed Volume is adjusted by pressing thevolume level indicator. This alters the auto-matic adjustment of the audio volume withvariation to vehicle speed.

311

Personalized Menu BarThe Uconnect features and services in themain menu bar are easily changed for yourconvenience. Simply follow these steps:

1. Press the “Apps ” button to open theApp screen.

2. Press and hold, then drag the selectedApp to replace an existing shortcut in themain menu bar.

The new app shortcut, that was draggeddown onto the main menu bar, will nowbe an active App/shortcut.

NOTE:This feature is only available if the vehicle isin PARK.

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Main Menu

MU

LTIM

EDIA

312

Radio

Uconnect 4C NAV Radio

1 — Radio Station Presets2 — Toggle Between Presets3 — Status Bar4 — View Small Navigation Map5 — HD Radio6 — Main Category Bar

7 — Audio Settings8 — Seek Up9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station10 — Seek Down11 — Browse And Manage Presets12 — Radio Bands

313

WARNING!ALWAYS drive safely with your hands onthe wheel. You have full responsibility andassume all risks related to the use of theUconnect features, SiriusXM Guardianservices, and applications in this vehicle.Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXMGuardian services when it is safe to do so.Failure to do so may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.

• To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra-dio” button on the touchscreen.

Selecting Radio Stations

• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM orSXM) button on the touchscreen.

Seek Up/Seek Down

• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons onthe touchscreen for less than two secondsto seek through radio stations.

• Press and hold either arrow button on thetouchscreen for more than two seconds tobypass stations without stopping. The radiowill stop at the next listenable station once thearrow button on the touchscreen is released.

Direct Tune

• Tune directly to a radio station by pressingthe “Tune” button on the screen, and en-tering the desired station number.

Store Radio Presets Manually

Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). Theyare shown at the top of your radio screen. Tosee the 12 preset stations per band, press thearrow button on the touchscreen at the topright of the screen to toggle between the twosets of six presets.

To store a radio preset manually, follow thesteps below:

1. Tune to the desired station.

2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-ton on the touchscreen for more than twoseconds or until you hear a confirmationbeep.

HD Radio — If Equipped

• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4CNAV) operates similar to conventional radioexcept it allows broadcasters to transmit ahigh-quality digital signal.

• With an HD radio receiver, the listener isprovided with a clear sound that enhancesthe listening experience. HD radio can alsotransmit data such as song title or artist.

Android Auto

Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnectsystem, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, orhigher, powered smartphone with a dataplan, that allows you to project your smart-phone and a number of its apps onto thetouchscreen radio display. Android Auto au-tomatically brings you useful information,and organizes it into simple cards that appearjust when they are needed. Android Auto canbe used with Google's best-in-class speechtechnology, the steering wheel controls, theknobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,and the radio display’s touchscreen to controlmany of your apps. To use Android Autofollow the following procedure:

1. Download the Android Auto app from theGoogle Play store on your Android-powered smartphone.

MU

LTIM

EDIA

314

2. Connect your Android powered smartphoneto one of the media USB ports in yourvehicle. If the Android Auto app was notdownloaded, the first time you plug yourdevice in, the app will begin to download.

NOTE:Be sure to use the factory-provided USBcable that came with your phone, as after-market cables may not work.

3. Once the device is connected, the systemwill display the Android Auto homescreen. Android Auto should automati-cally launch, but if it does not launchautomatically, refer to the Uconnect Own-er’s Manual Supplement for the procedureto enable the feature “AutoShow.” Youcan also launch it by pressing AndroidAuto located in the “Apps” menu. If youuse Android Auto frequently you can movethe app to the menu bar at the bottom ofthe touchscreen. Press the “Apps” buttonand locate the Android Auto app; thenpress and drag the selected App to replacean existing shortcut in the main menu bar.

Once Android Auto is up and running on yourUconnect radio, the following features can beutilized using your smartphone’s data plan:

• Google Maps for navigation

• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,etc. for music

• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu-nication

• Hundred of compatible apps

NOTE:To use Android Auto, make sure you are in anarea with cellular coverage. Android Automay use cellular data and your cellular cov-erage is shown in the upper right corner of theradio screen.

Maps

Push and hold the VR button on the steeringwheel or tap the microphone icon to askGoogle to take you to a desired destination byvoice. You can also touch the Navigation iconin Android Auto to access Google Maps.

Android Auto

Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage

315

NOTE:If the VR button is not held, and is onlypushed, the native Uconnect VR will promptyou and any navigation command said willlaunch the native Uconnect navigation system.

While using Android Auto, Google Maps pro-vides voice-guided:

• Navigation

• Live traffic information

• Lane guidance

NOTE:If you are using the native Uconnect naviga-tion system, and you try and start a new routeusing the Android Auto, via voice or any othermethod, a pop-up will appear asking if youwould like to switch from Uconnect naviga-tion to smartphone navigation. A pop-up willalso appear, asking if you’d like to switch, ifAndroid Auto is currently in use and youattempt to launch a native Uconnect route.Selecting “Yes” will switch the navigationtype to the newly used method of navigationand a route will be planned for the newdestination. If “No” is selected the naviga-tion type will remain unchanged.

For further information, refer towww.android.com/auto/.

For further information on the navigationfunction, please refer tohttps://support.google.com/android orhttps://support.google.com/androidauto/.

Music

Android Auto allows you to access and streamyour favorite music with apps like Google PlayMusic, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using yoursmartphone’s data plan, you can stream end-less music on the road.

NOTE:Music apps, playlists, and stations must beset up on your smartphone prior to usingAndroid Auto, for them to work with AndroidAuto.

Google Maps

Android Auto Music

MU

LTIM

EDIA

316

https://www.android.com/auto/

https://support.google.com/android

https://support.google.com/androidauto/answer/6348322

NOTE:To see the metadata for the music playingthrough Android Auto, select the UconnectSystem’s media screen.

For further information refer tohttps://support.google.com/androidauto.

Communication

With Android Auto connected, press and holdthe VR button on the steering wheel to acti-vate voice recognition specific to the AndroidAuto. This will allow you to send and reply totext messages, have incoming text messagesread out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls.

Apps

The Android Auto App will display all thecompatible apps that are available to usewith Android Auto, every time it is launched.You must have the compatible app down-loaded, and you must be signed in to the appfor it to work with Android Auto. Refer tog.co/androidauto to see the latest list of avail-able apps for Android Auto.

Apple CarPlay Integration

Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car-Play, the smarter, more secure way to useyour iPhone in the car, and stay focused on

the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreendisplay, the vehicle's knobs and controls, andyour voice with Siri to get access to AppleMusic, Maps, Messages, and more.

To use CarPlay, make sure you are usingiPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set-tings, ensure your iPhone is unlocked for thevery first connection only, and then use thefollowing procedure:

1. Connect your iPhone to one of the mediaUSB ports in your vehicle.

NOTE:Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-ning cable that came with your phone, asaftermarket cables may not work.

2. Once the device is connected, the systemwill display the CarPlay home screen.Apple CarPlay should automaticallylaunch, but if it does not launch automati-cally, refer to the Uconnect Owner’sManual Supplement for the procedure toenable the feature “AutoShow.” You canalso launch it by pressing the CarPlaylocated in the “Apps” menu. If you useApple CarPlay frequently you can moveAndroid Auto Contact

Android Auto Phone

317

https://support.google.com/androidauto/answer/6348327

g.co/androidauto

the app to the menu bar at the bottom ofthe touchscreen. Press the “Apps” buttonand locate the CarPlay app; then pressand drag the selected App to replace anexisting shortcut in the main menu bar.

Once CarPlay is up and running on yourUconnect radio, the following features can beutilized using your iPhone’s data plan:

• Phone

• Music

• Messages

• Maps

NOTE:To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data isturned on, and that you are in an area withcellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov-erage is shown on the left side of the radioscreen.

Phone

With CarPlay, press and hold the VR buttonon the steering wheel to activate a Siri voicerecognition session. You can also press andhold the Home button within CarPlay to starttalking to Siri. This will allow you to makecalls or listen to voice mail as you normallywould using Siri on your iPhone.

NOTE:Only temporarily pushing the VR button on thesteering wheel will launch a native VR session,not a Siri session, and it will not function withCarPlay.

Music

CarPlay allows you to access all your artists,playlists, and music from iTunes. Using youriPhone’s data plan, you can also use selectthird party audio apps including music,news, sports, podcasts and more.

CarPlayCarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage

Apple Music

MU

LTIM

EDIA

318

Messages

Just like Phone, CarPlay allows you to use Sirito send or reply to text messages. Siri can alsoread incoming text messages, but driver’s willnot be able to read messages, as everything isdone via voice.

Maps

To use your Apple Maps for navigation on yourUconnect system, launch CarPlay, and pushand hold the VR button on the steering wheelto use Siri to set your desired destination.Alternatively, choose a Nearby destination bypressing Destinations and selecting a cat-egory, by launching Siri from the destinationspage, or even by typing in a destination.

NOTE:

• If the VR button is not held, and is onlypushed, the native Uconnect VR willprompt you and any navigation commandsaid will launch the native Uconnect navi-gation system.

• If you are using the native Uconnect navi-gation system, and you try and start a newroute using CarPlay, via voice or any othermethod, a pop-up will appear asking if youwould like to switch from Uconnect naviga-tion to iPhone navigation. A pop-up willalso appear, asking if you’d like to switch, ifan CarPlay navigation is currently in useand you attempt to launch a nativeUconnect route. Selecting “Yes” will switchthe navigation type to the newly usedmethod of navigation and a route will beplanned for the new destination. If “No” isselected the navigation type will remainunchanged.

Apps

To use a compatible app with CarPlay, youmust have the compatible app downloaded,and you must be signed in to the app.Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/(U.S. Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to seethe latest list of available apps for CarPlay.

Maps

Navigation Pop-Up

319

http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/

https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/

UCONNECT SETTINGSThe Uconnect system allows you to accessCustomer Programmable feature settingssuch as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driv-ing Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine OffOptions, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, Suspension, SiriusXM Setup,Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data, andSystem Information through buttons on thetouchscreen.

Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect 4), orpress the “Apps” button (Uconnect 4C/4CNAV) located near the bottom of the touch-screen, then press the “Settings” button onthe touchscreen to access the Settingsscreen. When making a selection, scroll up ordown until the preferred setting is high-lighted, then press the preferred setting untila check-mark appears next to the setting,showing that setting has been selected. Thefollowing feature settings are available:

• Display • Engine Off Options• Voice • Suspension• Clock • Audio

• Safety & DrivingAssistance

• Phone/Bluetooth

• Lights • SiriusXM Setup• Doors & Locks • Restore Settings• Auto-On Comfort &

Remote Start• Clear Personal Data

• Compass(Uconnect 4)

• System Information

NOTE:Depending on the vehicles options, featuresettings may vary.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi-dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (CanadianResidents) for further information.

IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYERCONTROL

There are many ways to play music fromMP3 players, or USB devices through yourvehicle's sound system. Press your Mediabutton on the touchscreen to begin.

Uconnect Media Hub

1 — USB Port One2 — Audio/AUX Jack3 — USB Port Two

MU

LTIM

EDIA

320



www.owners.mopar.ca

Audio Jack (AUX)• The AUX allows a device to be plugged into

the radio and utilize the vehicle’s soundsystem, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, toamplify the source and play through thevehicle speakers.

• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touch-screen will change the mode to auxiliarydevice if the audio jack is connected, allow-ing the music from your device to be heardthrough the vehicle's speakers. To activatethe AUX, plug in the audio jack.

• The functions of the device are controlledusing the device buttons. The volume maybe controlled using the radio or device.

USB Port• Connect your compatible device using a

USB cable into the USB Port. USB Memorysticks with audio files can also be used.Audio from the device can be played on thevehicles sound system while providingmetadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)information on the radio display.

• When connected, the compatible USB de-vice can be controlled using the radio orSteering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skipto the next or previous track, browse, andlist the contents.

• The battery charges when plugged into theUSB port (if supported by the specific de-vice).

• To route the USB cable out of the centerconsole, use the access cut out.

NOTE:When connecting your device for the first time,the system may take several minutes to readyour music, depending on the number of files.For example, the system will take approxi-mately five minutes for every 1,000 songsloaded on the device. Also during the readingprocess, the Shuffle and Browse functions willbe disabled. This process is needed to ensurethe full use of your features and only happensthe first time it is connected. After the firsttime, the reading process of your device willtake considerably less time unless changes aremade or new songs are added to the playlist.

Bluetooth Streaming Audio

If using a Bluetooth equipped device you mayalso be able to stream music to your vehicle'ssound system. Your connected device mustbe Bluetooth compatible and paired with yoursystem (see Uconnect Phone for pairing in-structions). You can access the music fromyour connected Bluetooth device by pressingthe Bluetooth button on the touchscreenwhile in Media mode.

UCONNECT REAR SEATENTERTAINMENT (RSE)SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDYour Rear Seat Entertainment System is de-signed to give your family years of enjoyment.You can play your favorite CDs, DVDs orBlu-ray Discs, listen to audio over the wire-less headphones, or plug and play a variety ofstandard video games or audio devices.

321

Getting Started• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats:

Open the LCD screen cover by lifting up oncover.

• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC posi-tion.

• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray Disc Player. If equipped with a Blu-raydisc player, the icon will be present on thePlayer.

• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment sys-tem by pushing the power button on theremote control.

• When the Video Screen(s) are open and aDVD/Blu-ray disc is inserted into the discplayer, the screen(s) turn(s) on automati-cally, the headphone transmitters turn onand playback begins.

• With the Dual Video Screen System, Chan-nel 1 (Rear 1) on the remote control andheadphones, refers to Screen 1 (driver'sside) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the Re-mote Control and Headphones refers toScreen 2 (passenger side).

RSE System Screen

RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)

RSE System Remote Control ChannelSelectors

MU

LTIM

EDIA

322

• The system can be controlled either by thefront seat occupants utilizing the touch-screen radio or by the rear seat occupantsusing the remote control.

Dual Video Screen

NOTE:Typically there are two different ways to op-erate the features of the Rear Seat Entertain-ment System.

• The Remote Control

• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)

Blu-ray Disc Player

Play A Blu-ray Disc

The Blu-ray disc player is located in thecenter console.

1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES discplayer with the label facing as indicatedon the Blu-ray player. The radio automati-cally selects the appropriate mode afterthe disc is recognized and displays themenu screen, the language screen, orstarts playing the first track.

RSE System Headphone ChannelSelectors

Blu-ray Disc Player Location

323

2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 fordriver's side rear passengers, ensure theRemote Control and Headphone switch ison Rear 1.

3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 forpassenger side rear passengers, ensurethe Remote Control and Headphoneswitch is on Rear 2.

NOTE:

• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, pressthe “Media” button on the touchscreen,and then press the “Disc” button. Press the“Play” button, and then the “full screen”button.

• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen isnot available in all states/provinces. Thevehicle must be stopped, and the gearselector must be in the PARK position forvehicles with automatic transmission.

Using The Touchscreen Radio

1. RSE Channel 1 Mode

Indicates the current source for Screen1/Channel 1. This button will be high-lighted when it is the active Screen/Channel being controlled by the frontuser. If this button is not highlighted,select button to access controls forScreen 1/Channel 1 source.

2. RSE Power

Press to turn RSE On/Off.

3. RSE Mute

Mute rear headphones for the currentignition cycle. Pressing mute again willunmute rear headphones.

4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out

Press to enable/disable remote controlfunctions.

5. RSE Channel 2 Mode

Indicates the current source for Screen2/Channel 2. This button will be high-lighted when it is the active Screen/Channel being controlled by the frontuser. If this button is not highlighted,select button to access controls forScreen 2/Channel 2 source.

6. Cabin Audio Mode

Select this button to change the cabinaudio to the rear entertainment sourcecurrently shown on the rear media controlscreen.

Rear Media Control Screen

MU

LTIM

EDIA

324

7. Radio Full Screen Mode

Select this button to change to FullScreen Mode.

8. RSE Mode

Select this button to change source for theactive (highlighted) rear Screen/Channelon the rear media control screen.

• Press the Media button on the touchscreen,and then press the rear media button on thetouchscreen.

• Press the OK button on the touchscreen tobegin playing the Blu-ray disc on the touch-screen radio.

Using The Remote Control

• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’sside rear screen and Rear 2 for passenger’sside rear screen), and then press the sourcekey, and using the up and down arrows,highlight disc from the menu and press theOK button.

• Press the popup/menu key to navigate thedisc menu and options.

Play Video Games

Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on theside of each seat.

Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMIJacks) on the side of each seat enable themonitor to display video directly from a videocamera, connect video games for display onthe screen, or play music directly from anMP3 player.

When connecting an external source to theAUX/HDMI input, ensure to follow the stan-dard color coding for the audio/video jacks:

1. HDMI Input.

2. Right audio in (red).

3. Left audio in (white).

4. Video in (yellow).

NOTE:Certain high-end video games consoles mayexceed the power limit of the vehicle's PowerInverter.

Accessibility — If Equipped

Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-raysystem that announces a function prior toperforming the action. For further infor-mation refer to “Uconnect Settings” in“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents).

Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks

325


www.owners.mopar.ca

NAVIGATION• The information in the section below is only

applicable if you have the Uconnect 4C NAVsystem or the Navigation has been activatedon your Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch displaysystem.

Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen inthe menu bar to access the Navigation system.

Changing The Navigation Voice PromptVolume

Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume

1. Press the “Settings” button on the touch-screen in the lower right area of the screen.

2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guid-ance” button on the touchscreen.

3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the NavVolume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttonson the touchscreen.

MU

LTIM

EDIA

326

Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation

1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories2 — Find A Destination3 — View Map4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination

5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destination6 — Navigation Settings7 — Emergency8 — Information

327

Finding Points Of Interest• From the main Navigation menu, press the

“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,then press the “Points of Interest” buttonon the touchscreen.

• Select a category and then a subcategory,if necessary.

• Select your destination and press the“GO!” button on the touchscreen.

Finding A Place By Spelling The Name• From the Main Navigation Menu press the

“Where to?” button on the touchscreen,press the “Points of Interest” button on thetouchscreen, then press the “Spell Name”button on the touchscreen.

• Enter the name of your destination.

• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.

• Select your destination and press the “GO!”button on the touchscreen.

One-Step Voice Destination Entry• Enter a navigation destination without tak-

ing your hands off the wheel.

• Just push the Uconnect Voice Commandbutton on the steering wheel, wait for

the beep and say something like, "FindAddress 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn HillsMI."

NOTE:Destination entry is not available while yourvehicle is in motion. However, you can alsouse Voice Commands to enter an addresswhile moving. Refer to “Uconnect Voice Rec-ognition Quick Tips” in this section for fur-ther information.

Setting Your Home Location• Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen

in the menu bar to access the Navigationsystem and the Main Navigation menu.

• Press the “Home” button on the touch-screen.

• You may enter your address directly, useyour current location as your home address,or choose from recently found locations.

• To delete your Home location (or othersaved locations) so you can save a newHome location, press the “Home” buttonon the touchscreen, and in the “GO!”screen press the “Options” button on thetouchscreen. In the Options menu pressthe “Clear Home” button on the touch-screen. Set a new Home location by follow-ing the previous instructions.

MU

LTIM

EDIA

328

Home• A Home location must be saved in the system.

From the Main Navigation menu, press the“Home” button on the touchscreen.

Your route is marked with a blue line on themap. If you depart from the original route,your route is recalculated. A speed limit iconcould appear as you travel on major roadways.

Adding A Stop• To add a stop you must be navigating a

route.

• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreento return to the Main Navigation menu.

• Press the “Where To?” button on the touch-screen, then search for the extra stop.When another location has been selected,you can choose to cancel your previousroute, add as the first destination or add asthe last destination.

• Press the desired selection and press the“GO!” button on the touchscreen.

Taking A Detour• To take a detour you must be navigating a

route.

• Press the “Detour” button on the touch-screen.

NOTE:If the route you are currently taking is the onlyreasonable option, the device may not calcu-late a detour. For more information, see yourUconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.

Uconnect 4C NAV Map

1 — Distance To Next Turn2 — Next Turn Street3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival4 — Zoom In And Out5 — Your Location On The Map6 — Navigation Main Menu7 — Current Street Location8 — Navigation Routing Options

329

SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV)

Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.

Avoid congestion before you reach it. Byenhancing your vehicle's navigation systemwith the ability to see detailed traffic infor-mation, you can pinpoint traffic incidents,determine average traffic speed and estimatetravel time along your route. Since the serviceis integrated with a vehicle's navigation sys-tem, SiriusXM Traffic Plus can help driverspick the fastest route based on traffic condi-tions.

• Detailed information on traffic speed, acci-dents, construction, and road closings.

• Traffic information from multiple sources,including police and emergency services,cameras and road sensors.

• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic informa-tion.

• View conditions for points along your routeand beyond. Available in over 130 markets.

SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)

In addition to delivering over 130 channels ofthe best sports, entertainment, talk, andcommercial-free music, SiriusXM offers pre-mium data services that work in conjunctionwith compatible navigation systems.SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of usefulinformation into your vehicle and right to yourfingertips.

• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and dieselprices in your area and route to the stationof your choice.

• Movie Listings — Check local movie the-atres and listings in your area and route tothe theater of your choice.

• Sports Scores — In-game and final scoresas well as weekly schedules.

• Weather — Check variety of local and na-tional weather information from radar mapsto current and 5-day forecast.

SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completelyintegrated into your vehicle. A few minutesafter you start your vehicle, Travel Link infor-mation arrives and updates in the back-ground. You can access the informationwhenever you like, with no waiting.

To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps”button on the touchscreen, then press the“SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touch-screen.

NOTE:SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription,sold separately after the trial subscriptionincluded with your vehicle purchase.

MU

LTIM

EDIA

330

UCONNECT PHONEUconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)

Uconnect 4 Phone Menu

1 — Favorite Contacts2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone4 — Siri5 — Mute Microphone6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System7 — Conference Call*8 — Phone Settings9 — Text Messaging**10 — Direct Dial Pad

11 — Recent Call Log12 — Browse Phone Book Entries (Contains SOS Call)13 — End Call14 — Call/Redial/Hold15 — Do Not Disturb16 — Reply with Text Message* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones(requires Bluetooth MAP profile)

331

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone Menu

1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength3 — Do Not Disturb4 — Reply with Text Message5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name6 — Conference Call*7 — Phone Pairing8 — Text Messaging Menu**9 — Direct Dial Pad10 — Contact Menu

11 — Recent Call Log12 — Favorite Contacts13 — Mute Microphone14 — Decline Incoming Call15 — Answer/Redial/Hold16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System*— Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones(requires Bluetooth MAP profile)

MU

LTIM

EDIA

332

The Uconnect Phone feature enables you toplace and receive hands-free mobile phonecalls. Drivers can also place mobile phonecalls using their voice or by using the buttonson the touchscreen (see Voice Command sec-tion).

The hands-free calling feature is made pos-sible through Bluetooth technology — theglobal standard that enables different elec-tronic devices to connect to each other wire-lessly.

If the Uconnect Phone Button exists onyour steering wheel, you then have theUconnect Phone features.

NOTE:

• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobilephone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.

• Most mobile phones/devices are compat-ible with the Uconnect system, howeversome mobile phones/devices may not beequipped with all of the required features toutilize all of the Uconnect system features.

• For Uconnect Customer Care:

• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com orcall 1-877-855-8400.

• Canadian residents visit UconnectPhone.comor call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or1-800-3879983 (French).

Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) YourMobile Phone To The Uconnect System

Mobile phone pairing is the process of estab-lishing a wireless connection between a cel-lular phone and the Uconnect system.

NOTE:

• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you firstmust determine if your mobile phone andsoftware are compatible with the Uconnectsystem. Please visit UconnectPhone.com forcomplete mobile phone compatibility infor-mation.

• Mobile phone pairing is not available whilethe vehicle is in motion.

• A maximum of ten mobile phones can bepaired to the Uconnect system.

Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio

Uconnect 4:

1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.

2. Press the “Phone” button.

3. Select “Settings.”

4. Select “Paired Phones.”

5. Select “Add device.”

• Uconnect Phone will display an “Inprogress” screen while the system isconnecting.

Uconnect 4

333




Uconnect 4C, 4C NAV:

1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ONposition.

2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Baron the touchscreen.

3. Select “Pairing.”

4. Select “Paired Phones.”

5. Select “Add device.”

• Uconnect Phone will display an “Inprogress” screen while the system isconnecting.

Pair Your iPhone:

To search for available devices on yourBluetooth enabled iPhone:

1. Press the Settings button.

2. Select Bluetooth.

• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled.Once enabled, the mobile phone will be-gin to search for Bluetooth connections.

3. When your mobile phone finds theUconnect system, select “Uconnect”.

Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:

1. When prompted on the mobile phone,accept the connection request fromUconnect Phone.

NOTE:Some mobile phones will require you toenter the PIN number.

Uconnect 4C & 4C NAV

Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device

Pairing Request

MU

LTIM

EDIA

334

Select The iPhone's Priority Level

When the pairing process has successfullycompleted, the system will prompt you tochoose whether or not this is your favoritemobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make thismobile phone the highest priority. This mo-bile phone will take precedence over otherpaired mobile phones within range and willconnect to the Uconnect system automati-cally when entering the vehicle. Only onemobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audiodevice can be connected to the Uconnectsystem at a time. If “No” is selected, simplyselect “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and theUconnect system will reconnect to theBluetooth device.

Pair Your Android Device:

To search for available devices on yourBluetooth enabled Android Device:

1. Push the Menu button.

2. Select Settings.

3. Select Connections.

4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”

• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled.Once enabled, the mobile phone will be-gin to search for Bluetooth connections.

5. Once your mobile phone finds theUconnect system, select “Uconnect”.

• You may be prompted by your mobilephone to download the phonebook,check “Do Not Ask Again” to automati-cally download the phonebook. This isso you can make calls by saying thename of your contact.

Uconnect Device

335

Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:

1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobilephone matches the passkey shown on theUconnect system then accept theBluetooth pairing request.

NOTE:Some mobile phones require the PIN tobe entered manually, enter the PIN num-ber shown on the Uconnect screen.

Select The Android Mobile Phone's PriorityLevel

When the pairing process has successfullycompleted, the system will prompt you tochoose whether or not this is your favoritemobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make thismobile phone the highest priority. This mobilephone will take precedence over other pairedmobile phones within range and will connectto the Uconnect system automatically whenentering the vehicle. Only one mobile phoneand/or one Bluetooth audio device can be con-nected to the Uconnect system at a time.If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect”from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetoothscreen, and the Uconnect system will recon-nect to the Bluetooth device.

You are now ready to make hands-free calls.Press the Uconnect “Phone” button onyour steering wheel to begin.

NOTE:Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for ad-ditional information on mobile phone pairingand for a list of compatible phones.

Common Phone Commands (Examples)• “Call John Smith”

• “Call John Smith mobile”

• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”

• “Redial”

Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone DuringCall• During a call, press the “Mute” button on

the Phone main screen to mute and un-mute the call.

Transfer Ongoing Call Between HandsetAnd Vehicle• During an on-going call, press the “Trans-

fer” button on the Phone main screen totransfer an on-going call between handsetand vehicle.

Phonebook

The Uconnect system will automatically syncyour phonebook from your paired phone, ifthis feature is supported by your phone.Phonebook contacts are updated each timethat the phone is connected. If your phone

Pairing Request

MU

LTIM

EDIA

336


book entries do not appear, check the set-tings on your phone. Some phones requireyou to enable this feature manually.

• Your phonebook can be browsed on theUconnect system touchscreen, but editingcan only be done on your phone. To browse,press the “Phone” button on the touch-screen, then the “Phonebook” button onthe touchscreen.

Favorite phonebook entries can be saved asFavorites for quicker access. Favorites areshown at the top of the main phone screen.

Voice Command Tips• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John

Doe vs. Call John) will result in greatersystem accuracy.

• You can “link” commands together forfaster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,”for example.

• If you are listening to available voice com-mand options, you do not have to listen tothe entire list. When you hear the commandthat you need, push the button on thesteering wheel, wait for the beep and sayyour command.

Changing The Volume• Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button

, then say a command. For example,"Help".

• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knobto adjust the volume to a comfortable levelwhile the Uconnect system is speaking.

NOTE:The volume setting for Uconnect is differentthan the audio system.

NOTE:To access help, push the Uconnect VR button

(if active) on the steering wheel and say"help." Push the Uconnect VR Pickup button

(if active) or the VR button (ifactive) and say "cancel" to cancel the helpsession.

Using Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi-cations from incoming calls and texts, allow-ing you to keep your eyes on the road andhands on the wheel. For your convenience,

there is a counter display to keep track of yourmissed calls and text messages while youwere using Do Not Disturb.

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with atext message, a call or both, when decliningan incoming call and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:

• “I am driving right now, I will get back toyou shortly.”

• Create a custom auto reply message up to160 characters.

While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call canbe selected so you can still place a secondcall without being interrupted by incomingcalls.

NOTE:

• Only the beginning of your custom messagewill be seen on the touchscreen.

• Reply with text message is not compatiblewith iPhones.

• Auto reply with text message is only avail-able on phones that supporting BluetoothMAP.

337

Incoming Text Messages

After pairing your Uconnect system with aBluetooth enabled mobile device with theMessage Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnectsystem can announce a new incoming textmessage and read it to you over the vehicle’saudio system.

NOTE:Only incoming text messages received duringthe current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.

To enable incoming text messaging:

iPhone

1. Press the settings button on the mobilephone.

2. Select Bluetooth.

• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and themobile phone is paired to the Uconnectsystem.

3. Select located under DEVICES next toUconnect.

4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.

Android Devices

1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone.

2. Select Settings.

3. Select Connections.

4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.

• A pop up will appear asking you toaccept a request for permission to con-nect to your messages. Select “Don’task again” and press OK.

NOTE:All incoming text messages received duringthe current ignition cycle will be deleted fromthe Uconnect system when the ignition isturned to the OFF position.

Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages Enable Android Device Incoming TextMessages

MU

LTIM

EDIA

338

Helpful Tips And Common Questions ToImprove Bluetooth Performance WithYour Uconnect System

Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system afterpairing:

• Set mobile phone to auto-connect ortrusted device in mobile phone Bluetoothsettings (Blackberry devices).

• Perform a factory reset on your mobilephone. Refer to your mobile phone manufac-turer or cellular provider for instructions.

• Many mobile phones do not automaticallyreconnect after being restarted (hard re-boot). Your mobile phone can still be con-nected manually. Close all applications thatmay be operating (refer to mobile phonemanufacturer’s instructions), and follow“Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mo-bile Phone To The Uconnect System”.

Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:

• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone byremoving the battery (if removable — seeyour mobile phone’s owner manual).

• Delete pairing history in mobile phone andUconnect system; usually found in phone’sBluetooth connection settings.

• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in thediscovered Bluetooth devices on your mo-bile phone.

• If your vehicle system generates a pin codethe default is 0000.

Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:

• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the“phonebook download” request on yourmobile phone.

• Up to 5,000 contact names with four num-bers per contact will transfer to theUconnect 4C/4C NAV system phonebook.

Can’t make a conference call:

• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) car-riers do not support conference calling.Refer to your mobile phone user’s manualfor further information.

Making calls while connected to AUX:

• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX whileconnected to Bluetooth will disable Hands-Free Calling. Do not make calls while yourmobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.

UCONNECT VOICERECOGNITION QUICK TIPSIntroducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition withthese helpful quick tips. It provides the keyVoice Commands and tips you need to knowto control your Uconnect system.

If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, orin the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, youhave the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not,you have a Uconnect 4C system.

Get Started

All you need to control your Uconnect systemwith your voice are the buttons on your steer-ing wheel.

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mo-bile device and feature compatibility andto find phone pairing instructions.

2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise andpassenger conversations are examples ofnoise that may impact recognition.

339


3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and vol-ume while facing straight ahead. The mi-crophone is located in the headliner andaimed at the driver.

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, youmust first push either the VR or Phonebutton, wait until after the beep, then sayyour Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message orsystem prompts by pushing the VR orPhone button and saying a Voice Com-mand from current category.

Uconnect Phone Button , Push to initiate,answer, or end a phone call.

Uconnect Voice Recognition Button .

1. Short Press: Push and release the VR but-ton to begin Radio, Climate, Navigation,and other embedded functions. After youhear the single beep, say a command.

2. Long Press: Push and hold continuously fora few seconds, then release the VR buttonfor Siri functions. After you hear the fa-miliar Siri "double beep," say a command.

Phone Hang Up Button, Push to end a call.

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be givenat any point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button . After the beep,say…

• Cancel to stop a current voice session

• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Com-mands

• Repeat to listen to the system promptsagain

Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons

1 — Uconnect Phone Button2 — Uconnect Voice Recognition Button3 — Phone Hang Up Button

MU

LTIM

EDIA

340

Notice the visual cues that inform you of yourvoice recognition system’s status. Cues ap-pear on the top of the touchscreen.

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM orSiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you wouldlike to hear. (Subscription or includedSiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button . After the beep,say…

• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM

• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what tosay or want to learn a Voice Command, pushthe VR button and say “Help.” Thesystem will provide you with a list of com-mands.

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB,Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).Voice operation is only available for con-nected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CDplayer optional and not available on all ve-hicles.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, sayone of the following commands and followthe prompts to switch your media source orchoose an artist.

• Change source to Bluetooth

• Change source to AUX

Uconnect 4

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV

Uconnect 4 Radio

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio

341

• Change source to USB

• Play artist Beethoven; Play album GreatestHits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Playgenre Classical

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touch-screen to see all of the music on your USBdevice. Your Voice Command must matchexactly how the artist, album, song and genreinformation is displayed.

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phonecalls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone-book button is illuminated on your touch-screen, your system is ready. CheckUconnectPhone.com for mobile phone com-patibility and pairing instructions.

Push the Phone button . After the beep,say one of the following commands…

• Call John Smith

• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the systemprompts

• Redial (call previous outgoing phone num-ber)

• Call back (call previous incoming phonenumber)

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, pushthe Phone button and say “Call,” thenpronounce the name exactly as it appears inyour phone book. When a contact has mul-tiple phone numbers, you can say “Call JohnSmith work.”

Uconnect 4 Media

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media

Uconnect 4 Phone

MU

LTIM

EDIA

342


Climate (4C/4C NAV)

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle tempera-tures hands-free and keep everyone comfort-able while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicleis equipped with climate control.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, sayone of the following commands:

• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees

• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees

TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only beused to adjust the interior temperature ofyour vehicle. Voice Command will not work toadjust the heated seats or steering wheel ifequipped.

Navigation (4C NAV)

The Uconnect navigation feature helps yousave time and become more productive whenyou know exactly how to get to where youwant to go. (Navigation is optional on theUconnect 4C system.)

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button. After the beep, say:

• For the 4C Uconnect System, say: “En-ter state.”

• For the 4C NAV Uconnect System, say:“Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Au-burn Hills, Michigan.”

2. Then follow the system prompts.

TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR but-ton . After the beep, say: “Find nearestcoffee shop.”

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inchDisplay Navigation

343

SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) —If Equipped

CAUTION!Some SiriusXM Guardian services, includ-ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Callwill NOT work without an operable LTE(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) networkconnection compatible with your device.


An included trial and/or subscription is re-quired to take advantage of the SiriusXMGuardian services in the next section of thisguide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,press the Apps button on the Uconnect4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started.

NOTE:SiriusXM Guardian is available only onequipped vehicles purchased within the con-tinental United States, Alaska, Hawaii andCanada. Services can only be used wherecoverage is available; see coverage map fordetails.

SOS Call

Theft Alarm Notification

Remote Door Lock/Unlock

Send & Go

Vehicle Finder

Stolen Vehicle Assistance

Remote Vehicle Start**

Remote Horn & Lights

Roadside Assistance Call

Vehicle Health Reports**

Vehicle Health Alert**

Performance Pages Plus**

**If vehicle is equipped.

Register (4C NAV)

To unlock the full potential of SiriusXMGuardian in your vehicle, you must activateyour SiriusXM Guardian services.

1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of yourin-vehicle touchscreen.

2. Select the Activate Services icon fromyour list of apps.

3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with aSiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agentwho will activate services in your vehicle,or select “Enter Email” to activate on theweb.

• U.S. residents visit:www.siriusxm.com/guardian.

• Canadian residents visit:www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca.

Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C NAV)

Your vehicle will send you a monthly emailreport, which summarizes the performance ofyour vehicle’s key systems so you can stay ontop of your vehicle’s maintenance needs ifyou are registered for SiriusXM Guardian.Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle HealthAlerts when it detects issues with its keysystems that need your attention. For furtherinformation go to the Owner Site website atwww.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html(U.S. residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca(Canadian Residents).

MU

LTIM

EDIA

344

www.siriusxm.com/guardian

www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca


www.owners.mopar.ca

Mobile App (4C NAV)

You’re only a few steps away from using remotecommands.

To use the Uconnect App:

• Download the Uconnect App to your mobiledevice.

• Press the Info button on the navigation barat the bottom of the app for Vehicle Info.

• Press the Remote button on the navigationbar at the bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and activate yourhorn and lights remotely.

• Press the Location button on the navigationbar at the bottom of the app to bring up amap to locate your vehicle or send a loca-tion to your vehicle’s navigation system.

• Press the Settings button in the upper leftcorner of the app to bring up app settingsand access the Assist Call Centers.

NOTE:For further information please visitDriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) orDriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).

SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)

Need to find a gas station, view local movielistings, check a sports score or the 5 - dayweather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is asuite of services that brings a wealth of infor-mation right to your Uconnect 4C NAV sys-tem. (Not available for 4C system.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, sayone of the following commands:

• Show fuel prices

• Show 5 - day weather forecast

• Show extended weather

TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible withVoice Command.

Mobile AppSiriusXM Travel Link

345

http://www.driveuconnect.com/

http://www.driveuconnect.ca

Apple CarPlay — If Equipped

Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice tointeract with Siri through your vehicle’s voicerecognition system, and use your smartphone’sdata plan to project your iPhone and a numberof its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen.Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of themedia USB ports, using the factory-providedLightning cable, and press the new CarPlayicon that replaces your “Phone” icon on themain menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay. Pressand hold the VR button on the steering wheel,or press and hold the “Home” button withinApple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recog-nizes natural voice commands to use a list ofyour iPhone’s features:

• Phone

• Music

• Messages

• Maps

• Additional AppsRefer to your Uconnect Owner’s ManualSupplement for further information.

Android Auto — If Equipped

Android Auto allows you to use your voice tointeract with Android’s best-in-class speechtechnology through your vehicle’s voice rec-ognition system, and use your smartphone’sdata plan to project your Android poweredsmartphone and a number of its apps ontoyour Uconnect touchscreen. Connect yourAndroid 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one ofthe media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the newAndroid Auto icon that replaces your“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to beginAndroid Auto. Push and hold the VR buttonon the steering wheel, or press and hold the“Microphone” icon within Android Auto, toactivate Android’s VR, which recognizesnatural voice commands, to use a list of yoursmartphone’s features:

• Maps

• Music

• Phone

• Text Messages

• Additional Apps

Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display

Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display

MU

LTIM

EDIA

346

Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s ManualSupplement for further information.

General Information






Additional Information

© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved.Mopar and Uconnect are registered trade-marks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trade-mark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademarkof Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marksand logos are trademarks of SiriusXM RadioInc.

Uconnect System Support:

• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com orcall: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day7 days a week)

• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.caor call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or1-800-387-9983 (French)

SiriusXM Guardian services support:

• U.S. residents visit siriusxm.com/guardianor call: 1-844-796-4827

• Canadian residents visitwww.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca or call:1-877-324-9091

Android Auto On 7-inch Display

Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display

347

348

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .350FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . .350FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . .350In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . .350Customer Assistance For The HearingOr Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . .350Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351

WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . .351

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .352In The 50 United States AndWashington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352In Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . .352

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

349

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCEThe manufacturer and its authorized dealerare vitally interested in your satisfaction. Wewant you to be happy with our products andservices.

Warranty service must be done by an autho-rized dealer. We strongly recommend that youtake the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Theyknow your vehicle the best, and are mostconcerned that you get prompt and highquality service. The manufacturer's autho-rized dealer have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and thelatest information to ensure the vehicle isfixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to anauthorized dealer service manager first. Mostmatters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied,talk to the general manager or owner of theauthorized dealer. They want to know if youneed assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolvethe concern, you may contact the manufac-turer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer'scustomer center should include the followinginformation:

• Owner's name and address

• Owner's telephone number(home and office)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA US LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (877) 426-5337

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /(800) 387-9983 French

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma,1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

Customer Service Chrysler InternationalServices LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Tel.: (787) 782-5757

Fax: (787) 782-3345

Customer Assistance For The Hearing OrSpeech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing diffi-culties, the manufacturer has installed spe-cial TDD (Telecommunication Devices for theDeaf) equipment at its customer center. Anyhearing or speech impaired customer, who

CUST

OMER

ASSI

STAN

CE

350

has access to a TDD or a conventional tele-typewriter (TTY) in the United States, cancommunicate with the manufacturer by dial-ing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficultiesthat require assistance can use the specialneeds relay service offered by Bell Canada.For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and forVoice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to con-nect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contractfor a vehicle to help protect you from the highcost of unexpected repairs after the manufac-turer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.The manufacturer stands behind only themanufacturer's service contracts. If you pur-chased a manufacturer's service contract,you will receive Plan Provisions and an OwnerIdentification Card in the mail within threeweeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you haveany questions about the service contract, callthe manufacturer's Service Contract National

Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Ca-nadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 Eng-lish / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind anyservice contract that is not the manufactur-er's service contract. It is not responsible forany service contract other than the manufac-turer's service contract. If you purchased aservice contract that is not a manufacturer'sservice contract, and you require service afterthe manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty expires, please refer to the contractdocuments, and contact the person listed inthose documents.

We appreciate that you have made a majorinvestment when you purchased the vehicle.An authorized dealer has also made a majorinvestment in facilities, tools, and training toassure that you are absolutely delighted withthe ownership experience. You will bepleased with their sincere efforts to resolveany warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion en-gines only), some of its constituents, andcertain vehicle components contain, oremit, chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain, or emit, chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATIONSee the Warranty Information Booklet for theterms and provisions of FCA US LLC warran-ties applicable to this vehicle and market.

351

REPORTING SAFETYDEFECTSIn The 50 United States And Washington,D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect that could cause a crash orcause injury or death, you should im-mediately inform the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCAUS LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourauthorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or writeto: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE., West Building,Washington, D.C. 20590. You canalso obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has asafety defect, you should contactthe Customer Service Department im-mediately. Canadian customers whowish to report a safety defect to theCanadian government should con-tact Transport Canada, Motor VehicleDefect Investigations and Recallsat 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.

PUBLICATION ORDERFORMS• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's

Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals orWarranty Booklet. United States customersmay visit the Jeep Contact Us page atwww.jeep.com scroll to the bottom ofthe page and select the “Contact Us” link,then select the “Owner’s Manual andGlove Compartment Material” from theleft menu. You can also purchase a copyby calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or1-800-387-1143 (Canada).

• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you pre-fer, additional printed copies of theOwner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or RadioManuals may be purchased by visitingwww.techauthority.com or by calling1-877-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143(Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Expressand Discover orders are accepted.

CUST

OMER

ASSI

STAN

CE

352

http://www.safercar.gov/



http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm

www.jeep.com

https://www.techauthority.com/en-us/

NOTE:

• The Owner's Manual and User Guide elec-tronic files are also available on theChrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRTwebsites.

• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select“Owner/Service Manuals”, then select yourdesired model year and vehicle from thedrop down lists.

353

354

Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 172On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 172

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)(Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 183Additives, Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .118Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . .116Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . .119Enhanced Accident Response . .123, 223Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . .223Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . .122Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . .119Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .123Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . .117Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Air Bag Light. . . . . . . . . . .73, 116, 138Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .123Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . .243

Air Conditioning Filter. . . . . . . . .52, 243Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . .51Air Conditioning Refrigerant. . . . . . . .243Air Conditioning System . . . . . . .51, 243Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . .259Alarm

Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . .23, 76Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . .23Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . .279

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . .86Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .76Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . .23Assist, Hill Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Audio Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . .54Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .27Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . .39Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .51Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . .151

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .282, 283Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . .250Fluid Type . . . . . . . . .282, 283, 285

Auto Up Power Windows. . . . . . . . . . .54Axle Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . .282, 283

Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 242

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . .74Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . .97B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . .87Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . .87Brake Fluid . . . . . . .249, 282, 283, 285Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

Fluid Check . . . . . . . .249, 282, 283Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . .249Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . .150Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180Capacities, Antifreeze

(Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

INDEX

355

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .279, 280Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . .138Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 268Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .250Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252Check Engine Light

(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . .83Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .137Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137Child Restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Child Restraints

Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . .135How To Stow An Unused ALR SeatBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133Infants And Child Restraints . . . . .126LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .129Lower Anchors And Tethers ForChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129Older Children And Child Restraints .127Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

CleaningWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .264Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . .73Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . .279, 280Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249Selection Of Coolant(Antifreeze) . . . . .279, 281, 283, 284

Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 82Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . .350Customer Programmable Features . . . .320

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . .39Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . .139Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . .82Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . .277

Bulk Storage Of . . . . . . . . . . . . .185Dipsticks

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . .221Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 75Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 75Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . .27DVD Player (Video Entertainment

System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . .150Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . .87

Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . .86Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . .92Traction Control System . . . . . . . .89

Electronic Speed Control (CruiseControl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . .89Electronic Throttle Control Warning

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74Emergency, In Case Of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . .220Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .200Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Emission Control System Maintenance . .83Engine . . . . . . . . . .236, 238, 239, 240

Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . .241Compartment . .236, 237, 238, 239, 240Compartment Identification . . .236, 237

INDE

X

356

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .281, 283, 284Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . .138Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .276Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Oil . . . . . . . . . .279, 281, 283, 284Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Enhanced Accident ResponseFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123, 223

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . .138Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

FiltersAir Conditioning . . . . . . . . . .52, 243Engine Oil . . . . . . . . .281, 283, 284

Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Turn Signal . . . . . . . . .81, 140, 202

Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . .282, 283, 285Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . .279, 280Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Fluid Level ChecksBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

Fluids And Lubricants . . . .281, 283, 284Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . .99Four-Way Hazard Flasher. . . . . . . . . .200Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . .153, 162

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . .153Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .220Front And Rear ParkSense System. . . .176Front ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .176Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276, 277

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 183Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 284Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .150Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . .277Octane Rating . . . . . . .276, 281, 283Requirements . . . . . . . . . .276, 277Specifications . . . . . . .278, 281, 283Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . .279, 280

Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 183Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . .62Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . .331Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . .200Headlights

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . .94Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . .62Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . .271Interior Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . .270Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . .68Inverter, Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68iPod/USB/MP3 Control

Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . .331

357

Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .211Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .211, 250Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Key FobArm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .23Programming AdditionalKey Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 22

Key Fob Programming(Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . . . . . .16

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 22Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Lane Change Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . .41LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . .108Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . .276Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 60Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . .42Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 116, 138Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . .92Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .200Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 82Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . .39Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . .38Engine Temperature Warning . . . . .75Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .200Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . .94Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Malfunction Indicator(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 81Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .75Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .78Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Turn Signal . . . . . . .38, 81, 140, 202Warning (Instrument ClusterDescription) . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 81

Loading VehicleTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . .242Maintenance Schedule . . . .226, 228, 232Malfunction Indicator Light

(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 83Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . .218Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352Manual Transmission

Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . .285Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .202Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . .28Memory Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . .28Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . .101Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286Mopar Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

INDE

X

358

Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . .38

Navigation . . . . . . . .326, 328, 329, 330

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .106Octane Rating, Gasoline

(Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . .276, 281, 283Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . .281, 283, 284

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279, 280Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 283, 284Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .75Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .279Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279

Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . .82Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .82Outlet

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . .218Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . .352

Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151ParkSense Active Park Assist . . . . . . .177ParkSense System, Front And Rear . . .176ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . .174, 176

Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . .306, 312Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . . . . .331Phone (Pairing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331Pinch Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57Placard, Tire And Loading Information . .256Power

Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .205Glass Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . .65Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . .35Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Power ShadeOpen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .285Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . .112Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . .210Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260Radio

Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307, 313Radio Frequency

General Information . . . . . .17, 21, 22Radio Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . .304, 310Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . .42Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Rear ParkSense System . . .174, 176, 180Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . .194Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .107Remote Control

Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Remote Keyless Entry

Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Programming AdditionalKey Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 22

Remote StartingExit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . .20

Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . .19Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 22Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .262Reporting Safety Defects. . . . . . . . . .352

359

Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . .138Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . .140Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . .352Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . .138Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . .250Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137Schedule, Maintenance . . .226, 228, 232SD Card Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Seat Belt

Adjustable Upper ShoulderBelt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .112Energy Management Feature . . . . .112Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . .109Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . .108Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . .110Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .112Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . .111Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . .112Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .107

Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .270Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 138Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . .110Adjustable Upper ShoulderAnchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Front Seat . . . . . . . . .107, 108, 109Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . .109Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .112Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . .110

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 29, 30Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 30Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 76Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162Selection Of Coolant

(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . .281, 283, 284Sentry Key

Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . .16, 22Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .350Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Automatic Transmission . . . .148, 151Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . .81, 140, 202Sirius Satellite Radio

Traffic & Weather . . . . . . . . . . . .330Sirius Travel Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330SiriusXM Guardian . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296In Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . .298Maintaining Your Account . . . . . . .298Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297Remote Features . . . . . . . . . . . .301Renewing Subscriptions . . . . . . . .298Send & Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303Vehicle Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . .344

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . .267, 268Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263Sound Systems

(Radio) . . . . . . . .320, 326, 328, 329Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .210, 264, 265Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 283

INDE

X

360

SpecificationsFuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . .281, 283Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 283

Speed ControlAccel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . .170Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169Distance Setting (ACC Only) . . . . .172Mode Setting (ACC Only) . . . . . . .173Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . .167Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 143, 144

Automatic Transmission . . . .143, 145Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . .143Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . .143, 144Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) . .144Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound SystemControls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Sunroof

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Venting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Supplemental Restraint System -

Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . .93System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . .19

Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .35Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .51Text Messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Tire And Loading Information Placard . .256Tire Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251Tires. . . . . . . . . . . .140, 259, 264, 269

Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . .262Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 268Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . .215, 250Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .264Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215General Information . . . . . . .259, 264High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .259Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .101Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .78Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .215, 262Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250, 259Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263Spare Tire . . . . . . . . .210, 264, 265Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .261Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . .215Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . .275

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . .250Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . .223Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 221

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .221Guide . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189, 190Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Weight . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189, 190

Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . .194Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Trailer Sway Control (TSC). . . . . . . . . .93Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188Trailer Towing Guide . . . . .188, 189, 190Trailer Weight. . . . . . . . . .188, 189, 190

361

Transfer CaseFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 250Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . .261Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 202

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display . . . . .304Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)

Making A Phone Call . . . . . .331, 337Receiving A Call . . . . . . . . . . . .331

Uconnect Phone . . . . . . . .331, 336, 338Uconnect Voice Command . . . . .336, 339Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . .269Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . .276Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . .110USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . .274Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256Vehicle Security Alarm

(Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Vehicle User Guide

ICON Symbol Glossary . . . . . . . . . .13In Vehicle Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13IVH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . .13Searching User Guide . . . . . . . . . .13

Ventilated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336Voice Recognition System

(VR). . . . . . . . . . . . . .336, 337, 339

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . .200Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster

Description). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . .351Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . .41, 241Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . .266Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . . . . . . .266Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56Window Fogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Windows

Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . .139Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . .41, 241

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . .245Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . .245Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . .42

INDE

X

362

363

364

365

366

367

368

ImportantGet warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.

Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving.

If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

Driving and AlcoholDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

WARNING!Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.

For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.

Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.


2018 GRAND CHEROKEE USER GUIDEIncludes SRT®

©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.

To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).

www.jeep.com /en /owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.

Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation /Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting:

www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. residents);

www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Jeep.com (U.S.)

Jeep.ca (Canada)

18W

K-9

26-A

A

GR

AN

D C

HE

RO

KE

E

First E

ditio

n U

ser Guid

e


Documents

2018 Jeep Grand Cherokee User's Guide